You are on page 1of 306

OpenText Application Governance &

Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint®

Enterprise Library Integration –
Administration Guide

This document provides information on the administration and
configuration of OpenText Application Governance &
Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint – Enterprise Library
Integration.

SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1

OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint®
Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide
SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1
Rev.: 2014-Sept-23
This documentation has been created for software version 10.7.
It is also valid for subsequent software versions as long as no new document version is shipped with the product or is
published at https://knowledge.opentext.com.

Open Text SA

40 Avenue Monterey , Luxembourg, Luxembourg L-2163

Tel: 35 2 264566 1

Open Text Corporation

275 Frank Tompa Drive, Waterloo, Ontario, Canada, N2L 0A1

Tel: +1-519-888-7111
Toll Free Canada/USA: 1-800-499-6544 International: +800-4996-5440
Fax: +1-519-888-0677
Support: http://support.opentext.com
For more information, visit https://www.opentext.com

Copyright © 2014 Open Text SA and/or Open Text ULC. All Rights Reserved.
Open Text is a trademark or registered trademark of Open Text SA and/or Open Text ULC. The list of trademarks is not
exhaustive of other trademarks, registered trademarks, product names, company names, brands and service names
mentioned herein are property of Open Text SA or other respective owners.

Disclaimer

No Warranties and Limitation of Liability

Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the features and techniques presented in this publication. However,
Open Text Corporation and its affiliates accept no responsibility and offer no warranty whether expressed or implied, for the
accuracy of this publication.

Table of Contents
Part 1 Introduction 11

1 Introduction .............................................................................. 13
1.1 About OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft
SharePoint ..................................................................................... 13
1.1.1 About Application Governance & Archiving for on-premises
SharePoint environments ................................................................. 13
1.1.2 About Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint
Online ............................................................................................ 14
1.1.3 About OpenText Microsoft SharePoint Services for Extended ECM .... 14
1.1.4 About Enterprise Library Web Parts for Microsoft SharePoint ............. 15
1.1.5 About SharePoint 2010 user experience support ............................... 15

2 Archiving content to Enterprise Library ................................ 17
2.1 Overview of archiving methods ........................................................ 17
2.2 Archiving local or remote content automatically ................................. 18
2.2.1 File actions for profile-based archiving of documents ......................... 18
2.2.2 Actions for profile-based archiving of document sets ......................... 20
2.3 Configuring your environment to archive local or remote documents
automatically .................................................................................. 21
2.3.1 Creating archiving profiles ............................................................... 22
2.3.2 Assigning archiving profiles .............................................................. 23
2.3.3 Scheduling automatic archiving tasks ............................................... 23
2.3.4 Reviewing archiving reports ............................................................. 23
2.4 Archiving local documents, folders, and document sets interactively ... 24
2.4.1 Actions for interactive document archiving ........................................ 25
2.4.1.1 Actions for interactive folder archiving ............................................... 26
2.4.1.2 Actions for interactive document set archiving ................................... 27
2.5 Configuring your environment to archive local documents, folders,
and document sets interactively ....................................................... 28
2.6 Archiving local sites interactively ...................................................... 29
2.6.1 Allowing users to restore local archived SharePoint sites ................... 29
2.6.2 Configuring your environment to archive local sites interactively ......... 30
2.7 Configuring your environment to archive content from an on-
premises SharePoint environment .................................................... 31
2.7.1 Setting permissions on Enterprise Library folders used for archiving ... 33
2.7.2 Removing blocked file types (.url extension) in SharePoint ................. 33
2.7.3 Enabling incremental archiving or synced copy archiving ................... 33
2.7.4 Configuring icons for synced copy documents ................................... 35
2.7.5 Defining how permissions are transferred to Enterprise Library .......... 36
2.7.6 Permission synchronization ............................................................. 36
2.7.7 Defining content type mappings to archive local content .................... 38

OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise
Library Integration – Administration Guide iii
SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1

Table of Contents

2.7.8 Integration with Records Management and Security Clearance
modules ......................................................................................... 38

3 Working with Enterprise Library items from within
SharePoint ................................................................................ 41
3.1 Available operations ........................................................................ 41
3.2 Working with items from SAP Business Workspaces ......................... 43
3.3 Working with Template Workspaces Cases and Binders .................... 44
3.4 SharePoint search integration .......................................................... 44
3.5 Working with reports and results ...................................................... 45
3.6 Working with Physical Objects ......................................................... 45
3.7 Working with workflow tasks ............................................................ 46
3.8 Transferring Enterprise Library items to SharePoint ........................... 46
3.8.1 Creating SharePoint document workspaces for Enterprise Library
documents ...................................................................................... 46
3.8.2 Copying Enterprise Library documents and folders to SharePoint ....... 47
3.8.3 Creating links to Enterprise Library documents and folders in
SharePoint ..................................................................................... 47

Part 2 Configuring your environment for Enterprise Library
Integration 49

4 Configuring your environment for Enterprise Library
Integration ................................................................................ 51
4.1 Configuring general environment settings ......................................... 51
4.1.1 Synchronizing SharePoint users and groups with Content Server ....... 51
4.1.2 Adding SharePoint sites to the trusted sites in Microsoft Internet
Explorer .......................................................................................... 51
4.1.3 Turning off redirection to the primary server of Remote Cache ........... 52
4.2 Adding required permissions ............................................................ 52
4.3 Configuring your environment for Enterprise Library Web Parts .......... 55
4.3.1 Using OpenText Office Editor with Application Governance &
Archiving ........................................................................................ 55
4.3.2 Entering the URL to the SharePoint server as trusted referring
website ........................................................................................... 56
4.3.3 Adding icons for Physical Objects .................................................... 57
4.3.4 Adding document-specific icons ....................................................... 57
4.3.5 Adding icons for SAP Business Workspaces and Business
References ..................................................................................... 58
4.3.6 Changing zip and download settings for the Enterprise Library Web
Part ................................................................................................ 58
4.4 Configuring your environment for searching ...................................... 59
4.4.1 Allowing Enterprise Library properties to be searched in the
Advanced Search Web Part ............................................................. 59

OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise
iv Library Integration – Administration Guide
SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1

Table of Contents

4.4.2 Registering MIME types for Microsoft Office documents on the
SharePoint index server .................................................................. 59
4.4.3 Including and excluding file types in the SharePoint search index ....... 60
4.4.3.1 Adding or removing file types on the Manage File Types page ........... 61

5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in
Central Administration ............................................................ 63
5.1 Accessing the Enterprise Library Integration administration page ....... 64
5.2 Viewing the Application Governance & Archiving version number ....... 65
5.3 Configuring Content Server settings ................................................. 65
5.3.1 Defining Content Server settings ...................................................... 65
5.3.2 Configuring the Content Server Web server ...................................... 69
5.3.3 Defining user mapping providers ...................................................... 70
5.3.4 Defining advanced Content Server settings ....................................... 75
5.3.5 Defining available functionality ......................................................... 78
5.3.6 Defining logging settings .................................................................. 82
5.3.6.1 Defining log settings ........................................................................ 83
5.3.6.2 Example: Defining logging settings for automatic archiving and
permission synchronization features ................................................. 85
5.3.6.3 Accessing log messages in Windows Event Viewer ........................... 85
5.3.6.4 Creating a separate log or event source ........................................... 86
5.3.7 Defining search settings .................................................................. 87
5.3.8 Defining Enterprise Library content sources ...................................... 89
5.3.9 Editing Enterprise Library content sources ........................................ 92
5.3.10 Configuring Records Management settings ....................................... 93
5.4 Creating and managing library and site profiles for archiving .............. 94
5.4.1 Creating local or remote document library profiles ............................. 95
5.4.1.1 Using the Query Designer ................................................................ 98
5.4.2 Assigning document library profiles to document libraries ................ 100
5.4.2.1 Resolving name conflicts ............................................................... 100
5.4.3 Creating a local or remote site profile ............................................. 101
5.4.3.1 Defining document library archiving settings for a local or remote
site profile ..................................................................................... 104
5.4.3.2 Defining document library profile archiving settings for a local or
remote site profile ......................................................................... 105
5.4.3.3 Defining list archiving settings for a local or remote site profile ......... 107
5.4.3.4 Defining site export settings for a local site profile ............................ 108
5.4.4 Assigning site profiles to sites, site collections, or web applications .. 109
5.4.5 Testing a library or site profile ........................................................ 111
5.4.6 Managing library and site profiles ................................................... 112
5.4.7 Best practices for site archiving ...................................................... 112
5.5 Global archiving settings and content type mappings ....................... 116
5.5.1 Defining archiving permissions ....................................................... 117

OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise
Library Integration – Administration Guide v
SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1

Table of Contents

5.5.2 Configuring interactive site archiving settings .................................. 119
5.5.3 Defining interactive document and folder archiving settings .............. 123
5.5.4 Defining content type mappings to archive local content .................. 127
5.6 Scheduled operations .................................................................... 131
5.6.1 Defining scheduled task settings .................................................... 131
5.6.2 Managing scheduled tasks ............................................................ 132
5.6.2.1 Creating an archiving task ............................................................. 133
5.6.2.2 Creating a link cleanup task ........................................................... 134
5.6.2.3 Creating a synced copy task .......................................................... 135
5.6.2.4 Editing and deleting a scheduled task ............................................. 137
5.6.3 Displaying archiving and synced copy updating reports ................... 137
5.6.4 Displaying permission synchronization reports ................................ 138
5.7 View management ........................................................................ 139
5.7.1 Defining Enterprise Library Web Part views .................................... 139
5.7.2 Specifying Enterprise Library columns ............................................ 141
5.8 Activating Integration for Document and Picture Libraries and
Enterprise Library Web Parts ......................................................... 144
5.9 Activating permission synchronization ............................................ 145
5.9.1 Synchronizing permissions for a document library ........................... 145
5.10 Activating site archiving ................................................................. 147
5.11 Defining site settings ..................................................................... 148
5.11.1 Defining available functionality for a SharePoint site ........................ 148
5.11.2 Defining archiving permission settings ............................................ 152
5.11.3 Defining interactive document and folder archiving settings .............. 155
5.11.4 Using placeholders for the folder structure ...................................... 159
5.11.5 Defining content type mappings ..................................................... 161
5.11.6 Defining Enterprise Library Web Part views .................................... 165
5.11.7 Managing configuration files .......................................................... 167
5.11.8 Discarding the site configuration ..................................................... 168
5.12 Defining advanced settings in XML configuration files ...................... 168
5.12.1 Transferring configuration files to a different SharePoint environment ...
169
5.12.2 Updates to configuration files when installing a patch or upgrade ..... 169
5.12.3 ArchivingConfig.xml ...................................................................... 170
5.12.4 ContentTypeMappingConfig.xml .................................................... 172
5.12.5 FeaturesConfig.xml ....................................................................... 172
5.12.5.1 Preventing Application Governance & Archiving from converting
links to Content Server shortcuts .................................................... 173
5.12.6 FilterConfig.xml ............................................................................. 174
5.12.7 InteractiveTransferConfig.xml ........................................................ 174
5.12.8 LivelinkConfig.xml ......................................................................... 174
5.12.9 LivelinkSearchConfig.xml ............................................................... 183
5.12.10 LivelinkWidgetsWebPartConfig.xml ................................................ 184

OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise
vi Library Integration – Administration Guide
SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1

................. 225 6..................... 195 5............1 Defining menu items .......xml file (Enterprise Library Web Part) .................................. 199 5..... 205 5.................. 216 6....12............2 Monitoring the crawling performance ....................................3 Installing the SharePoint Server 2013 Client Components SDK ....................................... 192 5............................3..16.................. 219 6.... 217 6......xml ...xml .........18 Configuration files for Enterprise Library Web Parts .................2 Resolving errors after archiving a remote site interactively ...195 5..................12............ 204 5.............16 PropertyTypesConfig..............3 Defining the caching time of displayed node information ................12......12...............................................11 LogConfig....... 206 5.......4 Archiving a remote site interactively ..........13 PermissionConfig..................................................2 Defining menu items for object types ........................19 WebPartColumnsConfig..20 Changing the notification text for unused sites ....................... 215 6.... 221 6.....................................1 Downloading the property mapping tool ...............15 Monitoring the performance ....... 220 6.............15........... 208 5...1 Monitoring the archiving performance ..................................................12.........................1.. 198 5..... Table of Contents 5................14 Customizing GUI strings .............5 Reviewing Application Governance & Archiving for SharePoint Online log files .......3........16 Activating link redirection ......... 199 5...........12........xml ........................15................................3........12............. 204 5....... 209 5........ 185 5...................2 Creating Content Server categories .....4... 211 Part 3 Administering Application Governance & Archiving for SharePoint Online 213 6 Archiving remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online sites and documents ....................... 221 6.......................xml (on-premises SharePoint server) ............. 208 5.....1 Analyzing remote site archiving results ...3.......................1 Preparing to run the property mapping tool ............................ 206 5.......2 Specifying connection information for remote sites ........1...xml ........................1....................12... 226 6.....................12.....12......17 Displaying SharePoint search results in the Inspection page ... 221 6.... 205 5................. 209 5................... 186 5...... 198 5............12....xml ........xml .....................14 ProfileConfig..4...................4 Adding object definitions for OpenText Template Workspaces items ......12.....4 Verifying account permissions ........................................... 220 6......................12..........................................12.......... 227 OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide vii SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .1 Configuring your environment to archive remote sites and documents ...........................13 Editing style sheets ...............12......2 Running the property mapping tool ..........................................3......................12....12............................................. 187 5........... 222 6..... 210 5....3.12............................................3 Defining property mappings for remote sites and documents .......1 Enabling users to upload files in Explorer view ........................................15 ProfileMappingsConfig. 219 6...12 ObjectTypeConfig....17 ProviderConfig..................................................................1.........

..................2 Adding OpenText Enterprise Library apps to an app catalog site ..... 256 9....1 PropertyMappingConfig........................ 231 7... 250 9 Defining advanced configuration settings for remote site archiving features .................xml file elements and attributes .................6 Viewing the app version number and installation details ..2 Understanding the PropertyTypesConfig.........................2 Enterprise Library Sidebar Web Part .........1.................4......... 257 9.5 Customizing the appearance of OpenText Enterprise Library apps ...... 233 7.. 250 8.........................................Table of Contents 7 Installing and configuring OpenText Enterprise Library apps .................1.xml file elements and attributes ........................1 PropertyTypesConfig.............10 Configuring your environment for single sign-on authentication ...................1.......................................................1 Downloading OpenText Enterprise Library app files ......................2 ObjectTypeConfig...................................................................................... 237 7........................1..........4 Configuring OpenText Enterprise Library apps .....3...1.... 259 Part 4 Configuring OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts in SharePoint 261 10 Integrating and configuring OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts ....... 263 10...2............1 RemoteSiteConfig. 240 7.............................. 239 7................. 237 7..... 253 9.. 264 OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise viii Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 ................7 Adding an OpenText Enterprise Library app part to a SharePoint Online page ..1 Enterprise Library Web Part .............1....... 263 10.........1 Understanding OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts ..........2 Upgrading the app and app part in SharePoint Online .....9 Displaying specific object types and context menu items in OpenText Enterprise Library apps and app parts ....1 Preparing to upgrade the OpenText Enterprise Library app ......xml file ...................1.. 230 7....xml file ........................ 249 8.................1 Specifying configuration settings for an OpenText Enterprise Library app ....9.. 254 9.....xml file elements and attributes ..1........................ 249 8.....................1...........8 Configuring OpenText Enterprise Library app parts ..............3 Understanding the RemoteSiteConfig............................................. 229 7.xml file ......... 240 7................................1 Understanding the PropertyMappingConfig...........xml file for an OpenText Enterprise Library app and app part ............. 254 9..1 Editing the ObjectTypeConfig.....................1... 247 8 Upgrading the OpenText Enterprise Library app ........................................1....9..............3 Adding OpenText Enterprise Library apps to a SharePoint Online site .................xml elements and attributes ..............1 Upgrading the OpenText Enterprise Library app ... 232 7.... 259 9............................ 232 7.....1 Editing configuration files for remote site archiving features .. 236 7...... 263 10........................................... 238 7... 253 9.......................................................

.. 292 Part 5 Appendices 295 11 Appendix – Content type mapping conversion options .............. 288 10........3.....3 Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part .1.... 266 10...........4....................................................................1 Configuring the Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part ........................................ 278 10...... 267 10.......4 LiveReport Result Web Part ..........2 Configuring the Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part ... 272 10........1.6 Modifying My Borrowed Items Web Part settings ....... 271 10..4.....4 Modifying LiveReport Result Web Part settings ...2..3...............................4.........3... 290 10... 271 10..................4 Activating and modifying Enterprise Library search Web Parts .......... 267 10.1....... 268 10.1 Activating the Enterprise Library search pages in Enterprise Search Center ......................................3........3. 286 10....................... 290 10..7 Enterprise Library Search Box.... 281 10.......5 LiveReports Web Part ................1 Configuring Enterprise Library Web Part settings .......1.....................4.3..................................................1.............2 Extending the Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part .....6 Modifying Enterprise Library Advanced Search Web Part settings ......................................... 297 OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide ix SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 ......1....... 289 10. 288 10....5 Modifying Enterprise Library Search Box Web Part settings ..... 284 10................ 289 10.................6 Workflow Inbox Web Part ................ 283 10......2 Activating the Enterprise Library search tab in Enterprise Search Center ..... 276 10...............................................3........................... 272 10. 265 10......3.............................4 Connecting two Enterprise Library search Web Parts ................2.............4.......3 Adding Enterprise Library search Web Parts to pages ................. Table of Contents 10.........8 My Borrowed Items Web Part ....3...... 285 10...5 Modifying LiveReports Web Part settings .......... 277 10...........7 Modifying Workflow Inbox Web Part settings .... 287 10...........7 Modifying Enterprise Library Search Results Web Part settings ........4...3 Configuring OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts ..............4..... and Enterprise Library Search Results Web Parts .....................................2 Adding OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts .3 Modifying Enterprise Library Sidebar Web Part settings ........... Enterprise Library Advanced Search.............

.

Part 1 Introduction .

.

Chapter 1 Introduction 1. including: • OpenText Classifications • OpenText Records Management • OpenText Physical Objects • OpenText Security Clearance • Site Deployment allows you to structure.1 About Application Governance & Archiving for on- premises SharePoint environments For an on-premises SharePoint environment. lists. control. 1. You can use Site Deployment to accelerate the roll- out of sites that contain OpenText functionality. or sites that already contain archiving rules. you can archive content from the SharePoint server to Enterprise Library. You can archive SharePoint documents. If you are using an on-premises SharePoint server. sites that provide access to OpenText Content Server folders and documents. Application Governance & Archiving provides the following features: • Enterprise Library Integration allows you to integrate Microsoft SharePoint Foundation 2013 or Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 with OpenText Enterprise Library. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 13 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .1. These are. OpenText Archive Server. If you are using Microsoft SharePoint Online. and several Content Server modules. work with the archived content in SharePoint. Application Governance & Archiving supports integration with OpenText Content Server. and automate the creation and lifecycle of SharePoint sites. and deploy custom SharePoint sites. you can archive content from the cloud-based environment to Enterprise Library and work with the archived content in SharePoint Online.1 About OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint You can use OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint (Application Governance & Archiving) to integrate your on-premises SharePoint server environment or cloud-based SharePoint Online environment with OpenText Enterprise Library. Users can also add Web Parts to SharePoint pages to access Enterprise Library content and functionality from within SharePoint. and you can integrate Enterprise Library content into SharePoint searches. and sites into Enterprise Library. for example.

If you install Application Governance & Archiving in your on-premises SharePoint environment with the SharePoint Online Support feature selected. You can use SharePoint Services for Extended ECM to create new or access existing SAP business workspaces from SharePoint Server 2013 or SharePoint Foundation 2013. SharePoint Services for Extended ECM functionality is available if you install Application Governance & Archiving in your on-premises SharePoint environment with the Extended ECM Support feature selected.1.app) is included as a separate file with the Enterprise Library Web Parts for Microsoft SharePoint installation package. administrators can archive SharePoint Online sites and document libraries to OpenText Enterprise Library and administer archiving tasks in Central Administration.2 About Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint Online Application Governance & Archiving supports integration with Microsoft SharePoint Online environments.1. 1. In your SharePoint Online environment. Note: The OpenText Enterprise Library app file (OpenText Enterprise Library. This component builds on the functionality of OpenText Extended ECM for SAP Solutions that integrates SAP with OpenText Content Server. you can optionally deploy the OpenText Enterprise Library for Extended ECM app to work with Content Server business workspaces in SharePoint Online. you can also deploy the OpenText Enterprise Library app to allow users to browse and work with Enterprise Library content in SharePoint Online sites.3 About OpenText Microsoft SharePoint Services for Extended ECM SharePoint Services for Extended ECM extends the Enterprise Library Integration functionality and gives SharePoint users access to SAP related business processes.app) is included as a separate file with the SharePoint Services for Extended ECM installation package. If you are using the OpenText ECMLink for SAP Solutions module in Content Server. Users can also add the OpenText Extended ECM Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part to SharePoint pages to display business workspace metadata and information.Chapter 1 Introduction Managing sites from their design and creation through to their archiving and ultimate disposal helps to control large SharePoint deployments. regardless of the applications that reside in the environment. The OpenText Enterprise Library for Extended ECM app file (OpenText Enterprise Library for Extended ECM. 1. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 14 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .

1. Navigation paths and screenshots reflect the SharePoint 2013 interface. archiving functionality. and Site Deployment). even if this guide focuses on the SharePoint 2013 experience. You can install this package if you only plan to use the Enterprise Library Web Parts and do not need to use other Application Governance & Archiving features (for example.1. About OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint 1. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 15 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . indexing Content Server documents into SharePoint search.4 About Enterprise Library Web Parts for Microsoft SharePoint Enterprise Library Web Parts for Microsoft SharePoint is a specialized package of Application Governance & Archiving that includes only OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts for an on-premises SharePoint environment.1.5 About SharePoint 2010 user experience support Application Governance & Archiving supports both the SharePoint 2013 and the SharePoint 2010 user experiences. 1.1. The navigation paths and screenshots for the SharePoint 2010 user experience are identical or similar to those in the corresponding guide in the current version of Application Governance & Archiving.

.

Archiving content from a remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online environment If you plan to archive content from a remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online environment. See “Archiving local documents. determine which archiving methods suit the needs of your environment. allow users to configure archiving options and start the archiving process manually using menu options in SharePoint). See “Archiving remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online sites and documents“ on page 215. • Allow users to archive SharePoint documents. folders. See “Archiving local or remote content automatically” on page 18. Archiving content from an on-premises SharePoint environment If you plan to archive content from an on-premises SharePoint environment. and sites interactively (that is. you can do one or both of the following: • Archive local SharePoint documents and sites automatically to Enterprise Library based on rules and settings you define in one or more local archiving profiles.Chapter 2 Archiving content to Enterprise Library Application Governance & Archiving provides secure and long-term storage of SharePoint or SharePoint Online content on different archive media. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 17 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . the administrator configures archiving options and starts the archiving process manually). folders.1 Overview of archiving methods Before configuring your environment for archiving. See “Archiving local or remote content automatically” on page 18. 2. • Archive SharePoint Online sites interactively from Central Administration (that is. and document sets interactively” on page 24. you can do one or both of the following: • Archive remote SharePoint and SharePoint Online documents and sites automatically to Enterprise Library based on rules and settings you define.

and replaces the original document with a shortcut that points to the archived document.Chapter 2 Archiving content to Enterprise Library 2. See also “Activating link redirection” on page 209. Windows Task Scheduler runs a scheduled archiving task to archive content automatically at a specific time or at specific intervals. Move or Copy) to specify how the documents or document sets are archived when you run the scheduled archiving task.1 File actions for profile-based archiving of documents The following file actions are available for archiving documents automatically. Application Governance & Archiving transfers documents and sites and their properties from SharePoint document libraries to Enterprise Library. you can use the context menus of the shortcut and ribbon buttons to perform operations on the archived document (for example. Create link Application Governance & Archiving archives the document in Enterprise Library. You can also specify whether sites are archived with or without their original document libraries and lists. you can specify whether specific or all versions of SharePoint documents are archived when the archiving task is run. The shortcut is a link document that has the file extension . deletes the original document in SharePoint.url. For example. you can display the document or version information). the Automatic Document Numbering feature renames Content Server OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 18 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . It does not apply if you are archiving content from a remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online environment. the archived document is retrieved. Note: You do not need to specify a file action if you are archiving a site without document libraries. When you configure Application Governance & Archiving to archive content automatically. If you are setting up your environment to archive documents or document sets automatically. Notes • This file action is available if you are archiving content from an on- premises SharePoint server. In SharePoint.2 Archiving local or remote content automatically You can configure Application Governance & Archiving to archive documents or sites automatically from a local on-premises SharePoint server or remote SharePoint Online environment. • Documents that are archived using this file action may be renamed automatically by Content Server features and settings (for example. Application Governance & Archiving then archives content based on the rules and conditions you define in one or more archiving profiles. 2. you must choose a file action (for example. During the archiving process. If you click the shortcut. in an archiving profile.2.

As a result. you can search for the document using the Advanced Search functionality. so both copies can be edited independently of each other. By default. Depending how you installed Application Governance & Archiving. • After a document has been archived. callout previews of SharePoint documents will not work after a document has been archived. The Synced Copy file action is deprecated as of Application Governance & Archiving 10.2. Important • If you want to move a document in SharePoint after you have used the Synced Copy or Incremental file action to archive it. for example. No link document is created. You can use this file action to back up SharePoint documents at a specified time. the document may lose information about its archived status. You can modify the configuration to keep the original document name as the name of the link document. You can use this file action if. the corresponding document is updated automatically in Enterprise Library. copies of the document are stored in both SharePoint and Enterprise Library.7. the original SharePoint document cannot be viewed or edited in Office Web Apps. Both file actions provide similar archiving functionality. If a new version of the document is saved in SharePoint. For more information. however.7. Synced Copy or Incremental Application Governance & Archiving archives a copy of the document in Enterprise Library while the original document remains in SharePoint. It is available only if you upgraded Application Governance & Archiving from a previous version and performed specific tasks during the upgrade process. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 19 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . move the document only within its document library. Also. Move Application Governance & Archiving archives the document in Enterprise Library and deletes the original document from SharePoint. For more information. Copy Application Governance & Archiving archives a copy of the document in Enterprise Library and the original document remains unchanged in SharePoint. Archiving local or remote content automatically items). However. 2. Otherwise. The Incremental file action is available in all new installations as of Application Governance & Archiving 10. you can choose to enable either the Incremental or Synced Copy file action for archiving. The copy in SharePoint is not linked to the archived document in Enterprise Library. the archived document name is used as the name of the link document. see “Enabling incremental archiving or synced copy archiving” on page 33. you need to transfer completed SharePoint documents from SharePoint to Enterprise Library. but each action processes files in a different way. see OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint SDK. the document can be opened and edited in local Office Professional applications.

You can search for the document set and its documents and folders within Enterprise Library. Copy The original document set remains unchanged in SharePoint and a copy of the document set is archived within an Enterprise Library folder that has the same name as the original document set. The document set is available in both SharePoint and Enterprise Library. and display them in the Enterprise Library Web Part. The individual documents are archived according to the option you select in the File Action area on the Library Profile Configuration page. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 20 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . It does not apply if you are archiving content from a remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online environment. The context menu of the shortcut allows you to perform operations on the archived document set (for example. you can display document set information and audit information). A shortcut pointing to the archived document set is created in SharePoint.2. but the document set in SharePoint is not linked to the document set archived in Enterprise Library. and archived within an Enterprise Library folder that has the same name as the original document set. Create link The document set and its contents are deleted in SharePoint and archived within an Enterprise Library folder that has the same name as the original document set. the individual archived documents are displayed with a disc icon. Note: Document set archiving is available only if you are using SharePoint Server 2013.2 Actions for profile-based archiving of document sets The following actions are available for archiving document sets automatically. The document library that contains the archived documents is not displayed with a disc icon. No shortcuts are created in SharePoint. You can use this action if you need to transfer complete SharePoint document sets to Enterprise Library. Note: This action is available if you are archiving content from an on- premises SharePoint server. Clicking the shortcut displays the archived document set in SharePoint. No corresponding folder or container item is created for the document set in Enterprise Library.Chapter 2 Archiving content to Enterprise Library 2. None Only the individual documents within the document set are archived in the destination Enterprise Library folder. Move The document set and its contents are deleted in SharePoint. You can use this action to back up SharePoint document sets to Enterprise Library. This feature is not available if you are using SharePoint Foundation 2013. In SharePoint.

check in all the documents you want to archive before running the scheduled task. Assign archiving profiles to document libraries or sites. For more information. Configuring your environment to archive local or remote documents automatically Archiving documents that are located in a folder and checked out within a document set If a document set contains a folder that has a document that is checked out in SharePoint. If you plan to use the Copy action and want to archive all of the documents in a document set. complete the following tasks: 1. After running a scheduled task. you can review archiving reports to view information about the archived items. you can optionally edit the ArchivingConfig.xml file provides additional configuration settings that are not available in Central Administration by default. 3. Note: If you plan to archive content from an on-premises SharePoint environment.xml” on page 170. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 21 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Create a scheduled task to run the archiving process automatically. the document will be archived if either of the following actions are selected when the scheduled task archives the parent document set: • Create Link • Move If you select the Copy action.3 Configuring your environment to archive local or remote documents automatically To configure your environment to archive local or remote documents automatically. 2. See one of the following: • “Configuring your environment to archive content from an on-premises SharePoint environment” on page 31 • “Configuring your environment to archive remote sites and documents” on page 216 2. 4.3. Configure the general archiving settings required for your environment.xml file to configure advanced archiving settings. a document that is located in a folder and checked out within a document set will not be archived when the scheduled task archives the parent document set. 2. see “ArchivingConfig. Create one or more archiving profiles. The ArchivingConfig.

For more information. You can also specify other criteria such as which document versions to archive. You can create two types of archiving profiles: library profiles and site profiles. you can specify preconditions for archiving (for example. You can create local library or site profiles to archive content from an on-premises SharePoint environment.1 Creating archiving profiles Before you can archive documents or sites automatically. export settings. For example. replaced by a link. or kept as a copy. For more information. you can specify how the site content is archived. see “Creating a local or remote site profile” on page 101. or remote library or site profiles to archive content from a remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online environment. see “Creating local or remote document library profiles” on page 95. you must create one or more archiving profiles in Central Administration.3. In a library profile. you can specify whether archived documents are deleted in SharePoint.Chapter 2 Archiving content to Enterprise Library 2. In a site profile. Site profile You can create site profiles to archive content from complete SharePoint sites. you can use the Query Designer to define archiving criteria in Collaborative Application Markup Language (CAML). OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 22 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . For more information. you can define the rules that determine which documents are archived automatically and how documents are archived. see “Archiving remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online sites and documents“ on page 215. you can write C# functions to check SharePoint audit information and verify whether a site has been modified during a specified period). You must also configure your environment to archive remote sites. In a library profile. For example. Local and remote profiles Library profiles and site profiles can be either local or remote. Note: If you want to create remote library or site profiles. and archiving conditions for document libraries and lists. Library profile You can create library profiles to archive documents from SharePoint document libraries. the SharePoint Online Support feature must be installed.

Before running an scheduled archiving task. 2. sites. After you define a site profile.3 Scheduling automatic archiving tasks After assigning archiving profiles to SharePoint or SharePoint Online document libraries. Configuring your environment to archive local or remote documents automatically 2. you can assign it to a site. site collections.4 Reviewing archiving reports When documents are archived automatically. Testing a profile allows you to view detailed information about the SharePoint content that will be archived before running the actual archiving process.3. site collections. Note: If a document is checked out in SharePoint and does not belong to a document set. see “Displaying archiving and synced copy updating reports” on page 137. For more information. 2. You can assign one archiving profile to each scheduled task. you can assign it to a SharePoint or SharePoint Online document library or use it in a site profile to specify how the document libraries of a site are archived. make sure that all of the documents you want to archive are checked into SharePoint. For more information. you can test the archiving profiles you define. Reports are XML documents that you can access from the OpenText Application Governance & Archiving page in Central Administration. or web applications” on page 109. the document will not be archived when the scheduled archiving task is run. site collection or web application. you can set up scheduled archiving tasks in Central Administration. see “Scheduled operations” on page 131. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 23 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . see “Testing a library or site profile” on page 111.3. see “Assigning site profiles to sites. 2. and lists. For more information. A site profile can be applied to all subsites of the parent site you want archive. document libraries. For more information. see “Assigning document library profiles to document libraries” on page 100.2 Assigning archiving profiles After you define a local or remote library profile.3. or web applications.3. Before running the archiving process. Application Governance & Archiving creates a detailed report about the archived documents. For more information.

For example. and document sets are archived when users archive content interactively.4 Archiving local documents. the Send to Enterprise Library menu option is not available for the document. more than 1 GB of content). • If you need to archive a large set of documents. see “Activating Integration for Document and Picture Libraries and Enterprise Library Web Parts” on page 144. folders. you can specify which archiving actions are available to users in SharePoint and whether users are permitted to change the default actions. • If a document is checked out in SharePoint and does not belong to a document set or folder. Each SharePoint item that is archived interactively is classified according to the mappings. you can also specify content type mappings to Records Management classifications. the archiving process may time out or stop responding. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 24 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . folders. or sites (for example. Notes • Interactive archiving is available to users in SharePoint only when the OpenText Integration for Document and Picture Libraries feature is enabled for a site collection. The following archiving options are available in SharePoint: • The Send to Enterprise Library option in the document and folder context menus of SharePoint document libraries • The Send button in the Enterprise Library ribbon area in the FILES tab On the Interactive Document And Folder Archiving Settings page in Central Administration. OpenText recommends that you create a scheduled archiving task to archive the content automatically. In some cases. and document sets interactively You can allow users with Site Administrator permissions to archive documents. If the Records Management module is enabled for Content Server. You can also specify that a particular archiving action should be used whenever users archive content interactively. you can configure how SharePoint documents.Chapter 2 Archiving content to Enterprise Library 2. If you want to archive the document interactively. and document sets from a local SharePoint server interactively. folders. folders. For more information. you must first check it into SharePoint. You can also define a default Records Management classification to apply to items with a content type for which no mapping is defined. if users attempt to archive such content interactively.

and replaces the original document with a shortcut that points to the archived document. copies of the document are stored in both SharePoint and Enterprise Library. In SharePoint.4. If you click the shortcut. Synced Copy or Incremental Application Governance & Archiving archives a copy of the document in Enterprise Library while the original document remains in SharePoint. the Automatic Document Numbering feature renames Content Server items). Create link Application Governance & Archiving archives the document in Enterprise Library. Move Application Governance & Archiving archives the document in Enterprise Library and deletes the original document from SharePoint. You can use this file action if. the archived document is retrieved. the corresponding document is updated automatically in Enterprise Library.4. the archived document name is used as the name of the link document. 2. You can modify the configuration to keep the original document name as the name of the link document. Copy Application Governance & Archiving archives a copy of the document in Enterprise Library and the original document remains unchanged in SharePoint. If a new version of the document is saved in SharePoint. you can use the context menus of the shortcut and ribbon buttons to perform operations on the archived document (for example. for example. deletes the original document in SharePoint. you can choose to enable either the Incremental or Synced Copy file action for archiving. see OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint SDK. so both copies can be edited independently of each other.1 Actions for interactive document archiving The following actions are available for archiving documents interactively. you can display the document or version information). By default. You can use this file action to back up SharePoint documents at a specified time. See also “Activating link redirection” on page 209. Notes • This file action is available if you are archiving content from an on- premises SharePoint server. It does not apply if you are archiving content from a remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online environment.url. The shortcut is a link document that has the file extension . you can search for the document using the Advanced Search functionality. Archiving local documents. however. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 25 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . and document sets interactively 2. No link document is created. For more information. folders. As a result. Depending how you installed Application Governance & Archiving. The copy in SharePoint is not linked to the archived document in Enterprise Library. • Documents that are archived using this file action may be renamed automatically by Content Server features and settings (for example. you need to transfer completed SharePoint documents from SharePoint to Enterprise Library.

callout previews of SharePoint documents will not work after a document has been archived. Move The folder and its contents are deleted in SharePoint and no shortcuts are created. • After a document has been archived.Chapter 2 Archiving content to Enterprise Library Both file actions provide similar archiving functionality. Also.7. For more information. and find them using Enterprise Library search. see “Enabling incremental archiving or synced copy archiving” on page 33.7. access the documents through the created links. however. the document may lose information about its archived status. Important • If you want to move a document in SharePoint after you have used the Synced Copy or Incremental file action to archive it.4. documents in the folders and subfolders are deleted in SharePoint and replaced by shortcuts pointing to the archived documents. move the document only within its document library. the original SharePoint document cannot be viewed or edited in Office Web Apps. A shortcut pointing to the archived folder is created. Users can still browse folders in SharePoint. you can still search for the documents and folders within Enterprise Library and display them in the Enterprise Library Web Part. but each action processes files in a different way. The Incremental file action is available in all new installations as of Application Governance & Archiving 10.1 Actions for interactive folder archiving The following actions are available for archiving folders interactively: Create link The folder and all documents and subfolders are deleted in SharePoint.1. displaying document information). The context menu of the shortcut allows the user to perform operations on the archived documents (for example. However. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 26 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . displaying folder and audit information). Otherwise. Clicking the shortcut displays the archived folder in SharePoint. The Synced Copy file action is deprecated as of Application Governance & Archiving 10. The context menu of the shortcut allows you to perform operations on the archived folder (for example. This action is useful if completed SharePoint folders are to be archived from SharePoint to Enterprise Library. It is available only if you upgraded Application Governance & Archiving from a previous version and performed specific tasks during the upgrade process. However. Clicking the shortcuts retrieves the archived documents. the document can be opened and edited in local Office Professional applications. Child links The folder structure in SharePoint remains unchanged. 2.

and display them in the Enterprise Library Web Part. Archiving local documents. A shortcut pointing to the archived document set is created in SharePoint. The context menu of the shortcut allows you to perform operations on the archived document set (for example. If you plan to use the Child Links or Copy action and want to archive all of the documents in a folder. You can use this action if you need to transfer complete SharePoint document sets to Enterprise Library. Create link The document set and its contents are deleted in SharePoint and archived within an Enterprise Library folder that has the same name as the original document set. and archived within an Enterprise Library folder that has the same name as the original document set. You can search for the document set and its documents and folders within Enterprise Library. check in all the documents you want to archive before running the archiving process on the folder. Archiving documents that are checked out within folders If a folder contains a document that is checked out in SharePoint. It does not apply if you are archiving content from a remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online environment. a document that is checked out in a folder will not be archived when you archive the document’s parent folder interactively. you can display document set information and audit information).1. This feature is not available if you are using SharePoint Foundation 2013.4. 2. 2. Move The document set and its contents are deleted in SharePoint. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 27 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .2 Actions for interactive document set archiving The following actions are available for archiving documents in document sets interactively: Note: Document set archiving is available only if you are using SharePoint Server 2013. and document sets interactively Copy The original folder with all documents and subfolders stays unchanged in SharePoint and has no relation to the archived folder. No shortcuts are created in SharePoint. Users can find the folder in both SharePoint and Enterprise Library. Clicking the shortcut displays the archived document set in SharePoint. the document will be archived if either of the following actions are selected when you archive the document’s parent folder interactively: • Create Link • Move If you select the Child Links or Copy actions. folders.4. Note: This action is available if you are archiving content from an on- premises SharePoint server. This action can be used to back up SharePoint folders to Enterprise Library at a specified time.

See “Activating Integration for Document and Picture Libraries and Enterprise Library Web Parts” on page 144. Enable the OpenText Integration for Document and Picture Libraries feature for a site collection. check in all the documents you want to archive before running the archiving process on the document set. 2. None Only the individual documents within the document set are archived in the destination Enterprise Library folder. See “Configuring your environment to archive content from an on-premises SharePoint environment” on page 31.Chapter 2 Archiving content to Enterprise Library Copy The original document set remains unchanged in SharePoint and a copy of the document set is archived within an Enterprise Library folder that has the same name as the original document set. In SharePoint. but the document set in SharePoint is not linked to the document set archived in Enterprise Library. The individual documents are archived according to the option you select in the File Action area on the Library Profile Configuration page. No corresponding folder or container item is created for the document set in Enterprise Library. You can use this action to back up SharePoint document sets to Enterprise Library. The document set is available in both SharePoint and Enterprise Library.5 Configuring your environment to archive local documents. the document will be archived if either of the following actions are selected when you archive the parent document set interactively: • Create Link • Move If you select the Copy action. complete the following tasks: 1. 2. Configure the general archiving settings required for your environment. Archiving documents that are located in a folder and checked out within a document set If a document set contains a folder that has a document that is checked out in SharePoint. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 28 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . If you plan to use the Copy action. The document library that contains the archived documents is not displayed with a disc icon. and document sets interactively To allow users to archive content interactively. a document that is located in a folder and checked out within a document set will not be archived when you archive the parent document set interactively. and want to archive all of the documents in a document set. the individual archived documents are displayed with a disc icon. folders.

2. To export a site for OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 29 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . • Delete the site after it is archived. Note: If you choose to archive document libraries. Archiving local sites interactively 3. you can specify the following options options: • Enterprise Library destination folder to which sites are archived. • Archiving of all subsites. 2. When a site is archived.6 Archiving local sites interactively Site Administrators can archive complete SharePoint sites and later restore them to SharePoint. all users who previously had read permissions for the original SharePoint site can access the contents of the archived site.1 Allowing users to restore local archived SharePoint sites Site Administrators can restore archived sites back into SharePoint if a site export package is created when the site is archived. For more information. A Site Administrator can start the archiving process manually on the Site Settings page in SharePoint. If enabled. you can specify whether site export packages are created by default when sites are archived. all documents that are checked out in SharePoint are archived. Important • Site administrators can only restore sites to the same SharePoint environment that was used to archive the sites. see “Configuring interactive site archiving settings” on page 119. Specify how documents and folders are archived. You can also allow users to specify whether a site export package is created when they archive sites interactively. you have the following options to specify which information should be included in the export package: • Inclusion of user information • List item and document versions to include • Records Management classification for the complete site. Site Archiving When you configure the interactive archiving of sites.6. • Archiving of the site export package which is needed to be able to restore a site. See “Defining interactive document and folder archiving settings” on page 123. • Archiving of specific lists or document libraries.6. 2. In Central Administration. along with all documents that are checked in. • Allow users to change the default settings.

Enterprise Library Integration – User Guide (SHLES-UGD). • Using SharePoint 2013. 2.8 “Restoring archived sites” in OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint .2 Configuring your environment to archive local sites interactively 1. • You also cannot restore sites that were archived with previous SharePoint versions running software versions up to 10. If you select lists and document libraries as the site content to be archived. See “Configuring your environment to archive content from an on-premises SharePoint environment” on page 31. Application Governance & Archiving uses the built-in site export mechanism from SharePoint 2013. 3. assuming that you do not make changes to your current SharePoint environment that could prevent the site from being restored properly.Chapter 2 Archiving content to Enterprise Library archiving. See “Activating site archiving” on page 147. it will be created with the appropriate experience version. Enable the site archiving feature. you can still create site collections using the SharePoint 2010 experience version.6. Configure the general archiving settings required for your environment. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 30 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . they will not work any longer because the restored documents have a different ID in SharePoint. however. See “Configuring interactive site archiving settings” on page 119. 2.6. OpenText recommends that you archive document libraries and lists separately when archiving sites. • If the site you archived contained documents with synced copy documents. For more information about restoring sites. still browse them in the archived sites of the Enterprise Library Web Part. see section 3. you can. If you choose to create a new site collection for the restored site automatically. You can also restore selected folders and documents from document libraries in the archived sites. The site export formats of different SharePoint versions are incompatible. If you archive sites from such site collections. Configure interactive site archive settings. you can restore them only to site collections using the SharePoint 2010 experience version. This mechanism usually runs without errors. An archived site can be restored only to a site collection with the same experience version. As a best practice.5 to SharePoint 2013 running the software version 10.

url extension required not required not in SharePoint if you plan applicable applicable to use the Create Link action. Note: Remove the internet shortcuts (extension . OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 31 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . see “Removing blocked file types (.7 Configuring your environment to archive content from an on-premises SharePoint environment The following table summarizes the configuration steps for archiving content automatically or interactively from an on-premises SharePoint environment: Table 2-1: Configuration steps Configuration step Archiving method Automatic archiving Interactive archiving Documents Sites Documents Sites and folders Create an archiving root required required optional optional folder in Content Server.url extension) in SharePoint” on page 33. Specify connection required required required required information for the Content Server installation you plan to use for archiving. Create categories needed optional optional optional optional for archiving in the Content Server categories volume. Enable the. Configuring your environment to archive content from an on-premises SharePoint environment 2. and DefaultGroup from folders that are used for archiving (required only if SharePoint permissions should be transferred). 2.7.url) from the list of blocked file types. In Content Server. For more information. remove required required required required the permissions for Public Access.

Define content type optional optional optional optional mappings if you want to transfer metadata values to Enterprise Library. Define archiving required required required required permissions. See applicable “Enabling incremental archiving or synced copy archiving” on page 33. See “Activating Integration for Document and Picture Libraries and Enterprise Library Web Parts” on page 144. Synced Copy. See “Activating permission synchronization” on page 145. Enabling Records optional optional optional optional Management. Security Clearance.Chapter 2 Archiving content to Enterprise Library Configuration step Archiving method Automatic archiving Interactive archiving Documents Sites Documents Sites and folders Enable the incremental optional optional not applicable not archiving feature. Activate OpenText required for the not required required not Integration for Document create link or required and Picture Libraries and synced copy file Enterprise Library Web action Parts. See“Defining archiving permissions” on page 117. Enable the permission optional optional optional optional synchronization feature (applies only to the Create Link. See “Defining content type mappings to archive local content” on page 38. and Incremental actions). and Advanced Item Management functionality. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 32 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .

ensure that the owner of the folder has the Edit Permissions permission and the users who will archive documents have the Add Items permission.url extension from the list of blocked file types. select Security: Blocked Files Type.7. 3. For interactive archiving.7.5 or 10. To remove blocked file types: 1. 2. click Application Management. 4. Remove the . In the Web Applications.2 Removing blocked file types (. click Manage Web Applications.7. 5. remove the permissions for DefaultGroup and Public Access to prevent users from browsing archived documents of Enterprise Library. If you are using OpenText Records Management. The incremental archiving feature is available in new Application Governance & Archiving 10. 2. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 33 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .6. grant the See permission to users working with the “Mark Official” feature. area. Select a web application where you want to archive documents using the Create Link action for archiving. 2.1 Setting permissions on Enterprise Library folders used for archiving To set permissions on Enterprise Library folders used for archiving: 1. The synced copy archiving feature is deprecated as of Application Governance & Archiving 10.url extension from the list of blocked file types for each web application where you want to archive documents using the Create Link action. 2. select Permissions on the context menu of folders that are used for archiving. Configuring your environment to archive content from an on-premises SharePoint environment 2.3 Enabling incremental archiving or synced copy archiving Depending on how you installed Application Governance & Archiving.7.7 and available only if you upgraded Application Governance & Archiving from version 10. In Enterprise Library. In Central Administration. you can choose to enable either the incremental or synced copy archiving feature to archive documents. 2.6 and performed one of the following tasks during the upgrade process: • You selected Yes on the Use Synced Copy page if you upgraded from Application Governance & Archiving 10.url extension) in SharePoint You must remove the .7 installations. On the WEB APPLICATIONS tab. For all archiving scenarios using SharePoint permissions transfer.

Notes • The incremental archiving feature requires a database. Note: For more information about the upgrade process. the Incremental file action is available to be selected in a library profile. After creating a library profile that has the Incremental file action selected. For more information.Installation Guide (SPCF-IGD).Installation Guide (SPCF-IGD). you must then set up a scheduled archiving task to archive documents automatically using the Incremental file action. Incremental archiving You can enable the incremental archiving feature if you plan to archive documents automatically.Chapter 2 Archiving content to Enterprise Library • You ran the Set-SyncCopy-Use cmdlet if you upgraded from Application Governance & Archiving 10. You can also choose to make the Synced copy action available for interactive archiving in SharePoint. and want to continue using the Synced Copy action in your current Application Governance & Archiving version. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 34 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . you must then set up an synced copy task to archive the documents automatically using the Synced copy file action. When a new document is saved in SharePoint. The Incremental file action is not available for interactive archiving. • Incremental archiving is available only if you are using library profiles to archive documents automatically. In SharePoint. the Synced copy action is available to be selected in a library profile for automatic archiving. see OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint . documents that are archived using the Incremental file action appear as regular SharePoint documents and the options in the Enterprise Library menu group can be used to work with the archived documents. Application Governance & Archiving processes each option in a different way. When you select the Synced copy archiving feature on the Available Functionality page in Central Administration. Both the incremental and synced copy archiving features enable you to archive a copy of a document in Enterprise Library and keep the original document in SharePoint. When you select the Incremental archiving feature on the Available Functionality page in Central Administration. you upgraded your environment. However. for example. see OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint . Synced copy archiving You can enable the synced copy archiving feature if. If you select the Synced copy file action in a library profile. the document in Enterprise Library is updated automatically. which you must have created when you installed Application Governance & Archiving.5. you used the Synced Copy archiving action in a previous Application Governance & Archiving version.

Also. documents that are archived using the Synced Copy file action may be indicated by an icon specified by the administrator and the options in the Synced copy menu group can be used to work with the archived documents. Note: To use the synced copy archiving feature.7. regardless of the file action chosen for the library profiles. this option is not selected. By default. you must have selected No when you were prompted to create a database during the Application Governance & Archiving installation process. select the Synced copy archiving option. the incremental archiving feature provides an simplified user experience because users access only the Enterprise Library menu group to work with documents. For more information. you can optionally change the icon used to represent synced copy documents in SharePoint. In SharePoint. Benefits of using the incremental archiving feature In general.4 Configuring icons for synced copy documents If you enabled the synced copy archiving feature. see “Defining available functionality” on page 78. Configuring your environment to archive content from an on-premises SharePoint environment In SharePoint. For more information. this option is not selected. By default. select the Incremental archiving option. 2. references to the archived documents are stored in database tables for faster performance. you must make the identical changes on each web front-end server. Note: If you edit the docicon.7. instead of having to set up a separate synced copy task to archive documents automatically. Tip: You can use the following procedure also to apply custom icons for both synced and link archived documents. OpenText recommends that you use the incremental archiving feature because it provides several enhancements that are not provided by the synced copy archiving feature. see OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint - Installation Guide (SPCF-IGD). To enable the incremental archiving feature: • On the Available Functionality page in Central Administration. 2. when you use the Incremental file action. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 35 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . For more information. For example. By default. To enable the synced copy archiving feature: • On the Available Functionality page in Central Administration.xml file. icons are not displayed for synced copy documents. see “Defining available functionality” on page 78. you can create a single scheduled archiving task to archive all documents automatically.

The permission synchronization feature manages changes to permissions on SharePoint documents that are archived using the Create Link. When you activate the permission synchronization feature. Go to the <ByExtension> section and add a new mapping key for each document extension for which the icon should be changed: <Mapping Key=<extension>Synced" Value="<relative path to icon from %CommonProgramFiles%\Microsoft Shared\web server extensions \15\TEMPLATE\IMAGES" /> Example for txt documents: <Mapping Key="txtSynced" Value="ictxtsynced. This Permission Synchronizer timer job checks OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 36 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . you must have selected it when you installed Application Governance & Archiving. or Incremental file actions in Enterprise Library. Permission synchronization ensures that both the document in Enterprise Library and the link in SharePoint can be accessed by the same users.gif" /> Make sure that the new icon file has been copied to the specified images directory.6 Permission synchronization Note: To use this feature. You can specify if you want to transfer permissions only for groups or for both users and groups. Synced Copy. Windows/Active Directory users and groups working with SharePoint must be synchronized to Enterprise Library.5 Defining how permissions are transferred to Enterprise Library You can define how permissions of SharePoint documents or folders are transferred to archived documents in Enterprise Library. Restart IIS.Chapter 2 Archiving content to Enterprise Library To change the synced copy icon: 1. Whenever you change the permissions of such documents in SharePoint.xml file in %CommonProgramFiles%\<Microsoft Shared \web server extensions\15\TEMPLATE\XML\.7. Open the docicon. see “Defining archiving permissions” on page 117.7. To make this possible. • The permissions of a document or folder can be inherited from the Enterprise Library parent folder. a job definition is added to the list of timer jobs in SharePoint. these changes are transferred to the Enterprise Library documents. • The permissions can be transferred from the SharePoint document library. For more information. 2. 3. 2. 2.

To activate the permission synchronization feature. To create reports about permission synchronization operations. Important Permissions will only be synchronized for documents which have been archived with the Use SharePoint Permissions option of the Archiving Permission settings.26 “Working with Records Management classifications” in OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint . see section 5. All permission synchronization operations can be logged in a daily report. or application pool identity accounts that have implicit access to the SharePoint items cannot access the archived items. Configuring your environment to archive content from an on-premises SharePoint environment permission-related changes in the SharePoint Change Log on items that are archived in Enterprise Library. For more information about this setting. synchronization is performed whenever the permissions for the link /synced copy or for a SharePoint container containing the link /synced copy are changed.Enterprise Library Integration – User Guide (SHLES-UGD). For more information about Records Management classifications.7. For more information. or if you worked with this document library before permission synchronization was enabled and previous permission changes are no longer stored in the SharePoint Change Log. • Permissions of documents in Enterprise Library that are marked as official with Records Management are not synchronized. see “Synchronizing permissions for a document library” on page 145. Forcing permission synchronization You can force synchronization of permissions on documents that have been archived to Enterprise Library using the Create Link. Usually. see “Activating permission synchronization” on page 145. a document library or a site. If you selected Inherit from the parent folder that is from the Enterprise Library folder permissions will not be synchronized. if permission synchronization is enabled. Site collection administrators. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 37 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . see “Defining scheduled task settings” on page 131. This is useful when permission synchronization is not enabled for your site. Synced Copy. see “Defining archiving permission settings” on page 152. or Incremental file action. Notes • The permission transfer can only be processed with users or groups that have explicitly been granted permission to the SharePoint items. you can also force permission synchronization at any time on the SharePoint document library level. farm administrators. A container can be. 2. for example. However.

and SharePoint content type columns to Content Server attributes. see “Defining available functionality” on page 78.xml” on page 170. a Content Server category with the name SharePoint Properties can be created by default.7 Defining content type mappings to archive local content You can use custom Content Server categories to archive metadata of SharePoint documents as structured metadata in Enterprise Library. The purpose of this category is to store all SharePoint properties of a document in Enterprise Library. see “ArchivingConfig. only the mappings for the Content Server are used where the document is actually archived.7. To deactivate the automatic creation of this category. This is the server specified in the archiving profile or in the interactive archiving settings. Enterprise Management Library Integration provides Records Management functions. You can map a content type to multiple Content Server categories which may originate from multiple Content Server systems. When a document is archived. Records Management information is displayed in SharePoint together with other OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 38 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . You can map SharePoint content types to Content Server categories.8 Integration with Records Management and Security Clearance modules Records If the Records Management module is installed on Content Server. For archived SharePoint documents.7. You can also classify documents as records that are already archived in SharePoint at a later time. disable the Use technical category functionality. 2. When categories from multiple servers are mapped to a content type. Note: During the archiving process. the SharePoint Properties category contains the following attributes: • All Properties: String containing all properties of the original SharePoint document • Content Type ID: Unique identifier of the original SharePoint content type ID • Original location: URL of the document library where the original document was stored in SharePoint For information on configuring the names of the attributes. so that you do not lose metadata information when a document is archived.Chapter 2 Archiving content to Enterprise Library 2. If not configured differently. module You can select a Records Management classification that is applied when the documents. For more information. folders. the values from the mapped content type columns are stored into the corresponding Content Server attributes. folders. and sites are transferred to Enterprise Library with the archiving functions. and sites that are already records.

OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 39 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . It is also possible to reclassify these records or to mark them as official records. For more information on the Security Clearance module. For more information. Configuring your environment to archive content from an on-premises SharePoint environment metadata information of each document.2-STD standard. Security If the Security Clearance module is installed and configured on Content Server. Clearance Enterprise Library Integration provides Security Clearance functions. Department of When Content Server is configured to comply with the DoD 5015. see Content Server Features on page 75. you must enable the Advanced Items Management option on the Advanced Content Server Settings page in Central Administration. 2. see Open Text Security Clearance - Administrator's Guide (LLESRCS-AGD).7. The user has module the option to set supplemental markings when archiving local documents. If you want to compliance require users to apply DoD-compliant classifications to documents archived in Enterprise Library. Defence (DoD) users are required to apply Records Management classifications.

.

version history information and record details • Access document versions and renditions OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 41 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . or third- party applications. or created manually using applications such as OpenText Email Management. search results in the Enterprise Search Center. and the enabled functionality. LiveReport Result. uploaded. Depending on the type of item. users can perform operations on Enterprise Library items. Enterprise Library Integration provides the following capabilities: • Ability to work with Enterprise Library items from within SharePoint Enterprise Library Integration enables users to work with all Enterprise Library items. the permissions of the user. uploaded. or third-party applications. • SharePoint search integration through federated search (Enterprise Library tabs and search Web Parts) or Enterprise Library content sources • Additional operations provided by the Enterprise Library Web Part • LiveReports. regardless of whether they were archived. My Borrowed Items. or Enterprise Library Web Part.1 Available operations In SharePoint. and Workflow Inbox Web Parts • Support for the interaction of SharePoint with Enterprise Library content Enterprise Library Integration supports the interaction of SharePoint with Enterprise Library content. They can perform these operations from links to archived items. The following actions are available: • Creating SharePoint Document Workspaces for Enterprise Library documents • Copying Enterprise Library documents and folders to SharePoint • Creating links to Enterprise Library documents in SharePoint 3. the following operations may be available for users: • View metadata information such as Enterprise Library categories and attributes. or created using applications such as OpenText Email Management. File System Archiving. regardless of whether the items were archived from SharePoint. File System Archiving.Chapter 3 Working with Enterprise Library items from within SharePoint Users can work with Enterprise Library items from within SharePoint.

If an edited document is saved back to Enterprise Library. the following additional operations are available: • Create new business workspaces • Create new binders • Create new cases Within the Enterprise Library Web Part. • Review documents with OpenText Imaging Windows Viewer and save annotations and notes. a new document version is created automatically. • Edit Enterprise Library categories and attributes • Change permissions • Delete items from Enterprise Library • Replace links to archived documents with the referenced document in Enterprise Library • Check out and check in Enterprise Library documents • Promote minor versions to major versions • Add Enterprise Library items on hold Within SharePoint Services for Extended ECM.Chapter 3 Working with Enterprise Library items from within SharePoint • Classify documents as records and mark them as official • Edit documents. the following additional operations are available: • Upload documents to Enterprise Library • Add new document versions • Create new documents • Create shortcuts or generations • Add folders to Enterprise Library • Move documents and folders • Zip and download items • Rename documents and folders • Copy documents and folders to SharePoint • Create a SharePoint document workspace for an archived document • Create links to Enterprise Library items OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 42 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .

Working with items from SAP Business Workspaces 3. 3. see “Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part” on page 265. Note: If you installed SharePoint Services for Extended ECM. • Audit items • Archive SharePoint documents You can select a business workspace as a target folder. you can also integrate the Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part that connects with the Enterprise Library Web Part and displays the sidebar widgets. A Related Item Folder is a virtual container. The following actions on business workspaces items are supported: • Browse items • View properties of items Note: The properties page includes the following additional menu item: • Display Object: Allows you to open the related business object in the SAP system • Manage permissions of items • Retrieve and edit business workspaces documents • Delete items • Copy items • Move items • Add new items Note: You can only upload documents and create folders and shortcuts. which encloses related business workspaces. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 43 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .2 Working with items from SAP Business Workspaces Users can work with items from SharePoint Services for Extended ECM in the Enterprise Library Web Part. In addition to working with business workspaces items.2. you can also create new business workspaces in the Enterprise Library Web Part. A business workspace can contain Related Item Folders. You cannot add other objects to this container. For more information.

If you have installed SharePoint Services for Extended ECM. you can also create new cases and binders within the Enterprise Library Web Part. you have the following options: • Extending Enterprise Search Center with Enterprise Library search pages and search Web Parts • Creating Enterprise Library content sources Extending Enterprise Search Center with Enterprise Library search pages and search Web Parts Users can extend the Enterprise Search Center with Enterprise Library search pages that contain Web Parts for simple search. Users can also add the Enterprise Library search Web Parts to other pages. To use the Enterprise Library search pages and search Web Parts. To display additional information of cases and binders. you must add an object definition for each case type that you defined in Content Server to the ObjectTypeConfig. If you use these Web Parts. advanced search. In the Enterprise Library Web Part. and search results. you can open the documents and view item details. you can add the Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part to your Web Part page. You can also select items from the results list and perform actions such as zipping and downloading the items. 3. see OpenText Template Workspaces and Contract Management . users can search for Enterprise Library items. see “Activating and modifying Enterprise Library search Web Parts” on page 287.4 SharePoint search integration In SharePoint.User's Guide (LLESCSB-UGD). For more information. To enable search for Enterprise Library items. For more information about cases and binders. To enable working with Template Workspaces cases.xml file. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 44 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . For more information.3 Working with Template Workspaces Cases and Binders You can work with cases and binders from OpenText Template Workspaces in the Enterprise Library Web Part. see “Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part” on page 265. you can perform operations on cases and binders from OpenText Template Workspaces if you have installed OpenText Extended ECM for SAP Solutions. you search only Enterprise Library. see “Adding object definitions for OpenText Template Workspaces items” on page 195.Chapter 3 Working with Enterprise Library items from within SharePoint 3. From the search results page.

• The user can send the report to other users by e-mail. For more information. For more information about defining content sources. 3. which you can add to SharePoint pages. Working with reports and results Creating Enterprise Library content sources If you want to allow users to search for Enterprise Library documents with the standard SharePoint search. 3.5 Working with reports and results Users can display Content Server LiveReports and their results in OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts. you need to create content sources. You can create a SharePoint content source for an Enterprise Library or an Enterprise Library folder. To be able to create and search Enterprise Library content sources. You must configure physical objects in Content Server. The LiveReport Result Web Part displays the results of one report. with all other SharePoint content. For more information about these Web Parts. further options can be available. you must activate the Enterprise Library Content Source feature during installation and specify the administrator account of the index server. or you can search for them. The content will then be indexed and can be searched in the standard SharePoint search. 3. If additional parameters are required for the report. From the search results page. The LiveReports Web Part displays all LiveReports to which the current user has access. the user is prompted to specify them. you can view the item details which offer further options. paper documents) from within the Enterprise Library Web Part.5. see the OpenText Physical Objects documentation in OpenText Knowledge Center OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 45 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . for example. Depending on the report.6 Working with Physical Objects You can examine and request physical objects (for example. displaying the version history. see “LiveReports Web Part” on page 267 and “LiveReport Result Web Part” on page 266. see “Defining Enterprise Library content sources” on page 89. You can check their currently borrowed physical objects using the My Borrowed Items Web Part and flag items for pick up. see “My Borrowed Items Web Part” on page 271. • The user can run a report by clicking its name. For more information about this Web Part.

8 Transferring Enterprise Library items to SharePoint In SharePoint. see the Content Server Administration documentation. which you can add to SharePoint pages. For more information.com/knowledge/llisapi. For more information.dll?func=ll&objId=3045752& objAction=browse&sort=name&viewType=1). see “Workflow Inbox Web Part” on page 267. the host name. 3. native Content Server pages are displayed and the following error may occur: “Your request originated from a website that Content Server identified as potentially unsafe. Typically. They are not supported in later versions of SharePoint. and allowed sites. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 46 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Note: If users work with items in the Workflow Inbox Web Part. and publish the changed document back to Enterprise Library as a new version. you can create document workspaces for Enterprise Library documents.8.” In this case. work with the document in the document workspace.Chapter 3 Working with Enterprise Library items from within SharePoint (https://knowledge. For more information about this Web Part. copy Enterprise Library documents or folders to SharePoint or create links for Enterprise Library items in SharePoint document libraries.1 Creating SharePoint document workspaces for Enterprise Library documents Users can create a SharePoint document workspace for an Enterprise Library document. you enter the port. 3. Users can sort the tasks and click a workflow task to open it in Content Server.Enterprise Library Integration – User Guide (SHLES-UGD).opentext. see section 5. 3. Note: Document workspaces are available in SharePoint 2013 or earlier.21 “Creating a document workspace for an Enterprise Library document” in OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint .7 Working with workflow tasks You can display Content Server workflow tasks in an OpenText Enterprise Library Web Part called the Workflow Inbox Web Part. add the SharePoint server URL as a trusted referring website in the security parameter configuration in the Content Server Administration (Server Configuration > Configure Security Parameters > Trusted Referring Websites).

19 “Copying folders from Enterprise Library to SharePoint” in OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint .20 “Creating links to Enterprise Library documents in SharePoint” in OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint . 3. and for those that were not first archived from SharePoint to Enterprise Library. This is possible for all Enterprise Library documents and folders and for those that were not first archived from SharePoint to Enterprise Library.8. This is possible for all Enterprise Library documents and folders.3 Creating links to Enterprise Library documents and folders in SharePoint Users can create links to Enterprise Library documents and folders in a SharePoint document library. Transferring Enterprise Library items to SharePoint 3.Enterprise Library Integration – User Guide (SHLES- UGD). 3.8.2 Copying Enterprise Library documents and folders to SharePoint Users can copy Enterprise Library documents and folders to a SharePoint document library. see section 5.Enterprise Library Integration – User Guide (SHLES-UGD). OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 47 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . For more information. see section 5.18 “Copying documents from Enterprise Library to SharePoint” in OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint - Enterprise Library Integration – User Guide (SHLES-UGD) or section 5.8. For more information.

.

Part 2 Configuring your environment for Enterprise Library Integration .

.

1 Synchronizing SharePoint users and groups with Content Server Synchronization is usually done with OpenText Directory Services (OTDS) or the Content Server Directory Services module. 2. Group names can be transferred to either lower case or upper case. Several methods of how users can be mapped are available. add an entry for each SharePoint site. and then add about:blank to the list of trusted sites. each SharePoint user account requires a matching Enterprise Library user account. When accessing Enterprise Library from within SharePoint. some JavaScript operations may not work as expected.Chapter 4 Configuring your environment for Enterprise Library Integration This chapter provides an overview of the necessary configuration steps: • “Configuring general environment settings” on page 51 • “Configuring your environment for searching” on page 59 4. 4. you must add the SharePoint sites to the list of trusted sites when Enhanced Security is configured. In Microsoft Internet Explorer.1 Configuring general environment settings This section describes the general configuration steps needed to set up Enterprise Library Integration. For more information. you should transfer the user names in lower case to Content Server. To add SharePoint sites to the list of trusted sites: 1.2 Adding SharePoint sites to the trusted sites in Microsoft Internet Explorer If you are using Microsoft Internet Explorer. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 51 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . open the Internet Options dialog box. an impersonation of SharePoint user to Enterprise Library user is performed to verify the required permissions.1. Otherwise. In the Security tab. see “Defining Content Server settings” on page 65. Note: For Enterprise Library Integration. 4.1. If your Content Server installation works with case-sensitive user names.

actions that access the Content Server user interface may fail.Installation. - site-specific rights Enterprise Library Integration settings and site.2 Adding required permissions The following table provides an overview of the permissions required for the various user accounts used by the system. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 52 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . 4. OpenText recommends that you turn off the redirection to the primary server in the Remote Cache administration.1.3 Turning off redirection to the primary server of Remote Cache If Application Governance & Archiving is connected to an OpenText Remote Cache server. see OpenText Remote Cache . Configuration and Administration Guide (LLESRCA-IGD). For more information about OpenText Remote Cache. - Central to event log and to Administration %CommonProgramFi les%\Microsoft See “Defining site Shared\Web Server settings” Extensions on page 148. Administrator for Site administration . Table 4-1: Required account permissions User Account Required SharePoint Required Database Required Content Permissions Permissions Server Permissions IIS pool account for Permissions to write . and site collection features See “Defining site settings” on page 148. Otherwise.Chapter 4 Configuring your environment for Enterprise Library Integration 4. - global Enterprise rights. Read and Library Integration write access to the settings and web OpenText document application features library in Central Administration. \15\LOGS (for logging) Administrator for Farm administration . in addition to standard SharePoint permissions. See “Accessing the Enterprise Library Integration administration page” on page 64.

the See “Managing the SharePoint AGA_db_executor scheduled tasks” configuration role or higher is on page 132. 4. permissions to all site collections and synced copy documents (if applicable). • Local administrator on the SharePoint server that was selected for running the scheduled tasks.2. • Contribute rights to all site collections where items are archived (depending on scenario). • If Integrated Windows Authentication is used to access SharePoint data from the database. • AGA_db_executo • Login rights on r or higher the server where • db_datareader or Central higher Administration is • db_datawriter or running. higher User Identity to run • SharePoint_Sh If you plan to use the - scheduled tasks ell_Access incremental permissions for archiving feature. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 53 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Adding required permissions Scheduled task • Member of If you plan to use the - administrator administrator incremental group on the archiving feature. the See “Defining server where following database scheduled task scheduled tasks roles are required: settings” are running. the user also needs the dbo permissions for SharePoint Admin content database and the site content database. database and full required. on page 131.

User who archives Site administration . User who adds and Rights to add and . and the documents and delete rights in folder folders interactively folders to be archived where items are (depending on archived See section 3. .Enterprise Library Integration – User Guide (SHLES- UGD). Add items.Enterprise Library Integration – User Guide (SHLES- UGD). OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 54 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .4 archived “Archiving sites” in OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint .Chapter 4 Configuring your environment for Enterprise Library Integration Effective user for . and documents. and sites interactively rights delete rights in folder where sites are See section 3. Add items.1 scenario) “Archiving documents” in OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint . Read access to folder customizes customize Web Part structure Enterprise Library pages Web Parts See “Integrating and configuring OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts“ on page 263. User who archives Contribute rights on . System Content Server administration rights connection See “Defining Content Server settings” on page 65.

To enable editing with OpenText Office Editor 10. In this case. you must complete specific configuration steps to enable editing with OpenText Office Editor. menu options for editing are available only for certain types of Enterprise Library documents (for example. Microsoft Office files). see OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint .3. users can edit most document types (for example.3 Configuring your environment for Enterprise Library Web Parts This section describes the tasks you may need to complete to use Enterprise Library Web Parts. an edit option appears for the document in the Enterprise Library Web Part menu or the context menu of an Enterprise Library document. an edit option will not be available for the document in SharePoint. Working with OpenText Office Editor 10.3. If a document is not associated with an application (for example. you must do the following in Central Administration: OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 55 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Microsoft Office documents) from within SharePoint. When a user selects the edit option. 4. users can edit Enterprise Library documents using the options available in the Enterprise Library Web Part menu or the context menu of an Enterprise Library document in SharePoint. Configuring your environment for Enterprise Library Web Parts 4. 4. based on the needs of your environment.3 If OpenText Office Editor 10.3 or later is installed in your Content Server environment. Notes • OpenText Office Editor can be installed with OpenText Enterprise Connect or OpenText Explorer.3. If a document is associated with an application such as Microsoft Word. • If you are using OpenText Office Editor 10. For example.h).1 Using OpenText Office Editor with Application Governance & Archiving When OpenText Office Editor 10.docx may be associated with Microsoft Word and an edit option called Edit in Microsoft Word may be available for the document. the Enterprise Library document cannot be edited from within SharePoint. the document has a non-standard file extension such as .3.Installation Guide (SPCF-IGD). a document with the file extension .3 is installed. OpenText Office Editor provides the editing functionality in the client application and establishes a connection from the client to Content Server. the document is opened in its associated application for editing. For more information about OpenText Office Editor requirements for Application Governance & Archiving. Depending on the OpenText Office Editor version you are using.

For more information. Enable the Web Editing option on the Advanced Content Server Settings page. see “Defining available functionality” on page 78. If the document is not associated with an application (for example. native Content Server pages are displayed and the following error may occur: “Your request originated from a website that Content Server identified as potentially unsafe. the document has a non-standard file extension such as . See “Defining available functionality” on page 78. To enable editing with OpenText Office Editor 10. you must do the following in Central Administration: 1. a document with the file extension . users can edit any type of document using options in the Enterprise Library Web Part menu or the context menu of an Enterprise Library document in SharePoint.Chapter 4 Configuring your environment for Enterprise Library Integration 1. Enable the Edit All Documents Using OpenText Office Editor option on the Available Functionality page. 2. and allowed sites.2 Entering the URL to the SharePoint server as trusted referring website If users work with items in the Workflow Inbox Web Part. Enable the Web Editing and OpenText Office Editor Web Editing options on the Advanced Content Server Settings page.1 or later If OpenText Office Editor 10.3. add the SharePoint server URL as a trusted referring website in the security parameter configuration in the Content Server Administration (Server Configuration > Configure Security Parameters > Trusted Referring Websites).1 or later is installed.h). the user will be prompted to select the application in which to edit the document. the host name. 4. see “Defining advanced Content Server settings” on page 75.3. Enable the Edit documents option on the Available Functionality page. See “Defining advanced Content Server settings” on page 75.” In this case.3. For more information. the document is opened in its associated application for editing (for example.3. When a user selects a menu option to edit a document. Working with OpenText Office Editor 10. see the Content Server Administration documentation. Typically.1 or later. you enter the port. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 56 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . 2.docx may be opened in Microsoft Word). For more information.

you must add the icon image files to the list of document icons in SharePoint in the DOCICON. browse to the C:\Program Files\Common Files \Microsoft Shared\Web Server Extensions\15\TEMPLATE\XML folder and do the following: a.XML file. b.gif" /> c. Save your changes and close the file. In Windows Explorer. In IIS Manager. All other file types are displayed with a default document icon (icgen. also copy the icons to the %CommonProgramFiles%\Microsoft Shared\Web Server Extensions\14\TEMPLATE\IMAGES\Livelink\support \physicalobjects\icons directory. Download the Adobe PDF icon Small 16x16 from the Adobe site: http:// www.3. To add the Adobe PDF icon: 1. only file type icons that are specific to Microsoft are displayed in SharePoint document libraries and Enterprise Library Web Parts by default. copy these additional icons to all your Web front-end SharePoint servers into the %CommonProgramFiles% \Microsoft Shared\Web Server Extensions\15\TEMPLATE\IMAGES\Livelink \support\physicalobjects\icons directory. 4. 4.3.3. The following example describes how to add the Adobe PDF icon to the list of document icons.gif). In the <ByExtension> section of the file. If you plan to use these Physical Objects functionality for sites with SharePoint 2010 experience too. 3. Open the DOCICON.html.4 Adding document-specific icons Even though SharePoint supports most file types.XML file in a text editor. If you want to display specific icons for different document types. at a command prompt. 2. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 57 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Alternatively. Save the image file in the C:\Program Files\Common Files\Microsoft Shared \Web Server Extensions\15\TEMPLATE\IMAGES folder.com/misc/linking. restart the World Wide Web Publishing Service (W3SVC). add the following mapping key: <Mapping Key="pdf" Value="pdficon_small.3 Adding icons for Physical Objects If your Content Server uses custom Physical Objects icons. 4.adobe. run the iisreset /noforce command. Configuring your environment for Enterprise Library Web Parts 4.

This function uses the default settings for supported file types and the maximum file size from Content Server. go to Multi-File Output Administration > General Settings. 4. The standard icons installed by the Content Server modules are deployed by Application Governance & Archiving. To change zip and download settings for the Enterprise Library Web Part: 1. Modify the Bandwith Limiter and Multifile Objects Configuration settings.3. copy these additional icons to all your Web Front End SharePoint servers into the directory: %CommonProgramFiles%\Microsoft Shared\Web Server Extensions \15\TEMPLATE\IMAGES\Livelink\support.6 Changing zip and download settings for the Enterprise Library Web Part The Zip & Download function allows users to compress and download selected items from the Enterprise Library Web Part. make sure that the Content Server structure and SharePoint structure match.Chapter 4 Configuring your environment for Enterprise Library Integration 4. In Content Server Administration.5 Adding icons for SAP Business Workspaces and Business References If your Content Server uses custom SAP business workspaces and business reference icons.3. Therefore. also copy the changes to the directory: %CommonProgramFiles%\Microsoft Shared\Web Server Extensions \14\TEMPLATE\IMAGES\Livelink\support Note that the folder structure is dependent on your Content Server structure. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 58 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . To support the SharePoint 2010 user experience. 2. Tip: You only have to copy the custom icons that you added to the Content Server.

To add MIME types for Microsoft Office documents: 1.0\Search \Setup\ContentIndexCommon\Filters\CLSID\{4887767F-7ADC-4983- B576-88FB643D6F79}] @="{F90DFE0C-CBDF-41FF-8598-EDD8F222A2C8}" [HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\MIME\Database\Content Type\application/ vnd.0\Search \Setup\ContentIndexCommon\Filters\CLSID \{4F46F75F-199F-4C63-8B7D-86D48FE7970C}] @="{DDFE337F-4987-4EC8-BDE3-133FA63D5D85}" [HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\MIME\Database\Content Type\application/ OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 59 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . select Regions. To specify properties: 1.4. Configuring your environment for searching 4. 4.4. To ensure that the contents of the documents are indexed. go to Search Administration > Open the System Object Volume > Enterprise Data Source Folder > Enterprise Search Manager.4 Configuring your environment for searching 4. the contents of Microsoft Office 2007 or 2010 documents may not be indexed because the file name extensions of these documents with their MIME types and SharePoint filters are not included in the Windows Registry.spreadsheetml.2 Registering MIME types for Microsoft Office documents on the SharePoint index server When indexing Enterprise Library documents.sheet] "CLSID"="{4887767F-7ADC-4983-B576-88FB643D6F79}" "Extension"=".openxmlformats-officedocument.4. If necessary. also change the display name to a more readable name. you must add their MIME types to the Windows Registry on the SharePoint index server. 4.xlsx" @="0" [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Office Server\15. you can specify which properties can be searched from the Enterprise Library Advanced Search Web Part. Add the missing MIME types and filters to the Windows Registry as follows: Windows Registry Editor Version 5. On the context menu. and then select the Queryable check box for each property that should be searchable. In Content Server Administration.1 Allowing Enterprise Library properties to be searched in the Advanced Search Web Part In Content Server Administration.00 [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Office Server\15. 2.

aspx.0\Search \Setup\ContentIndexCommon\Filters\CLSID\{D3B41FA1-01E3-49AF- AA25-1D0D824275AE}] @="{5A98B233-3C59-4B31-944C-0E560D85E6C3}" [HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\MIME\Database\Content Type\application/ vnd. • For more information about including and excluding file types in SharePoint. Because this page excludes certain file types by default (for example.microsoft. .3 Including and excluding file types in the SharePoint search index If you plan to define an Enterprise Library content source to index archived documents and make them available in SharePoint searches. If the crawler reads content from a file type that is not listed on the Manage File Types page. Scenario 1: Including all of the required file types in the SharePoint search index If you are using SharePoint 2013. The following describes the scenarios in which you may need to include or exclude file types.pptx" @="0" [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Office Server\15. see http://technet. see “Defining Enterprise Library content sources” on page 89. the SharePoint search crawler indexes content only from file types that are listed on the Manage File Types page in Central Administration.jpg and .microsoft.wordprocessingml.presentationml. add new file types to this page.com/en-us/library/jj219530. the crawler excludes the content from the SharePoint search index and the following message appears in the SharePoint crawl log: OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 60 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . see http://technet. if required.4. Notes • For more information about defining Enterprise Library content sources.openxmlformats-officedocument. 3. you must check whether the Manage File Types page contains all of the file types you want to index and. Perform a full crawl to see the changes.presentation] "CLSID"="{4F46F75F-199F-4C63-8B7D-86D48FE7970C}" "Extension"=".Chapter 4 Configuring your environment for Enterprise Library Integration vnd.docx" @="0" 2.png files).openxmlformats-officedocument.document] "CLSID"="{D3B41FA1-01E3-49AF-AA25-1D0D824275AE}" "Extension"=". you may need to include or exclude file types in the SharePoint search index. 4.com/en-us/library/jj219660.aspx. Restart the SharePoint Server Search 15 service. For more information about the file types that SharePoint crawls by default. in certain scenarios.

7.url file type is excluded. To index this item. do one of the following: • If you want to include a new file type in the SharePoint search index.url file type from the SharePoint search index on the Manage File Types page in Central Administration. Click OK. Double-click Services. 4. In the Services window. click Search Service Application.url files) . by default. select the file type extension you want to exclude and click Delete. On the Application Management page of Central Administration. click New File Type and add one or more extensions of file types you want to include. click File Types. remove the meta-tag and recrawl. the archived documents and the links created for each document are both indexed. 5. • If you want to exclude a file type from the SharePoint search index (for example. As a result. In the list of service applications.4.4. Scenario 2: Excluding the . restart the SharePoint Search service.url file type from the SharePoint search index If you use the Create Link file action to archive documents in a SharePoint document library. If you want to prevent duplicate search results from appearing in SharePoint. On the Manage File Types page. When the . search for administrative tools and click Administrative Tools. 3. you may receive duplicate search results when you search for the archived documents in SharePoint. click Manage service applications. 8.3. Only the archived documents are indexed and displayed in searches. you can exclude the . 4. In the Windows Control Panel. In the left pane.1 Adding or removing file types on the Manage File Types page To add or remove file types on the Manage File Types page: 1. 4. 2. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 61 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . 6.url files are displayed in the SharePoint search results. Configuring your environment for searching The content for this address was excluded by the crawler because this item was marked with a no-index meta-tag. no . .

.

“Global archiving settings and content type mappings” on page 116 4. perform the following configuration steps: 1. “Editing style sheets” on page 206 if you have thorough knowledge of XSLT and want to define how the pages are built.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration To set up Enterprise Library Integration. “Creating and managing library and site profiles for archiving” on page 94 3. “Defining site settings” on page 148 if you want to override the global settings for one or more sites. “Activating permission synchronization” on page 145 6. For more information. see “Managing scheduled tasks” on page 132. 8. “Customizing GUI strings” on page 206 if you want to customize the GUI strings. “Configuring Content Server settings” on page 65 2. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 63 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . 10. 11. 9. you have the following additional options: • “View management” on page 139 • “Monitoring the performance” on page 208 • “Activating link redirection” on page 209 • “Displaying SharePoint search results in the Inspection page” on page 211 • Remove orphaned links that no longer refer to an Enterprise Library document. “Activating site archiving” on page 147 7. “Defining advanced settings in XML configuration files” on page 168 if you want to define advanced settings and have thorough knowledge of XML. “Activating Integration for Document and Picture Libraries and Enterprise Library Web Parts” on page 144 5. “Integrating and configuring OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts“ on page 263 After the basic set up of Enterprise Library Integration.

see OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint . On the Start menu. Required permissions for administration To configure Enterprise Library Integration. click All Programs > Microsoft SharePoint 2013 Products > SharePoint 2013 Central Administration.Installation Guide (SPCF-IGD). you must be a farm administrator with read and write access to the configuration document library. because global configuration files are stored in this document library. Tip: If functionality is not available (for example Archiving Settings). For more information. http://pluto: 15000).Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration 5.1 Accessing the Enterprise Library Integration administration page To access the Enterprise Library Integration administration page: 1. open a browser window and enter server address and port number in the address bar (<Protocol>://<SharePoint Server>:<Port>. or to access SharePoint from another computer. in Central Administration. for example. Alternatively. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 64 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . The port is defined during the configuration of SharePoint. 2. the specific feature is not installed. Click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving on the Central Administration page. Opentext.

Important If you do not use secure network communication. it is considered to be deprecated. 5. Notes • Claims-based authentication support Application Governance & Archiving supports claims-based authentication. In the General Settings area. 4. claims-based authentication is the default authentication method when creating a web application. 3. In SharePoint 2013. such as user names.aspx • OpenText Directory Services support Application Governance & Archiving supports OpenText Directory Services (OTDS) that allows you to synchronize user and group data across OpenText components. click Content Server settings. Click New. set the connection to the servers that you want to use for archiving.1 Defining Content Server settings For all scenarios.2. If you use an unencrypted connection. 5. In Central Administration. the version number is displayed in the bottom-right corner of the OpenText Application Governance & Archiving page in Central Administration. a warning message will appear.microsoft. For more information about authentication methods in SharePoint. Specify the following settings: OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 65 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . passwords. To add a Content Server entry: 1. see “Defining user mapping providers” on page 70.com/en-us/library/cc262350. For more information about the necessary settings. the data that you enter here.3. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. and other information will not be encrypted. Viewing the Application Governance & Archiving version number 5. 2. Although Windows classic mode authentication is still available and can be configured through Windows PowerShell.2 Viewing the Application Governance & Archiving version number If you need to determine which version of Application Governance & Archiving is installed in your SharePoint environment. see http://technet.3 Configuring Content Server settings 5.

when storing the archiving configuration settings or creating link documents). OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 66 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . • Direct connection port: Specify the port number of the Content Server system reserved for the direct connection. Alias IDs can be used.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration Server Connection Specify the following connection information for the Content Server system you want to use. When it is added again at a later time using a different server ID. Optionally. • Allow direct connection: Select this check box to use a socket connection (non-tunneled connection). you must connect SharePoint with the Remote Cache server. The ID cannot be edited after the new Content Server entry is added. The default value is a system- generated combination of numbers and characters. • Unique ID: Specifies a global unique identifier for the Content Server system. • Server name: Type the name. you can also specify additional alias IDs for this server. for example. or IP address of an existing Content Server system. Server Unique ID and Alias IDs Specify a unique ID for the Content Server system. Server Display Name Specify a name to display in the user interface whenever a Content Server can be selected. fully qualified DNS name. Otherwise. The socket connection can provide higher performance than the standard connection through HTTP. Important You must specify an alias ID only if you configured Enterprise Library Integration or archived documents using the Create Link file action and re-added the Content Server using a different unique ID. Note: You can change the unique ID only when adding a new Content Server entry. but cannot be used in all scenarios (for example. • Alias IDs: Define one or more aliases for the Content Server system. you may not be able to access your configuration data or access archived documents using existing SharePoint links. The default value is 2099. if there are firewall restrictions in your environment). You can accept the default value or edit it. Note: If you use Content Server with a Remote Cache server. The unique ID is used internally by Application Governance & Archiving (for example. when Content Server is temporarily disabled and removed from the Content Server settings. the old server ID would then be added as an alias ID.

Proxy Server Configuration • Proxy connection enabled: Select the box to use a proxy server. you must also define a user mapping provider that is assigned to a SharePoint authentication provider. 5. http://myserver/livelink/livelink. • Server port: Enter the port of the Content Server reserved for the connection.exe. The user needs system administrator rights on Content Server. Whenever you define a new Content Server. • Alternate URL: Enter the URL to Content Server if you do not want to use the URL specified by server name and HTTP configuration. • Password: Password for the effective user. To set a Content Server system as the default server: 1. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving.3. Effective User Enter an administrative Content Server account needed by Enterprise Library Integration to connect to Content Server. • Use Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) connection: Select the check box to enable SSL connections. In Central Administration. • Server name: Enter the name of the proxy server. for example. The default value is 80. Native Content Server URL requests Specify the behavior when user accesses native Content Server pages like the Explorer View in the Enterprise Library Web Part. This can only be used if Content Server uses no NTLM or LDAP authentication together with Content Server Directory Services synchronization. • Use Enterprise Library integration login mechanism: Select the check box if you want to use the Enterprise Library Integration login mechanism. • User name: Name of the effective user. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 67 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . • Server port: Enter the port of the proxy server. • Content Server CGI URL: Enter the URL of the Common Gateway Interface. This URL is configured in IIS.dll. Configuring Content Server settings Http Configuration Specify the HTTP settings for Content Server. For more information. Define a user mapping provider to specify how SharePoint users or group names are mapped to Content Server users or group names. The default value is /livelink/llisapi. 5. see “Defining user mapping providers” on page 70.

4. 2. click the down arrow and select one of the following options: • General Settings: Select this option to edit general Content Server settings (for example. • You cannot delete the default server. In Central Administration.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration 2. click Content Server settings. • If you switch the default Content Server after adding and configuring Enterprise Library Search Web Parts in SharePoint. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. See “Defining Content Server settings” on page 65. To edit Content Server settings: 1. In Central Administration. select the Content Server entry you want to edit. In the list. In the list. click Content Server settings. 2. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. you must select a different search template for the new default Content Server on the Search Settings page. select the Content Server entry you want to set as the default server. select the Content Server entry you want to delete. In this case. 4. 4. Content Server features to use within SharePoint). 3. In the General Settings area. click Content Server settings. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 68 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . the search functionality may not work if the new default Content Server is using a different search template than the original Content Server. For more information. In the General Settings area. Notes • If no other server is specified. see “Defining search settings” on page 87. In the Settings area. • Advanced Settings: Select this option to specify advanced Content Server settings (for example. Click Set as Default. See “Defining advanced Content Server settings” on page 75. 3. 3. Note: You cannot delete the default server entry. To delete a Content Server entry: 1. Click Delete. In the list. In the General Settings area. the default server is used for the Enterprise Library search. server connection information).

3. Configure a virtual directory in Http Configuration area of the Content Server Settings page where anonymous access is allowed (no SSO is used) and enter a URL in Alternate URL (see “Defining Content Server settings” on page 65) to use a virtual directory with SSO. clear the Use Enterprise Library integration login mechanism check box. Configuring Content Server settings 5. you can restrict the access to computers in the SharePoint farm. you must configure a virtual directory on the Content Server web server for the Content Server CGI/ISAPI where anonymous access is allowed and single-sign on (SSO) authentication is disabled (SSO authentication prevents users from having to enter credentials each time they connect to Enterprise Library). 5. Scenario 1: Application Governance & Archiving is configured with the Edit documents. Optionally. you may need to configure an additional virtual directory where SSO is used. or LDAP or NTLM authentication is not used Configure a virtual directory in Http Configuration area of the Content Server Settings page (see “Defining Content Server settings” on page 65) where anonymous access is allowed (no SSO is used) and select the check box Use Enterprise Library integration login mechanism to avoid a login window in Enterprise Library. Display links to the Enterprise Library. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 69 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . or LDAP or NTLM authentication is used The Application Governance & Archiving login mechanism does not work. Create documents. or WebDAV functionality enabled Configure a virtual directory in the Http Configuration area of the Content Server Settings page (see “Defining Content Server settings” on page 65) where anonymous access is allowed (no SSO is used). or WebDAV functionality enabled • Users are not synchronized with Content Server Directory Services.2 Configuring the Content Server Web server To connect Application Governance & Archiving with Enterprise Library. Create documents.3. • Users are synchronized with Content Server Directory Services. If you plan to enable certain features on the Advanced Content Server Settings page or Available Functionality page in Central Administration. Also. Scenario 2: Application Governance & Archiving is configured without the Edit documents. Display links to the Enterprise Library.

To define user mapping providers: 1. In Central Administration. Integrated Windows Authentication or claims-based authentication. In addition to Integrated Windows Authentication or basic authentication. you must add the account of the user who installed Application Governance & Archiving to the Console Administrators group in the Site Deployment Console. claims-based authentication allows several other authentication methods. Click User Mapping Providers. such as forms-based authentication. you can define which type of authentication that the web application allows. When you specify a Content Server instance to be connected with SharePoint and used as an archiving location. 5. If you have already set a default Content Server instance and define an additional server. or configure a new provider.3.3 Defining user mapping providers Whenever you create a web application in SharePoint. Do one of the following: • If you want to define a new user mapping provider. for example. SharePoint provides either classic authentication that allows. 2. If you have defined web applications with claims-based authentication. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 70 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . 4. OpenText recommends that you define user mappings for all authentication providers that you have configured to make sure that all users are authenticated with Content Server. see OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint . Note: If claims-based authentication is enabled in your environment. 3. You are also prompted to determine the format to use for users or user groups of Content Server when mapping them to SharePoint users or user groups. You can also delete existing provider configurations. By default. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. even though the user may be able to access the Site Deployment Console after the Site Deployment feature is installed. For more information about the Site Deployment Console.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration 5. Select a Content Server entry. click Content Server settings. All authentication methods that you define in the web applications provide authentication providers that you can select for user mapping when defining a Content Server connection. click Close.Site Deployment – Administration Guide (SPCF-AGD). Tip: To use the default user mapping provider that has been defined for the default Content Server. you are prompted to define a user mapping provider. edit the provider settings. this user account is not added to the Console Administrators group. click New. the user mapping provider from the default Content Server is automatically set for the new server. You can accept this user mapping provider. In the General Settings area.

Trusted Provider. for example User1. • Lower-case: Uses the login name of the SharePoint user in lower case. User and User Group Name Mapping Choose one of the following methods that define how user or group names of SharePoint and Content Server are mapped. This option is only available if you select Form-based. • As entered in the Active Directory: Uses the login name of the SharePoint user as used in Active Directory. or Claims Provider as Authentication provider/Claims issuer. for example group1. Specify the following settings.3. • Letter-case conversion for user names: Defines how user names are converted. There may be more custom- defined methods available in the list. 5. refer to the SharePoint documentation. Authentication Provider/Claims Issuer Choose the authentication provider and claims issuer that you want to use to configure the user or group mapping provider. • Authentication provider/Claims issuer: Provider that authenticates users. select an entry in the Authentication Provider/Claims Issuer list and click Edit. 6. For more information about these providers. Security Token Provider. Configuring Content Server settings • If you want to edit an existing user mapping provider. see OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint SDK. and Claims Provider. • As entered in the Active Directory: Uses the login name of the SharePoint user group as used in the Active Directory. for example user1. Trusted Provider. • Lower-case: Uses the login name of the SharePoint user group in lower case. • Claims issuer identifier: Identifier of the provider as configured in SharePoint. Note: If you select Form-based. for example Group1. Form-based. • Letter-case conversion for user group names: Defines how user group names are converted. The domain portion is removed. you must define a Claims issuer identifier. For information on how to create custom user mapping providers. The NTLM user or group name is used as a Content Server user or group name. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 71 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . • NTLM User/Group name only: Only available if Windows (AD-based) authentication provider is selected. The following providers are supported: Windows (based on Active Directory). or Claims Provider. Trusted Provider.

. . • Letter-case conversion for user names: Defines how user names are converted. • As entered in the Active Directory: Uses the login name of the SharePoint user group as used in Active Directory.. domain1\.. for example.. for example .. for example.. • Letter-case conversion for domain names: Defines how domain names are converted.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration • Restrict to users/groups from the following domain: Enter the domain of the user (for example domain).\user1. or takes a claim value as entered. • NTLM User/Group name with domain .. • As entered in the Active Directory: Uses the login name of the SharePoint user as used in Active Directory. • Direct mapping: Allows direct mapping of specific SharePoint accounts with Content Server user or user group names.. • Lower-case: Uses the login name of the SharePoint user in lower case. domain1\user1.Uses a combination of the Windows domain and the login name of the SharePoint user or user group to form a Content Server user or group name. DOMAIN1\. DOMAIN1\USER1.\group1. for example. \User1.\Group1. for example: domain\user1 or formuser1. • Lower-case: Uses the login name of the SharePoint user group in lowercase characters. for example. • Letter-case conversion for user group names: Defines how user group names are converted. for example. • Lower-case: Uses the login name of the SharePoint user name in lower case characters.. • Upper-case: Uses the login name of the SharePoint user name in upper case characters. . for example: domain1\user1. for example . The field is not case- sensitive. You can add several mappings.. for example.. • Letter-case conversion for user names: Defines how user names are converted. • Simple mapping: Uses a SharePoint user or group name to form a Content Server user or group name. • Upper-case: Uses the login name of the SharePoint domain name in uppercase characters.. • Lower-case: Uses the login name of the SharePoint domain name in lowercase characters... but assign a specific SharePoint account only once to a OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 72 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .

• {cn}: LDAP common name. select a Web Application. You can also click Browse to search for a user or group. To remove a direct mapping: a. c. • {upn}: User Principal Name as entered in Microsoft Active Directory. In the Content Server User or Group area. • Using OpenText Directory Services OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 73 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . To add a direct mapping: a. enter a User or Group name that you want to map the SharePoint account with. Notes • Using {domain}. • {account}: Account name as entered in Microsoft Active Directory. DOMAIN\user if you use Windows authentication. Note: If you choose a SharePoint user or group that is not issued by the authentication provider or claims issuer that you are editing. Click Add mapping.3. Click Remove . for example. 5. b. You can. • {domain}: Domain name. Enter a User or Group name to which you want to apply this mapping. d. or a compound string token if you use claims-based authentication. you get an error message. You can also click Browse to search for a user or group. however. {upn}. In the SharePoint User or Group area. Note: You can only select users from the authentication provider which is configured for the selected web application. assign multiple instances of these specific SharePoint accounts to the same Content Server account. • User/Group name according to the pattern: Defines the pattern to convert SharePoint user or user group names to Content Server user or user group names. The following pattern placeholders are available: • {login}: Full login name as transmitted by the authentication provider. {account}. Configuring Content Server settings Content Server account. and {cn} placeholders is only a suitable option for users or user groups in Microsoft Active Directory. • {name}: Name of a user or a group.

Click Delete. you can use the following modifiers: • lower: lower-case • upper: upper-case All placeholders that you can enter are case-insensitive. In the General Settings area. 5. • Conversion for user group names according to the pattern: Enter how user group names are formed to match the Content Server user group name pattern. {upn} as conversion for user names and {cn} as conversion for user group names. click Content Server settings. 3. 4. For formatting. for example. • Conversion for user names according to the pattern: Enter how user names are formed to match the Content Server user name pattern. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. Example: SP_{domain:upper}\{name:lower} This entry specifies that the user or group name is converted as follows: SP_DOMAIN\username.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration Application Governance & Archiving supports OpenText Directory Services (OTDS) that allows you to synchronize user and group data across OpenText components. In the Authentication Provider/Claims Issuer list. In Central Administration. select the entry you want to delete. In this list. To ensure that users and groups that have been imported to Content Server by OTDS are correctly mapped with Application Governance & Archiving. To delete an authentication provider: 1. Click User Mapping Providers. select the entry of a Content Server installation. for example {login:lower}. for example {login:lower}. You can also create entries according to specific naming conventions. 2. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 74 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . 6. you must configure the following settings: • Define a user mapping provider with the User/Group name according to the pattern setting and enter.

If a Content Server module is not installed or version is not supported. The current version of the Release Notes is available in the OpenText Knowledge Center. 5. and then select Advanced Settings. the check boxes for the corresponding Content Server features are dimmed. Edit the settings that you want to use in SharePoint: Content Server Features You can select the Content Server features that you want to use in SharePoint. Configuring Content Server settings 5. 2. you must install the OpenText Security Clearance module that is provided with OpenText Content Server. In Central Administration. click Settings. Select a Content Server entry.3.4 Defining advanced Content Server settings You can specify advanced settings for Content Server: • Content Server Features on page 75 • Network Connection Timeout on page 78 • Server Time Zone on page 78 To define advanced Content Server settings: 1. see Open Text Security Clearance . The system checks automatically which Content Server modules and versions are installed. 5. you must assign a Records Management classification in the following cases: OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 75 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . • If you install a new module or module version later. • If this feature is selected. users are required to classify their records more specifically according to the DoD 5015. Notes Content Server module versions • Only the versions specified in the Release Notes are supported. In the General Settings area. 3. In the CONTENT SERVERS tab. For more information. • Security Clearance: Allows users to apply supplemental markings.3.2-STD certification guidelines. To use this feature. You have the following options: • Records Management: Allows users to add a Records Management classification to a document. • Advanced Item Management: If this option is selected. select Content Server settings. you must enable it. select OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. 4.Administrator's Guide (LLESRCS-AGD).

25 “Changing the view mode for the Enterprise Library Web Part” in OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint . Note: The OpenText Office Editor web editing check box is available only if the OpenText Office Editor 10. • When archiving a document interactively. see section 5. along with the Web Editing check box.3. they will be redirected to the Content Server interface to perform some additional actions on the document. the default categories for the document's MIME type are retrieved from Content Server and added as initial set of categories to this document. • You cannot mark records as official using the Enterprise Library Web Part. After archiving a document interactively. • File System Archiving: Allows users to access File System Archiving volumes. • When archiving a document or editing its categories. add the SharePoint server URL as a trusted referring website in the security parameter configuration in the Content Server Administration (Server Configuration > Configure Security Parameters > Trusted Referring Websites).” In this case. native Content Server pages are displayed and the following error may occur: “Your request originated from a website that Content Server identified as potentially unsafe. • E-mail Management: Allows users to access content in email volumes.Enterprise Library Integration – User Guide (SHLES-UGD). • OpenText Office Editor web editing: Select this check box.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration • In archiving profiles for each automatic archiving rule. For more information about the Edit all documents using OpenText Office Editor option.1 or later module is installed in OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 76 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . For more information about Explorer View. and allowed sites. you enter the port. Typically. see “Using OpenText Office Editor with Application Governance & Archiving” on page 55. Note: If users work with items in the Workflow Inbox Web Part. • Web Editing: Allows users to create or edit Enterprise Library documents from within the Enterprise Library Web Part. to make the Edit all documents using OpenText Office Editor option available in the Available functionality area of Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration. Instead. For more information. see the Content Server Administration documentation. • In site archiving settings. the host name. • WebDAV: Allows users to switch to Explorer View by using the Open in Explorer context menu item in the Enterprise Library Web Part. users will not be redirected to the SharePoint document library.

” In this case. Important Select this check box only if Notifications have been enabled and configured in Content Server. Typically. add the SharePoint server URL as a trusted referring website in the security parameter configuration in the Content Server Administration (Server Configuration > Configure Security Parameters > Trusted Referring Websites). • Users who review documents must have access to Content Server. see section 5. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 77 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . and allowed sites. For more information about reviewing documents. For more information about installing OpenText Office Editor.11 “Displaying and editing properties” in OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint . clear the check box. • Notifications configured: Select this check box to make the Set alerts for Enterprise Library items functionality available in the Available functionality area of Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration and site settings. For more information. This check box is available only if you installed the OpenText Imaging Reviews and Notes module version 9. You can only receive notifications for Enterprise Library documents if Notifications are enabled and configured. see the OpenText Enterprise Connect - Installation Guide (NGDCORE-IGD). Note: If users work with items in the Workflow Inbox Web Part. you enter the port. • Document Reviewing: Allows users to review specific Enterprise Library documents with OpenText Imaging Windows Viewer.Enterprise Library Integration – User Guide (SHLES-UGD). To hide physical objects and the search box for physical objects in the Enterprise Library Web Part. make sure that the following requirements are met: • To review documents. see “Defining menu items for object types” on page 192. To disable the Physical Objects feature. • Physical Objects: Allows users to browse and request physical objects such as paper documents. 5. For more information. native Content Server pages are displayed and the following error may occur: “Your request originated from a website that Content Server identified as potentially unsafe. you must install OpenText Imaging Windows Viewer.3.0 or later in Content Server. DVDs and CD-ROMs. set the visible and searchable properties in the ObjectTypeConfig. boxes. the host name. see the Content Server Administration documentation. In addition to installing the module.xml file to false.7. Configuring Content Server settings your Content Server environment.

To define available functionality: 1. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. see “Defining advanced Content Server settings” on page 75. In Central Administration. You can also customize the functionality available to users.3. Select the functionality that you want to make available: OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 78 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . The available functionality settings specified for individual sites override the global available functionality settings. See “Defining available functionality for a SharePoint site” on page 148. If the Content Server time zone is not set. For more information. In the General Settings area. if the default value for the operating system is 20 seconds. 3. This check box is available only if you installed the SharePoint Services for Extended ECM package. and cases based on Content Server templates. Server Time Zone The time zone is used whenever a date or time is displayed in SharePoint. which indicates that the operating system default values are used. 5. For example. 2. the time at which a new document version was checked in. If an option is dimmed. Network Connection Timeout You can specify the maximum time period (in seconds) to wait until the server responds to the connection initialization. the time zone of the SharePoint server is used. The default value for the Content Server time zone is the time zone of the SharePoint server. Note: You can also define available functionality for individual SharePoint sites. you must first select its related feature on the Advanced Content Server Settings page in Central Administration. click Available functionality. see “Defining available functionality” on page 78. for example. web pages with Enterprise Library Web Parts will wait for a shorter period of time before displaying a message about a failed connection. binders. business workspaces. Servers that process a large amount of data may have longer response times. consider both the performance needs of the network environment and the needs of the users accessing the pages. The actual timeout value may be shorter in certain environments. When specifying a timeout value. The default value is zero.5 Defining available functionality You can specify which Application Governance & Archiving features are available to all sites in your SharePoint environment.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration • Extended ECM: Allows users to create new documents.

see “Enabling incremental archiving or synced copy archiving” on page 33. • Set alerts for Enterprise Library items: Allows users to select items for which they want to receive messages if changes are made to these items. see “Enabling incremental archiving or synced copy archiving” on page 33. • Synced copy archiving: Select this check box to make the Synced Copy file action available to administrators or users when they archive documents automatically or interactively. see “Archiving local documents. For more information. this option is cleared. This option is available only if Security Clearance is selected on the Advanced Content Server Settings page and the OpenText Security Clearance module is installed. and document sets interactively” on page 24. • Interactive archiving to the Enterprise Library: Allows users to archive SharePoint documents and folders interactively to Enterprise Library. Before using this feature. • Incremental archiving: Select this check box to make the Incremental file action available on the Library Profile Configuration page when an administrator creates a library profile to archive documents automatically. For more information. For more information about the Security Clearance module. folders. This option is available only if you upgraded your Application Governance & Archiving version and either specified Yes on the Use Synced Copy page or ran the Set-SyncCopy-Use cmdlet during the upgrade process. By default. • Security Clearance: Allows users to apply supplemental markings that are non-hierarchical security codes and used to define access rights on objects in Content Server. This option is available only if Notifications Configured is selected on the Advanced Content Server Settings page. Create/edit options • Edit attributes: Allows users to edit properties of items from Enterprise Library. see Open Text Security Clearance .3. • Edit documents: Allows users to edit documents archived in Enterprise Library. you must enable the Web Editing feature in Content Server. Configuring Content Server settings Available features • Records Management: Allows users to add a Records Management classification to an Enterprise Library item or place an Enterprise Library item on hold.Administrator's Guide (LLESRCS-AGD). the Incremental file action is not displayed on the Library Profile Configuration page. 5. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 79 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . For more information. If this option is cleared. If this option is cleared. This option is available only if Records Management is selected on the Advanced Content Server Settings page and the OpenText Records Management module is installed. the Synced Copy file action is not displayed on the Library Profile Configuration page in Central Administration or the Save Document page in SharePoint.

3. Before using this feature. the user is prompted to select the application in which to edit the document. • Disable custom columns: Select this check box to prevent the custom Content Server columns from being displayed in the Enterprise Library Web Part. see “Using OpenText Office Editor with Application Governance & Archiving” on page 55. • Display links to the Enterprise Library: Allows users to access Enterprise Library directly and view document properties in Enterprise Library. When a user selects the edit option for an Enterprise Library document in the Enterprise Library Web Part menu or the document context menu in SharePoint. If custom columns are configured to appear in a particular folder. • Use Content Server page with document template support: Allows users to create documents based on Content Server templates. the document is opened in its default application for editing. regardless of their file extension. Display options • Show hidden items: Allows users to view documents that are marked as “hidden” in Enterprise Library. documents with non-standard file extensions such as . users will not be able to edit certain document types (for example.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration • Edit All Documents Using OpenText Office Editor: Allows users to edit Enterprise Library documents using OpenText Office Editor 10. • Create documents: Allows users to create documents in Enterprise Library. they will be displayed automatically.1 functionality. The Edit All Documents Using OpenText Office Editor option is available only if the OpenText Office Editor Web Editing option is selected on the Advanced Content Server Settings page and OpenText Office Editor 10. The columns from the configured view are displayed at the beginning and the custom Content OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 80 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .h). This option allows users to edit all document types.1 is installed in your Content Server environment. an additional input control is displayed by which a folder can also be specified using its nickname. Note: If Edit All Documents Using OpenText Office Editor is not selected. For more information. This option available only if Extended ECM is selected on the Advanced Content Server Settings page and you installed the SharePoint Services for Extended ECM package in your environment. • Display nicknames in the Enterprise Library folder picker: In the Enterprise Library folder picker. If the document is not associated with an application.3. you must enable the Web Editing feature in Content Server. the Open in Enterprise Library menu item appears on the ribbon in SharePoint. When this option is selected.

see “Preventing Application Governance & Archiving from converting links to Content Server shortcuts” on page 173.microsoft. • Use technical category: Creates the SharePoint Properties category when a document is archived. • Update Enterprise Library audit with SharePoint events: When a SharePoint document is archived. you must complete the following server configuration steps: • Enable SharePoint audit events for the site collection(s) from where you will archive documents. Records Management options • Use the SharePoint creation date as the Record Date: Select this check box to set the actual creation date of a SharePoint item as the record date OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 81 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . see Microsoft Office online help topic “Configure audit settings for a site collection” ( http://office. Archive/restore options • Delete Enterprise Library document when link is replaced: Deletes a document from Enterprise Library when it is restored to SharePoint. and select the check boxes starting with SharePoint for the audit events you are interested in. The SharePoint Properties category contains the following properties: • All Properties: String containing all properties of the original SharePoint document • Content Type ID: Unique identifier of the original SharePoint content type ID • Original location: URL of the document library where the original document was stored in SharePoint • Convert links to Content Server shortcuts when performing site archiving without using library profile: Converts links of previously archived documents to Content Server shortcuts if you archive a site with its document libraries using an archiving method that does not involve a library profile (for example. select this check box. For more information.Set Auditing interests. In Content Server Administration. This option is available only if you enable it in the FeaturesConfig. all existing SharePoint audit entries are transferred to the Enterprise Library audit. To transfer SharePoint audit events to the archived Content Server document. If you want to see only the columns configured in the view. • Set up Content Server to accept the SharePoint audit events.xml configuration file. Configuring Content Server settings Server columns are added at the end. For more information. 5. interactive archiving or automatic archiving using a site profile that does not use a library profile).aspx).com/en-us/sharepoint-help/ configure-audit-settings-for-a-site-collection-HA102866204.3. go to System Administration - Administer Event Auditing .

You can specify a different set of logging settings for each available feature category.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration when it is archived with a Records Management classification.3. followed by Warning and Information. Scheduled Archiving) corresponds to a single feature or a group of features that share the same logging settings. Notes • The performance of Application Governance & Archiving may be affected based on the logging level you select. Verbose or Error) require more resources than lower logging levels. you can specify whether the log messages are written to the Windows Event Log. and information messages that you can view in one or more text files. By default. • The File Log contains errors. you can specify different log levels for both the Windows Event Log and File Log. • The Windows Event Log contains errors. you can configure logging settings for categories of features in Application Governance & Archiving. you can decrease the logging level or turn off logging for its corresponding feature category. you can increase the logging level for its corresponding feature category. More messages are written to the log when you select higher logging levels. • If you want to log events for Application Governance & Archiving in a separate event log or use a separate event source to distinguish events more clearly. For each feature category. or both. If you want to receive fewer or no log messages for a specific feature. see “LogConfig.xml configuration file. but less detailed log messages about others.6 Defining logging settings When you are troubleshooting an issue. You can limit the size of the log files and the number of log files that are kept. Critical and Error. For each feature category. log messages for all categories are written to a single log file. 5. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 82 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Higher logging levels (for example. If you want to monitor events for a specific feature in more detail. see “Creating a separate log or event source” on page 86. The highest logging levels are Verbose (available for the File Log only).xml” on page 185. • If you want to specify log targets other than the Windows Event Log and File Log. This option is available only if the Records Management option is selected on the Advanced Content Server Settings page and the OpenText Records Management module is installed. warnings. warnings. For more information. In Central Administration. and information messages that you can view in Windows Event Viewer. Each category (for example. the File Log. you can define additional settings in the LogConfig. you may want to receive detailed log messages about certain components. You can also set log levels to specify the level of detail that is written to both the Windows Event Log and File Log.

Site Deployment – Administration Guide (SPCF-AGD). See OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint . In the General Settings area. Permission Synchronizer Sets the log level for events that occur when you run a Permission Synchronizer job to synchronize changes.3. See “Creating a link cleanup task” on page 134. See “Creating a synced copy task” on page 135. 2. Synced Copy Updater Sets the log level for events that occur when a document is archived as a synced copy and a new version of the document is saved in SharePoint. 5. In Central Administration. In the Logging Control area. click Logging settings. Orphaned Link Cleanup Sets the log level for events that occur when you run a link cleanup task.6.1 Defining log settings To define logging settings: 1. Configuring Content Server settings 5. Site Deployment Sets the log level for events that occur when actions are performed using Site Deployment features. See “SharePoint search integration” on page 44. Protocol Handler Sets the log level for events that occur when Enterprise Library documents from a content source are indexed for searching. actions performed in Enterprise Library Web Parts). select a category of features for which you want to define log level(s): Web Pages and Workflows Sets the log level for events that occur when actions are performed in SharePoint (for example. See “Creating an archiving task” on page 133. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. Administration Pages Sets the log level for events that occur when actions are performed in Central Administration. 3. Scheduled Archiving Sets the log level for events that occur when you run a scheduled task to archive documents or sites automatically. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 83 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .3. See “Permission synchronization” on page 36. This category is applicable if you define an Enterprise Library content source to index Enterprise Library items into SharePoint searches.

Warning messages may require further action depending on the needs of your environment. By default.xml” on page 185. For more information. • Error: Error messages generated by features in the selected category are written to the log. define the log file settings: • Log file path: Define the path and default name of the log file. • Critical: Critical messages generated by the features in the selected category are written to the log. This option is available for the File Log only. These types of messages do not typically require further action. Old log files are named with a sequential number. • Verbose: Additional details about each message type are written to the log. a new file will be created. This setting applies to all categories you log. In the File Log:Settings area. • Warning: Warning messages generated by features in the selected category are written to the log. Critical messages typically require further action. you can define additional settings in the LogConfig. see “LogConfig. the oldest file will be deleted. 6. The default value is 1000000. In the Log levels of available targets area. The default value is 10. remote site archiving). Define log levels for the other available categories as needed. • Maximum log file size in bytes: When the maximum log file size is reached. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 84 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . select an option in the Windows Event Log list to specify a log level for the Windows Event Log and select an option in the File Log list to specify a log level for the File Log.log. Information messages indicate that normal product operations have occurred successfully.xml configuration file. The default path is %CommonProgramFiles%\Microsoft Shared\Web Server Extensions\15\LOGS\OpenText. but filtered according to certain criteria. 5.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration SharePoint Online Sets the log level for events that occur when actions are performed using Application Governance & Archiving for SharePoint Online features (for example. • Number of old log file backups to keep: If the specified number of files to keep is exceeded. Critical messages are error messages. Tip: If you need to define other types of error messages as critical. • Information: Information messages generated by features in the selected category are written to the log. See “Archiving remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online sites and documents“ on page 215. The following options are available: • Off: Log messages generated by the features in the selected category are not written to the log. Error messages typically require further action. 4. only errors that do not cause functional communication between Enterprise Library and SharePoint are handled as critical.

6. Configuring Content Server settings 5. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 85 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .3 Accessing log messages in Windows Event Viewer To open Windows Event Viewer: • On the Start menu. 7. no messages for permission synchronization features are written to the Windows Event Log. When these options are selected. Click OK to save the logging settings for both the Scheduled Archiving and Permission Synchronization categories. select Permission Synchronization.3. Click OK to return to the main OpenText Application Governance & Archiving page. select Critical in the Windows Event Log list and Verbose in the File Log list. In the Category title list.Application area.xml” on page 185. In the Log levels of available targets area. This example demonstrates how to set the logging levels for automatic archiving features and turn off logging in Windows Event Viewer for permission synchronization features.2 Example: Defining logging settings for automatic archiving and permission synchronization features The following example describes how to specify different logging levels for automatic archiving and permission synchronization features. 6. click Logging settings. In Central Administration.6. 5. 4. 3. you can find relevant logging information. 8. 5. selectScheduled Archiving. 2. select Off in the Windows Event Log list and Error in the File Log list.3. see “LogConfig. Tip: To rename the event log. 9. In the Log levels of available targets area. In the General Settings area. In this case.3. Error messages are written to the File Log only. critical messages related to scheduled archiving tasks are written to the Windows Event Log and additional details related to scheduled archiving tasks are written to the File Log. In the Category title list. To define logging settings for automatic archiving and permission synchronization features: 1. In the Windows Logs . click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. 5. click Administrative Tools > Event Viewer. click Logging settings. In the General Settings area.

PublicKeyToken=1c09cf99a6518f9f"> <Filter InitializationData="Information" Type="System.4 Creating a separate log or event source By default. 2.0. Version=2.3.EventTypeFilter. for example: [System.Logging_EventLogSettings_Title" Description="$Resources:lladmin.EventLogTraceListener.Diagnostics.0. for example: . To better distinguish Application Governance & Archiving from standard SharePoint Foundation events.Logging_LevelError_Label" /> <SupportedLevel Value="Warning" Label="$Resources:lladmin.xml file by changing the log. Reference the created event source or event log in the LogConfig. You can also use a separate event source to better distinguish between the various events.Diagnostics. All logged events have SharePoint Foundation as an event source.6.EventLog]::CreateEventSource("OpenText". PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089" /> <Properties> <Property Name="log" Value="Application" /> <Property Name="source" Value="OpenText" /> </Properties> <SupportedLevels> <SupportedLevel Value="Off" Label="$Resources:lladmin.0. Register your own event log or event source by running the following SharePoint Management Shell command on all servers in the farm: [System. Opentext.Logging_LevelOff_Label" /> <SupportedLevel Value="Critical" Label="$Resources:lladmin.Diagnostics. Culture=neutral.TraceListeners. Application Governance & Archiving uses the Application Windows Log that you can check in the Event Viewer.Diagnostics.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration 5. <event log name>). and source properties of the EventLog listener..Logging_EventLogSettings_Descript ion" Type="Opentext.Logging_LevelCritical_Label" /> <SupportedLevel Value="Error" Label="$Resources:lladmin. "Application").0. Replace the <event source name> and <event log name> placeholders with appropriate entries. you can specify a different event log than the default log.0..6.EventLog]::CreateEventSource(<event source name>. Culture=neutral. Version=10.Logging_LevelWarning_Label" /> OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 86 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . System. <Listener Name="EventLog" Title="$Resources:lladmin. To create a separate event log or event source: 1.

.3. 5. For more information. see “Integrating and configuring OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts“ on page 263. If the user does not have a search template. tracing information is displayed only in the browser opened on the SharePoint server. In addition to the general settings.. In the General Settings area. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. 3. click Search settings. the system default template is used. the search template of the current user is used. By default. Otherwise. For more information about the LogConfig. The search template defines which properties are returned in the search results of the Enterprise Library Search Results Web Part. 2. the search page can be configured using the Modify Shared Web Part option. • Show tracing remotely: Displays all tracing information on each client where a search is performed.xml” on page 185.xml file. Search Template Specify which Content Server search template is used by all users for searching. Search settings include tracing and object types included in the search. In Central Administration. To define search settings: 1. see “LogConfig. Specify which tracing information should be displayed on the results page in SharePoint.Logging_LevelInformation_Label" /> </SupportedLevels> </Listener> .7 Defining search settings Settings in this section influence the behavior of the Enterprise Library Search pages and the Enterprise Library Search Web Parts. Tip: Create a specific search template with your designated properties in Content Server to be used exclusively for the Enterprise Library OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 87 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . 5. • Enabled: Displays the tracing information under the result list in the Enterprise Library search results Web Part. Configuring Content Server settings <SupportedLevel Value="Information" Label="$Resources:lladmin.3. Specify the following settings: Tracing Tracing information is needed for support purposes. For more information. see “Activating and modifying Enterprise Library search Web Parts” on page 287.

the layout of search results may not appear as expected. OTObjectDate. OTReservedByName. OTSummary. Otherwise.xml file. OTReservedDate. in the Available box. and then click the Display arrow to add the properties to the Displayed box. On the Enterprise Search Manager menu. click Search Administration > Open the System Object Volume > Enterprise Data Source Folder. OTSubtype. b.xml file. you must select these properties in the Displayable column in Content Server Administration and add them to your search template and. For more information.11. OTLocation. Click Update. see “LivelinkSearchConfig. select all properties in the Sortable column by which the search results may be sorted. Tip: If you clear all of the check boxes. select the following properties as displayable: OTName. Note: If you use the Physical Objects module and want to make the physical properties of physical objects available for the search. f. and all object types will be returned in the search.xml” on page 183. click Edit the Display Options. Also. In the Results Display Style list. In the Content Server Administration. OTCreatedByName or OTCreatedByFullName. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 88 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . e. Return to Search Administration. Optional In Central Administration. Object Types Specify which Content Server object subtypes are included in searches.Displayed area.16 “Administering Search Templates” in OpenText Content Server Admin Online Help . select all properties in the Displayable column that you want the search results to return. To modify a search template in Content Server: a. and additionally. add type information for the properties to the LivelinkSearchConfig. On the Regions page. OTObjectSize. h. c. and then click Edit the System Default Template to edit the search results template.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration Search Results Web Part. if necessary. For more information about this file. g. select the properties that you want to display in the search results. d. OTReserved. In the Result Fields . Default Scopes Specify which Content Server scopes are searched by default. OTFileName. click Properties > Regions. see section 1. all of the object type filters are removed.Search Administration (LLESWBS-H-AGD). Note that if you work with the default XSLT style sheet of the Enterprise Library Search Results Web Part. Click Apply. i. The configuration of Content Server determines which scopes are available. add type information for the properties to the LivelinkSearchConfig.

This name will be displayed when managing content sources in SharePoint. click Content Sources. To verify if the Content Server regions cache is current. 3. If the content access account misses this permission. For more information on enabling performance counters. if the usage of performance counters has been enabled during the crawl.3.3. see “Defining search settings” on page 87. click Application Management. see “LivelinkConfig. click the Search Service Application link. Also. In Central Administration. 2. 5. the searchable Content Server properties are cached by Application Governance & Archiving. 5. 4. you must update the Content Server regions cache again using this page. In the list of service applications. For more information. Configuring Content Server settings Note: To improve search performance. In the left pane. under Crawling. open the Global Search Settings page. Whenever you modify the searchable properties in Content Server. Root Folders Select one or more root folders for which you want to create the content source. the content access account must be a member of the performance monitors users group. The selected folder is indexed and can be searched in the standard SharePoint search.8 Defining Enterprise Library content sources You can define Enterprise Library or a specific folder within Enterprise Library to be used as a content source in the SharePoint search. Content Server Select the Content Server for which you want to create the content source. You will receive a warning message at the top of the page if the cache is out of date. Specify the following settings: Name Enter a name to describe the content source. In the Service Applications area. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 89 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . 6. To define Enterprise Library content sources: 1.xml” on page 174. click Manage service applications. Follow the instructions provided. Click New Content Source for OpenText Enterprise Library. 5. the end users might receive an error message for these pages in the search result even though the user has this permission. Note: The content access account of the SharePoint Search Service Application needs the See Contents permission to Content Server content in order to properly crawl the pages that host the Enterprise Library Web Parts.

The names of the crawled properties have the following form: <Name prefix>_<Content Server category name>_<Attribute name> If an attribute is part of an attribute set. it has the same name as the configured Content Server display name. the crawled properties are mapped to managed properties so that the user can perform a search directly against the Content Server system properties. users must have at least See Content permission for the items in Content Server. if you create a content source for the configured Content Server with the name CS 10. If you OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 90 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . and Application Governance & Archiving must be deployed to the web application that hosts this site collection. The ACLs are used to determine if the users have enough permissions to access the crawled items. For example. Redirection Host URL In the Redirection host URL box. Note: Indexing ACLs is optional since the query time security trimming is always applied. enter a URL that refers to the root of a site collection that all users who search documents from this content source can access. are always crawled regardless of the Crawl Content Server Properties setting. the corresponding crawled property will have the following name: <Name prefix>_<Content Server category name>_<Attribute set name>_<Attribute name> You can specify the name prefix in the Crawled property name prefix box.com. The properties are defined in the categories that are assigned to the folders and documents. Note: The Content Server system properties. for example.myserver.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration Index ACLs Select the Index ACLs check box if you want to index the Access Control Lists (ACLs) for the crawled Enterprise Library folders or documents. Crawl Content Server Properties Select the Crawl properties check box if you want the Content Server properties to be crawled. The crawled properties are created in a category that is called OT_<Configured Content Server Display Name>. A root site collection that is accessible to all users in the web application may have. To search and see an item in the search results. This crawled property category is used to create the crawled properties. The crawled properties for these system properties are grouped in the Content Server category. By default. By default. After the properties are crawled. This entry is mandatory. a crawled property category with the name OT_CS 10 is created after the crawl. the crawled properties are created in the Search Service Application. the value http://intranet. such as the Name and Created By properties.

for example.xml” on page 174. In Central Administration. at night. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 91 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Select this option only if you know that the server can currently handle a full crawl. and then click OK. Protocol. Content Source Priority Select the priority of this content. Instead of opening the document. Crawl Schedules Select schedules for the full crawl and for the incremental crawl for the content source. and no root site collection in its web application. under Crawling. In general. define the schedule settings. 2.doc?Volume=-2000&Node=12345&Server=contoso-main You can also customize the relative URL.com/sites/portal. a full crawl should be scheduled to run at times when there is little workload on the server. The following example shows a complete URL: http:// intranet. 5. The relative URL contains information about the operation that is to be performed when you click one of the links. To create new schedules: a. In the Service Applications area. The Crawl system will prioritize the processing of High priority content sources over Normal priority content sources. and port must match the configuration of the hosting web application. click Manage service applications.3. The Redirection Host URL and an appended relative URL form the links to open the documents that are displayed in the search results. This general information webpage is delivered by default with your Application Governance & Archiving installation. For more information. host. Start Full Crawl Select the Start full crawl of this content source check box to start a full crawl when you save the content source settings.myserver. Click Create schedule. Select the type. b.myserver. All schedules defined for any content source in SharePoint so far are displayed. for example. the value may be http:// intranet. for example. 4. You can select an existing one or create a new one. Configuring Content Server settings have a widely accessible portal. In the list of service applications. the linked web page may display general information about the selected document. To view the crawl logs: 1. see the advanced configuration settings for ProtocolHandlerDocumentRedirectUrl and ProtocolHandlerFolderRedirectUrl in “LivelinkConfig.aspx/Specif ication. click Crawl Log.com/_layouts/Livelink/Inspection. 3. click the Search Service Application link. In the left pane. click Application Management.

For more details about the settings in this area. Name Enter the name to describe the content source. In the list of service applications. The properties are defined in the categories that are assigned to the folders and documents. 5. click the Search Service Application link. In the Service Applications area. To edit Enterprise Library content sources: 1. All subdirectories of these folders will also be crawled. click Content Sources. On the Crawl Log .Content Source page. 5. 2. you can view summaries of the crawled items. click Application Management. Crawl Content Server Properties Specify if you want the Content Server properties to be crawled. Hover your mouse pointer over the name of a content source and click the down arrow that appears to the right of the Namecolumn. the crawled properties are created in the Search Service Application.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration 5. In Central Administration. under Crawling. 4. 3. After the properties are crawled. you must run a full crawl for the change to take effect. see “Defining Enterprise Library content sources” on page 89 OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 92 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . In the left pane. click Manage service applications. Edit the settings. see the SharePoint Online Help topic Manage content sources. This name will be displayed when managing content sources in SharePoint. and then click OK. see “Defining Enterprise Library content sources” on page 89 Note: If you change this setting. For detailed information.3. 6. Index ACLs Specify if you want to index the Access Control Lists (ACLs) for the crawled Enterprise Library folders or documents. 7.9 Editing Enterprise Library content sources You can edit the content sources that you have created in the Search Service Application. Root Folders Select the folders from which you want to crawl the content. For more details about this setting. select Edit. In the context menu.

For more information about this URL. Click Edit schedule. Select the type. Note: SharePoint-related objects must be selected as Managed in the Records Management administration in Content Server.3. at night. Configuring Content Server settings Note: If you change the crawled property name prefix. The Crawl system will prioritize the processing of High priority content sources over Normal priority content sources.ini file contains the subtype IDs for Content Server managed objects. new crawled properties will be created. define the schedule settings.Installation and Administration Guide (LLESRCM-IGD). 5. for example. and then click OK. Content Source Priority Select the priority of this content. Therefore. For more information about managed objects. a full crawl should rather be performed at times when there is little workload on the server.3. b. The default entries are: OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 93 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . This entry is mandatory. If you are creating this section for the first time. Only select this option if you know that the server can currently handle a full crawl. You can select or edit an existing content source. All schedules that have been defined for any content source in SharePoint so far are displayed. To edit schedules: a. see OpenText Records Management . you must reset the index and change the managed properties to map them to the new crawled properties. Redirection Host URL Enter the URL that refers to the root of a site collection that all users who search documents from this content source can access. Crawl Schedules Select a schedule for the Full crawl and for the Incremental crawl for the content source. Archiving SharePoint sites as records only works when the Content Server object types for archived sites and document libraries are added to Content Server managed objects in this section. add the required default entries and any other specific entries. In general. Start Full Crawl Select Start full crawl of this content source to start a full crawl of this content source. Optionally. see the full description in “Defining Enterprise Library content sources” on page 89. 5. you can consider removing old crawled properties.10 Configuring Records Management settings The [Classification] section in the opentext.

1255.4 Creating and managing library and site profiles for archiving On the Manage Profiles page in Central Administration. The language of the query is Collaborative Application Markup Language (CAML). 145.Document library Example: [Classification] SubTypes={0. or web applications. If you are familiar with CAML. site collections. 136. you can include all documents that are older than two months and larger than 2 MB. 1253. A rule controls which documents of a document library are archived and how they are archived. 144. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 94 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Site profiles You assign site profiles to SharePoint sites. Library profiles You assign library profiles through site profiles or directly to document libraries.Folder • 144 .Text document • 136 . Site profiles contain conditions that control which library profiles are used for archiving from a site.Lists • 1255 . You can define any number of rules for automatic archiving. For example. a markup language in SharePoint.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration • 0 . Site profiles control the automatic archiving of sites. you can create local or remote site profiles and library profiles to define automatic archiving options for documents and sites. To select the correct documents for automatic archiving. site collection. A library profile is based on a document library and contains one or more rules. You can use the Query Designer to write CAML queries.Archived sites • 1256 . You can combine any number of rules in a library profile. 1256} 5. you write a query with one or more conditions. Settings on lower hierarchical levels override settings on higher hierarchical levels. Subsites can be inherited by site profiles. You can control automatic archiving on different hierarchical levels.Document • 145 . or web application. you can write the query manually. Rules are processed in the order that you specify.Compound document Additional entries for SharePoint are: • 1253 . Library profiles control the automatic archiving of documents.

click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. Note: The Remote Document Library Profile option is available only if the SharePoint Online Support feature is installed and at least one remote site connection has been defined. In the Automatic Archiving Rules area. • Description: Description of the library profile. • If you are creating a local document library profile. Notes • The documents in the document library you select are archived with this library profile only if you assign the library profile to the document library. 3. you can also create a remote library profile to archive content from a remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online environment automatically. 4. Base Document Library Select a path to a SharePoint document library. 5. If you are creating a remote document library profile. In Central Administration. This is the document library that is actually used for archiving or one that represents other document libraries that you want to archive with this library profile. It is also used to test the query. define a rule that will be used to archive documents in document libraries: OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 95 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Creating and managing library and site profiles for archiving 5.1 Creating local or remote document library profiles You can create a local library profile to archive documents from a local SharePoint server environment automatically. 2. document libraries from remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online sites displayed in the list. document libraries from local SharePoint sites are displayed in the list. To create a local or remote document library profile: 1. Click New and select Document Library Profile to create a local document library profile or Remote Document Library Profile to create a remote document library profile. The document library provides the SharePoint properties you use to create the query in the Query Designer. If you installed the SharePoint Online Support feature. For more information.4. Specify the following settings: Profile Information • Profile name (mandatory): Name of the library profile. 5. In the Profile Configuration area. You can use spaces and special characters. click Manage profiles.4. see “Assigning document library profiles to document libraries” on page 100.

c. For more information. less than 400). In the Archive folder area. Note: The Create Link action is available for local document library profiles only. Note: You must provide a Records Management classification if the Advanced Item Management option is enabled. For more information.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration a. If you want to create a new query using the Query Designer. In the Records Management classification area. select the destination folder in which the archived documents will be stored. all of the documents in the library are archived. e. This option is applied to the current rule. For more information.xml” on page 170 and “ProfileConfig. d.xml configuration files. In the Order area. the system creates a two-level hierarchical folder structure.xml” on page 198. Use this option if you plan to archive a small number of documents (for example. After the maximum number of subfolders and documents is reached in the folder. see “Using the Query Designer” on page 98. specify the root folder for the folder structure in Enterprise Library where the documents are archived. see “Defining available functionality” on page 78. For more information. On the lowest level of this structure. click Select Records Management classification to select a Records Management classification to apply to the archived site. a new folder is created. see “Actions for interactive document archiving” on page 25. specify the order in which the rule is processed. specify how documents in document sets are archived. f. You can specify the following options: • Flat: The documents are archived within the root folder structure that you specify in the Folder structure prefix text box. b. see “ArchivingConfig. In the File Action area. On the lowest level of this structure. The OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 96 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . see “Actions for interactive document set archiving” on page 27. Note: If you do not define a query for the library profile. This option is applied to the current rule. In the Document Set Action area. For more information. In the Folder structure area. Note: The Create Link option is available for local document library profiles only. • Technical: The documents are archived within the root folder structure according to the technical structure defined in the ArchivingConfig.xml and ProfileConfig. click Edit Query. g. specify how the documents are archived. all files are stored in the same folder (root folder).

OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 97 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . h. 2. click Add Rules and repeat step 5 to define the rule. 7. even if they are newer than the last major version. It can be either a minor or a major version.2). • Most recent version: Archives the last version. Click OK to save your changes. 5. You can set the order in which each rule is processed by selecting a value in the Order drop-down list. 6. Creating and managing library and site profiles for archiving maximum number of subfolders and documents in a folder can by configured by the SharePoint administrator. specify which versions to archive: Select which versions to archive: • All major and minor versions: Archives all major and minor versions. see “Using placeholders for the folder structure” on page 159. To customize the maximum numbers of folders and documents. see “ArchivingConfig. The last minor versions are not archived. • Folder structure prefix: Specify a prefix for the root folder structure to be created within the selected destination folder. Note: Multiple rules are processed consecutively. If you want to define an additional rule. For more information about how to create the folder structure and which placeholders you can use. Note: The Last major and the last minor versions option is unavailable for synced copy and incremental archiving. • Last major version: Archives only the last major version.0) and the last minor versions (for example 2. • All major versions: Archives only the major versions. The minor versions are not archived.4.xml” on page 170. In the Versions area. • Last major and the last minor versions: Archives both the last major version (for example. You can use a combination of fixed names and placeholders to define the names of the generated folders.

you must be familiar with the Microsoft SharePoint markup language. 2. This value is required. Enter the number of days that will be subtracted from the current date that is date when the archiving is run. Click Edit Query. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 98 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . To specify a query constraint. do the following: a. d. c. you usually enter absolute date values. if available. Select Use relative dates to use an input field instead of a calendar next to a date property. You can also edit the query code directly. CAML. Remote Document Library Profile to create a remote document library profile. 4. click New and select Document Library Profile to create a local document library profile or. 5. The Query Designer provides drop-down lists containing all the document library properties that the library profile is based on. see “Creating local or remote document library profiles” on page 95. type a description for the query. click Archiving Rules. Specify a profile name. In the Profile Configuration area. Click Edit Query.4. Enter the comparative value. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. Tip: For detailed information on how to create a document library profile.1 Using the Query Designer You use the Query Designer to create a filter for all documents that you want to archive automatically. 3. Click Add Constraint to add a line of fields for constraint definition at the end of the constraint list. e. In SharePoint. select a document library profile in the list. Select an operator. click Manage profiles. Note: To use the advanced query functionality. In the Query Description text box. description.1. b. In Central Administration.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration 5. To open the Query Designer: 1. • If you want to specify a query for an existing document library profile. Do one of the following: • If you want to specify a query for a new document library profile. select a date from the calendar or select true/ false from the list box. and base document library. Select a property from the list of all properties that the selected document library contains.

Notes • You must be familiar with CAML to edit the query code manually. 6. such files are called “thicket files”. This function returns a list of all documents in the sample document library that match the query. and Size. you can exclude HTML files and their linked files by using the FileType property in the Query Designer. The results list contains the following properties: Name. for example xls for Excel spreadsheets.xslt file. For more information. Tip: In the QueryPage. the structure of the HTML file is broken. •The value for File Type is equal to the extension of the file. for example. • When you clear the Use advanced query option. Created.4. f. . When the Create Link archiving action is used. Created by. for example 5242880 for 5 MB. If you want to edit the query code manually. Creating and managing library and site profiles for archiving Notes • HTML documents may contain several files referenced by HTML links. • The comparative value for File Size is stated in bytes. Because the original file names and paths no longer exist. 7. you can customize how many documents will be listed and which properties are displayed. To avoid this. Click OK to save your changes.jpg files. In SharePoint. all manual changes will be deleted. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 99 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Tip: It may be easier to create your query using the drop-down lists and then edit the code in the text box. each file is replaced by a link document. Click Test to test the query. Modified. 5. select Use advanced query and edit the code in the text box. see “Editing style sheets” on page 206. Modified by. Errors in syntax create an error message when you test the query.

Click Create. click the URL. 6. If a name conflict occurs. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. Browse for a SharePoint document library or enter a document library URL. select a document library profile. 5.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration 5.4. Note: Only local document library profiles can be assigned to document libraries in a local SharePoint server environment and only remote document library profiles can be assigned to document libraries in a remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online environment. To do so. 3. 2. see “Creating local or remote document library profiles” on page 95. To view the assigned library.4.2. click Assign library profiles to document libraries. see “ArchivingConfig.xml” on page 170. In the Document library profile list. you can configure Application Governance & Archiving to add a number to the file name of the archived document or display an error message if a document has the same name as an existing document. you can assign it to one or more document libraries.2 Assigning document library profiles to document libraries After creating a library profile. In Central Administration. edit the <DocumentNameConflictOption> element in the ArchivingConfig.1 Resolving name conflicts Name conflicts can occur when you archive documents automatically using a local document library profile and then attempt to archive a document that has the same name as an existing document in the destination Enterprise Library folder. Click New. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 100 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . In the Profile Configuration area. 5. For more information. 4. For more information about local and remote library profiles.xml file. The new assignment is listed in the table. To assign library profiles to document libraries: 1.

or web applications. 4. 2. If you installed the SharePoint Online Support feature. site collection. General Settings Select the features that you want to use for the profiles: OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 101 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .4. 3. or web application. Site profiles contain conditions that control which library profiles are used for archiving from a site. If you want to archive documents that are currently checked out. For more information. Specify the following settings: Profile Information • Profile name (mandatory): Specify the name of the site profile. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. you must first check in the documents you want to archive before running the archiving process. see “Archiving remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online sites and documents“ on page 215.3 Creating a local or remote site profile You assign site profiles to SharePoint sites. Click New and select Site Profile to create a local site profile or Remote Site Profile to create a remote site profile. you can also create a remote site profile to archive sites from a remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online environment.4. In Central Administration. Notes • If you create a remote site profile. You can also inherit site profiles to subsites. 5. Tip: To extend the site profile page with an additional section or to include configuration for an extended site archiving provider. Note: The Remote Site Profile option is available only if the SharePoint Online Support feature is installed and at least one remote site connection has been defined. see the OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint SDK in the OpenText Knowledge Center. site collections. You can create a local site profile to archive sites from a local SharePoint server environment. but do not want to delete the site. you must first configure your environment to archive remote sites automatically. In the Profile Configuration area. Creating and managing library and site profiles for archiving 5. To create a local or remote site profile: 1. • Description: Specify a description for the site profile. click Manage profiles. for example. • Documents that are checked out in SharePoint during the archiving process will be archived if the Delete site after archiving option is selected.

You can select this option if you are creating a local site profile. Selected by default. Note: The type of the web parameter depends on the SharePoint object model you select. 0). This option cannot be selected if you are creating a remote site profile. d. Select the Enable preconditions check box and then click Settings. The preconditions are checked. a. assign site profiles to these individual subsites. 6. An empty site profile is a site profile where no action (site deletion. the web parameter has the type Microsoft. document library archiving. 0.Client.SharePoint. site exporting) is done during processing of the profile. • SharePoint Server-side object model: Select this option if you want to specify conditions that are based on the SharePoint server object model. If this is true. • SharePoint Client-side object model: Select this option if you want to specify conditions that are based on the SharePoint client-side object model. c. 5. 0. Specify the following settings: OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 102 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . You can select this option if you are creating either a local or remote site profile. the web parameter has the type Microsoft.Web. • Delete site after archiving: Deletes the site in SharePoint as soon as this site profile has been successfully executed. Enter the preconditions in C# code based on the SharePoint object model you selected.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration • Inheritable: Handles archiving in subsites according to this profile as well. On the Site Profile Configuration – Archiving Preconditions page. specify preconditions for running the site profile.SharePoint.Site. Click OK. If you select the SharePoint client- side object model. return web. Tip: To exclude individual subsites from this site profile. To check the SharePoint site in the code. If you select the SharePoint server object model. You can also add an empty site profile to exclude a subsite from archiving. If needed.Today - new TimeSpan(90. b.LastContentModifiedDate < DateTime. the following code checks whether the content of the parent site collection was not modified during the last 3 months.SPWeb. the site profile is executed for the site. select the SharePoint object model you want to use to create the preconditions. you must use the web parameter. • Delete only sites that do not have subsites: Avoids loss of non- archived subsites. Example: For example.

see “Defining document library archiving settings for a local or remote site profile” on page 104. see “Using placeholders for the folder structure” on page 159. For more information about defining conditions. The Records Management Classification Picker opens. Records Management Classification Click Select a Records Management classification to apply a Records Management classification to the archived site. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 103 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . For more information. and then click Settings. • Subfolders: You can define how the folder structure will be generated in the archiving process. The check box is selected by default.4. This option is available only if you are creating a local site profile. 5. see “Defining site export settings for a local site profile” on page 108. and then click Settings. and then click Settings. For more information. Site Export Settings Enable site export: Select this check box to define site export settings for a local site profile. For more information about defining conditions. Creating and managing library and site profiles for archiving Library Archiving Enable library archiving: Select this check box to define library archiving conditions for the site profile. Enterprise Library Folder • Enterprise Library Folder: Select a destination folder in Enterprise Library where the archived site is stored by default. see “Defining available functionality” on page 78. • Use defined library profiles: Allows you to assign defined library profiles to the document libraries that are archived with the site. see “Defining list archiving settings for a local or remote site profile” on page 107. For defining conditions. List Archiving Enable list archiving: Select this check box to define list archiving conditions for the site profile. Note: You must provide a Records Management Classification if the Advanced Item Management option is enabled. • Specify archiving conditions: Allows you to specify archiving conditions for the document libraries that are archived with the site. The check box is selected by default. For more information. select one of the following options. see “Defining document library profile archiving settings for a local or remote site profile” on page 105.

a value.3. Note: The available properties. you must also be familiar with C#. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 104 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . 7. see “Best practices for site archiving” on page 112. This button is available if the Write advanced code check box is cleared. Note: You must be familiar with the SharePoint object model. • SharePoint Server-side object model: Select this option if you want to specify conditions that are based on the SharePoint server object model. Specify the following settings: Add Condition Adds a new condition. Select the Enable library archiving check box and then Specify archiving conditions. 6. • SharePoint Client-side object model: Select this option if you want to specify conditions that are based on the SharePoint client-side object model. click Manage profiles. For more information. click New and select Site Profile or Remote Site Profile. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. 3. Select the SharePoint object model that you want to use to specify conditions for archiving document libraries. and values may vary according to the SharePoint object model you selected.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration 5. logical operators. a logical operator. Entered values are case- insensitive. You can select this option if you are creating a local site profile. You can select this option if you are creating either a local or remote site profile. 5. To define document library archiving settings for the site profile: 1. In Central Administration. 2. • If you want to define archiving settings for an existing site profile. This option cannot be selected if you are creating a remote site profile. Click Settings. and if you want the value to be archived or not. Specify a property. In the Profile Configuration area.1 Defining document library archiving settings for a local or remote site profile You can define document library archiving settings for the site profile. Do one of the following: • If you want to define archiving settings for a new site profile. select a site profile and click Settings in the Manage group of the ribbon. 4.4. If you want to write custom conditions for archiving document libraries.

Archive document libraries by default Select this option to archive all document libraries on the site for which none of the above defined conditions apply. even if they are newer than the last major version. Without a default profile. 5.2 Defining document library profile archiving settings for a local or remote site profile You can define library profile archiving settings for the site profile. It can be either a minor or a major version. Click OK.0) and the last minor versions (for example 2. Document Versions Specify how document versions are archived.3. The last minor versions are not archived. 5. these document libraries are excluded from archiving.4. you must also be familiar with C#. In Central Administration. • All major versions: Archives only the major versions. Creating and managing library and site profiles for archiving Remove Condition Removes the last defined condition from the list of conditions. If you want to write custom conditions for archiving document libraries. Note: For more information about archiving metadata for document versions. 2. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. • Last major and the last minor versions: Archives both the last major version (for example. see “Defining content type mappings to archive local content” on page 127. 2. Write advanced code Select this option to write custom conditions. • Most recent version: Archives the last version.2). In the Profile Configuration area. The conditions that you define here supersede all other conditions specified in this dialog box. 8. Note: You must be familiar with the SharePoint object model. Select which versions to archive: • All major and minor versions: Archives all major and minor versions. • Last major version: Archives only the last major version. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 105 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . To define document library profile archiving settings for a site profile: 1. The minor versions are not archived. You can write conditions in C# based on the SharePoint object model you selected.4. click Manage profiles.

• If you want to define archiving settings for an existing site profile. The conditions that you define here supersede all other conditions specified in this dialog box. Click OK. Click Settings. and if you want to apply the value to a specific profile or not. Remove Condition Removes the last defined condition from the list of conditions. • SharePoint Client-side object model: Select this option if you want to specify conditions that are based on the SharePoint client-side object model. Do one of the following: • If you want to define archiving settings for a new site profile. Entered values are case-insensitive when you create new conditions. This button is available if the Write advanced code check box is cleared. a value. click New and select Site Profile or Remote Site Profile. Specify a property. Without a default profile. • SharePoint Server-side object model: Select this option if you want to specify conditions that are based on the SharePoint server object model. You can select this option if you are creating a local site profile. a logical operator. Write advanced code Select this option to write custom conditions in C#. 6. Default profile Select this option to define a default library profile for archiving all document libraries on the site for which none of the defined conditions apply. select a site profile and click Settings in the Manage group of the ribbon. 8. 7. This option cannot be selected if you are creating a remote site profile. Select the SharePoint object model that you want to use to specify conditions that define which library profiles are used by the site profile to archive document libraries. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 106 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . 5. Select the Enable library archiving check box and then Use defined library profiles. Existing library profiles are not affected. Specify the following settings as needed. these document libraries are excluded from archiving. Add Condition Adds a new condition. You can select this option if you are creating either a local or remote site profile.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration 3. 4.

3 Defining list archiving settings for a local or remote site profile You can define list archiving settings for a local or remote site profile. If you want to write custom conditions to archive lists. logical operators. 5. You can select this option if you are creating a local site profile. This button is available if the Write advanced code check box is cleared.4. • If you want to define archiving settings for an existing site profile. a value. 5. • SharePoint Client-side object model: Select this option if you want to specify conditions that are based on the SharePoint client-side object model. Note: The available properties. 4. click New and select Site Profile or Remote Site Profile. and values may vary according to the SharePoint object model you selected. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. Creating and managing library and site profiles for archiving 5. you must also be familiar with C#. Do one of the following: • If you want to define archiving settings for a new site profile.3. 7. You can select this option if you are creating either a local or remote site profile. select a site profile and click Settings in the Manage group of the ribbon. Note: You must be familiar with the SharePoint object model. 3. Specify the following settings: Add Condition Adds a new condition. • SharePoint Server-side object model: Select this option if you want to specify conditions that are based on the SharePoint server object model. In Central Administration. Select the SharePoint object model that you want to use to specify conditions to archive lists. Click Settings. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 107 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . To define list archiving settings for a site profile: 1. Specify a property. 2. In the Profile Configuration area.4. a logical operator. and whether you want the value to be archived. 6. click Manage profiles. Select Enable list archiving. Entered values are case- insensitive. Remove Condition Removes the last defined condition from the list of conditions. This option cannot be selected if you are creating a remote site profile.

such as documents. Without a default profile.3. Depending on the selected setting. To define site export settings for a local site profile: 1.4. On the Site Export Settings page. 3. These settings are relevant for the option Site Export Package. click Manage Profiles. The conditions that you define here supersede all other conditions specified in this dialog box. see http://msdn. 4. see “Configuring interactive site archiving settings” on page 119. Important The size of the site export package may not exceed 1 GB. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. which enables the restoring of archived sites.4 Defining site export settings for a local site profile If you are archiving a site from an on-premises SharePoint environment.com/en-us/library/ microsoft. click New and select Site Profile. and click Settings in the Manage area of the ribbon. and then click Settings. Write advanced code Select this option to write custom conditions in C# based on the SharePoint object model you selected.includesecurity. 5.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration Archive lists by default Archives all lists on the site for which none of the above defined conditions apply. Do one of the following: • If you want to define site export settings for a new site profile. 5. you can restore the permissions when you restore a site. lists. you can define export settings for local site profiles. In the Profile Configuration area. these lists are excluded from archiving.sharepoint.asp x OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 108 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Select Enable site export.spdeploymentsettings. or sites. select a site profile in the list. For more information. In Central Administration. Specify the following settings: Security Specify if you want to save the user or group permissions to the objects that are exported. For more information about the Site Export Package option.microsoft.deployment. This option allows you to create a site export package of the site content. 2. • If you want to define site export settings for an existing site profile.

This is the default setting. or web applications After creating a site profile. for example 2. user information that is defined in the DAP or LDAP servers is included. or any custom roles that extend from the default roles. the permissions are inherited from the site collection to which the site is imported. 5. even if they are newer than the last major version. or web applications. In addition. Note: A document library can be archived by the library profile directly assigned it. No user information defined in the DAP or LDAP servers is included. and the last minor versions. • Most recent version: Saves the last version. site collections. Exported Versions This setting applies to SharePoint documents stored within the site export package.0. Creating and managing library and site profiles for archiving • No: User and group information is not included.4. or by a library profile assigned through a site profile. Select which versions to save: • All major and minor versions: Saves all major and minor versions. • Last major and the last minor versions: Saves both the last major version. site collections.4 Assigning site profiles to sites. The ACL for each object is migrated. for example 2.2. That can be either a minor or a major version. such as default roles such as web designer. • All: Includes user memberships and role assignments. OpenText recommends that you use this setting if you want to enable the restoration of all permissions. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 109 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . you can assign it to one or more sites. The ACL for each object is migrated. depending on which scheduled task is run. The last minor versions are not archived.4. • WSS Only: Includes user memberships and role assignments such as default roles like web designer. or any custom roles that extend from the default roles. When you restore a site. 5. • Last major version: Saves only the last major version.

• Select profile: Displays all defined site profiles. Select a site profile from the Select profile list in the ribbon. 5. In Central Administration. Select the web applications or sites to which you want to assign a site profile. In the Profile Configuration area. This action can take a considerable amount of time. click Assign site profiles to sites or web applications.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration The following options are available: • Assign: Assigns the selected site profile to the marked sites. • Cleanup Orphaned: Removes orphaned profile assignments from the configuration. • Delete: Deletes an assigned site profile from the selected sites. The profile is assigned to the web applications or sites. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 110 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . • Show Assigned: Expands the web applications and sites hierarchy where profiles are assigned. 4. Click Assign. 3. 2. To assign site profiles to sites or web applications: 1.

For more information. see “ArchivingConfig. If you test a site profile.4. depending on the settings you configured when you created the profile: • Archived document libraries • Archived lists • Archived site export package • Archived subsites • Whether the site will be deleted To test a library or site profile: 1. Notes • Before you can test a library profile. 5. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 111 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . For more information. Click Test Archiving in the Manage area.xml” on page 170. 3. Application Governance & Archiving displays a list with information on how many documents from all assigned document libraries are affected by a rule in the tested profile.5 Testing a library or site profile Before assigning a document library profile or site profile to a scheduled task for automatic archiving. Application Governance & Archiving displays information about the site profile settings and information about the following items. • By default. In Central Administration. you must assign it to a document library.4. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. The test results appear in a report on a new page. click Manage profiles. Creating and managing library and site profiles for archiving 5. you can test a profile to view more information about which and how many documents will be archived when the profile is used during a scheduled task. 2. You can test both local and remote library and site profiles. 4.xml configuration file. If you test a library profile. 5. You can configure this value by editing the <ArchivingTest> element in the ArchivingConfig. see “Assigning document library profiles to document libraries” on page 100. you can click the details link to view more information about the documents or sites in the report. In the Profile Configuration area. For certain items. Select the library or site profile you want to test. each rule defined in a library profile returns only the first 100 items to be archived for each document library.

You can also test the archiving or the site profile assignment. For more information. and you can link profiles to scheduled tasks. In Central Administration.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration 5. • To create a scheduled task for the selected profile. click Delete in the Contribute area. For more information. click Test Archiving in the Manage area. To manage profiles: 1. • To view and edit the archiving rules for a library profile. see “Creating an archiving task” on page 133. such as task lists. • To edit the profile. Select a library or site profile in the list. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. or announcements. see “Creating archiving profiles” on page 22. • To test the profile. For more information about local and remote profiles. click Manage in the Scheduled Tasks area. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 112 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . For more information. Do one of the following: • To delete the profile. see “Testing a library or site profile” on page 111. Note: This option is dimmed if you selected a site profile.6 Managing library and site profiles On the Manage Profiles page. discussion boards. click Settings in the Manage area. 5. The Type column on this page indicates whether a profile is local or remote. • To view and manage scheduled tasks that were previously assigned to the selected profile. Example 5-1: Archiving all content of a site Prerequisites • A SharePoint site used to manage a project contains typical project content.4.4. 4. design documents. you can edit or delete local and remote profiles. click Archiving Rules in the Manage area.7 Best practices for site archiving The following sections provide some best practice samples of how to archive sites with specific conditions for document libraries or lists and point out the advantages and disadvantages of each sample. click Manage profiles. 3. 2. click Create in the Scheduled Tasks area. In the Profile Configuration area. see “Managing scheduled tasks” on page 132.

To archive all content of a site: 1. • The site should be deleted automatically after it was archived. such as calendars. Advantages • This is the fastest way to archive all the required information. Select Delete site after archiving. Creating and managing library and site profiles for archiving • When the project ends. • When the project ends. but exclude some lists from archiving: 1. • You can create the site profile anytime during the project´ lifecycle. 4. Select the Delete site after archiving check box. 2. Assign the site profile to sites that you want to archive. or announcements. Example 5-2: Archiving an entire site. Create a new site profile and keep the default settings for list and document library archiving. 5. Check if other site profile settings apply. • You do not need to perform manual steps to archive the site content and to delete the site from SharePoint. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 113 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Create a scheduled task. To archive an entire site. • Some lists do not need to be archived. Assign the site profile to sites that you want to archive.4. 5. 5. Check if other site profile settings apply. Create a new site profile and keep the default settings for document library archiving. Create a scheduled task. Add a list archiving condition to exclude lists with the following settings: List BaseTemplate = Calendar > Do not archive 4. discussion boards. 3. 3. all content of the site should be archived automatically. such as task lists. 2. 6. but excluding some lists from archiving Prerequisites • A SharePoint site used to manage a project contains typical project content. all content of the site should be archived automatically. design documents.

4. 2. • When the project ends. • You do not need to perform manual steps to archive the site content and to delete the site from SharePoint. 7. 9. but excluding single documents from archiving Prerequisites • A SharePoint site used to manage a project contains typical project content. Example 5-3: Archiving an entire site. all content of the site should be archived automatically. In the site profile settings. discussion boards. Create a new document library profile with rules to archive only specific documents. To archive an entire site. Create a scheduled task. Assign the site profile to sites that you want to archive. Check if other site profile settings apply. • Only lists with important information are archived. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 114 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Select the Delete site after archiving check box. 8. but exclude specific documents from the archiving process: 1. • You do not need to perform manual steps to archive the site and to delete it from SharePoint. • Only some of the documents in document libraries need to be archived. such as task lists. Create a new site profile and keep the default settings for list archiving.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration Advantages • You can create the site profile at any time during the project´s lifecycle. Advantages • You can create the site profile at any time during the project’s lifecycle. select the destination folder in Enterprise Library and create a subfolder structure as follows: $WebTitles\$WebTitle\$DocumentLibraryTitle\$Folders 3. 6. Add a library profile archiving condition that uses the created library profile as the default profile. or announcements. In the library profile settings. design documents. select the destination folder in Enterprise Library and create a subfolder structure as follows: $WebTitles 5.

Disadvantages • Setting up the profiles correctly is complex. Create a scheduled task. Advantages • You can create the site profile at any time during the project’s lifecycle. Example 5-4: Archiving a site that has documents requiring different Records Management classifications Prerequisites • A SharePoint site used to manage a project contains typical project content. In the site profile settings. Select the Delete site after archiving check box. discussion boards. • The site classification cannot be applied to all documents. 8. In the library profile settings. • When the project ends. all content of the site should be archived automatically. • You do not need to perform manual steps to archive the site and to delete it from SharePoint. • Specific documents classified differently. select the destination folder in Enterprise Library and create a subfolder structure as follows: $WebTitles 5. select the destination folder in Enterprise Library and create a subfolder structure as follows: $WebTitles\$WebTitle\$DocumentLibraryTitle\$Folders 3. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 115 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Creating and managing library and site profiles for archiving • Only important documents are archived. such as task lists. 2. or announcements. 4. Create a new document library profile with rules to archive specific documents with selected Records Management classifications. design documents. To archive a site with documents that need different Records Management classifications: 1. Check if other site profile settings apply. Assign the site profile to sites that you want to archive.4. 5. 7. Create a new site profile and keep the default settings for list archiving. 6. Add a library profile archiving condition that uses the created library profile as the default profile. 9.

Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration Disadvantages • Setting up the profiles correctly is complex. Advantages • You can archive documents in many document libraries without having to assign a library profile to each document library. add a library profile archiving condition that uses the created library profile as the default profile. 5. In the site profile settings. but there are too many document libraries to which you would have to assign library profiles. 2. settings for site archiving and interactive archiving. Create a new document library profile with rules to archive the documents. Create a scheduled task. To archive documents from multiple sites without the need to assign a profile to every document library: 1. Assign the site profile to sites from which you want to archive documents. 5. Tip: To execute custom code before or after a document or a version of a document is stored. see “ProviderConfig. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 116 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .5 Global archiving settings and content type mappings Global archiving settings cover general archiving settings.xml” on page 204 and get the OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint SDK from the OpenText Knowledge Center. you need to implement a custom provider and deploy it on your SharePoint server. 3. For more information. Create a new site profile and clear the Enable list archiving check box. settings for archiving permissions. and mapping of content types. 4. Example 5-5: Archiving documents from multiple sites without needing to assign a profile to each document library Prerequisites • Only documents should be archived.

farm administrators. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 117 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . independent of parent folder setting. In Central Administration. In the Archiving Settings and Content Type Mappings area. Note: You can also define specific settings for each site. folders. you need the “add items” permissions on the target Enterprise Library folder and the owner of this folder needs the “edit permissions” permission. 3. or sites interactively. and how SharePoint permissions are mapped to Enterprise Library permissions. click Archiving permission settings. SharePoint Permission Transfer • Transfer permissions for groups only: If enabled.5. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. only permissions of domain groups. the Edit Permissions permission is needed to create major versions. or application pool identity accounts that have implicit access to the SharePoint items cannot access the archived items. • Allow users to change the default value: Allow users to change the default setting during interactive archiving or site archiving. see “Defining archiving permission settings” on page 152. 2.1 Defining archiving permissions You can define how permissions are transferred.5. 5. Specify the following settings: Permissions for Archived Documents • Inherit from the parent folder: Use the permissions defined for the parent folder in Enterprise Library. • Use SharePoint permissions: Use the permissions defined for the SharePoint item. Site collection administrators. For Enterprise Library items supporting advanced versioning. New Enterprise Library items are created automatically with owner permissions from the target folder. Global archiving settings and content type mappings 5. To define archiving permissions: 1. not of individual users will be transferred. Notes • If you archive documents. what should happen when a user or a group is missing. • The permission transfer can only be processed with users or groups that have explicitly been granted permission to the SharePoint items.

See Contents OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 118 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . • Treat as error: Cancels archiving and displays an error message if at least one user is missing. • Ignore missing users (skip users): Archives the document or site regardless of the missing users. Permission Mapping Specify the mapping of SharePoint permissions to Enterprise Library permissions when documents are archived. see “PermissionConfig. groups. Permissions are mapped in the following way: SharePoint Permission names Enterprise Library permissions in list boxes permissions View Items Read See. Missing Users Handling Only visible if Transfer permissions for groups only is not enabled. groups. regardless of the missing groups. • Ignore missing groups (skip groups): Archives the document or site. • Treat as error: Cancels archiving and displays an error message if at least one user is missing. Missing Groups Handling Defines how domain groups missing in the Enterprise Library User Management system are treated when archiving documents or sites. • Add users to Enterprise Library User Management System: Adds the missing users to the Enterprise Library User Management System. • Ignore unresolvable users/groups/claims: Archives the document or site in spite of unmapped users. or claims. • Treat as error: Cancels archiving and displays an error message if users.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration User/Group Resolution Handling Defines how users. groups. Parameters required for the creation of missing users can be configured in the PermissionConfig. or claims are treated that cannot be resolved by the configured authentication providers or claims issuers. Defines how SharePoint users missing in the Enterprise Library User Management system are treated when archiving documents or sites. the Delete permission includes the Read and Edit permissions. Select the permissions from the list boxes. for example.xml configuration file. or claims cannot be mapped.xml” on page 198. Permissions in Enterprise Library are hierarchical.

Add Items (for folders). the permissions are mapped as follows: Minimum Enterprise Library SharePoint permissions permissions See View Items Modify Edit Items Delete Delete Items All Permissions Manage List Permission 5. Edit Attributes. 3. you can specify whether users are permitted to change the default settings when archiving a site. Modify. Global archiving settings and content type mappings SharePoint Permission names Enterprise Library permissions in list boxes permissions Edit Items Write See. To configure interactive site archiving settings: 1. Add Items (for folders). Delete. For all settings.5. See Contents. see “Archiving remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online sites and documents“ on page 215. In Central Administration. Specify the following settings: OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 119 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . users can archive complete sites from an on-premises SharePoint environment to Enterprise Library. Delete Versions Manage List Permission Admin All Permissions When the item is copied back to SharePoint and the permissions on the item have been changed. Reserve Delete Items Delete See. you can define several settings.2 Configuring interactive site archiving settings In SharePoint. In the Archiving Settings and Content Type Mappings area.5. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. See Contents. 5. Reserve. Edit Attributes. 2. you must define the archiving settings on the Archive remote site page in Central Administration. click Interactive site archiving settings. For interactive site archiving. Note: If you want to archive a remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online site. Modify. For more information.

You can define if users are allowed to either change the default setting or select specific lists and document libraries that they want to archive with the site. Enterprise Library Folder • Enterprise Library folder: Select a destination folder in Enterprise Library where the sites are archived by default. This check box is selected by default. see “Defining available functionality” on page 78. The Records Management Classification Picker opens. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 120 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Lists and Libraries You can specify if you want SharePoint lists and document libraries to be automatically archived with the site.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration Content Server Select the Content Server where the sites are archived by default. • Allow users to change the default value: Allows users to change the default setting when archiving a site. • Archive lists: Archives all lists. For an overview of the possible scenarios. Note: You must provide a Records Management classification if the Advanced Item Management option is enabled. This check box is selected by default. see also “Best practices for site archiving” on page 112. • Click Select a Records Management classification to apply a Records Management classification to the archived site. all lists and document libraries are automatically archived with a site. • Allow users to change the default value: Allows users to change the default setting when archiving a site. the Content Server can be specified each time a site is archived. For more information. If you select Any Server. • Allow users to select single lists and libraries to be archived: Allows users to select specific lists or document libraries that they want to archive. • Archive libraries: Archives all document libraries. • Allow users to change the default value: Allows users to change the default setting when archiving a site. Records Management Classification Note: This setting only appears if the Records Management functionality has been enabled. Document Versions This setting applies to documents archived separately into Enterprise Library. By default.

For more information. such as documents. The minor versions are not archived.sharepoint. you can restore the permissions when you restore a site. • Last major version: Archives only the last major version. • Most recent version: Archives the last version. When you restore a site.deployment.asp x • No: User and group information is not included. Security Specifies if you want to save the user or group permissions to the objects that are exported. • This option only enables restoring of sites that have been archived with the same SharePoint version.includesecurity.microsoft. • Archive the site export package: Allows you to additionally archive the site as a package that users can restore.2). The last minor versions are not archived.0) and the last minor versions (for example 2. even if they are newer than the last major version. Global archiving settings and content type mappings Select which versions to archive: • All major and minor versions: Archives all major and minor versions. Important The size of the site export package must not exceed 1 GB. see http://msdn. • Last major and the last minor versions: Archives both the last major version (for example.5. see “Defining content type mappings to archive local content” on page 127. • Allow users to change the default value: Allows users to change the default setting when archiving a site. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 121 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . the permissions are inherited from the site collection to which the site is imported.com/en-us/library/ microsoft. • All major versions: Archives only the major versions. Site Export Package Specifies if a site export package is created that enables the restoring of the archived site. 5. By default. no site export package is archived. 2. lists. or sites. Note: For more information about archiving metadata for document versions. Notes • You must select this option if you want to allow sites to be restored.spdeploymentsettings. It can be either a minor or a major version. Depending on the selected setting.

No user information defined in the DAP or LDAP servers is included. OpenText recommends that you use this setting if you want to enable the restoration of all permissions. Exported Versions This setting applies to SharePoint documents stored within the site export package. Additional Information Provide additional rights to the users: • Allow users to change the name and description: Allows users to change the name and the description of the archived site. That can be either a minor or a major version. • Include the last major and the last minor versions: Saves both the last major version (for example 2. The ACL for each object is migrated. The last minor versions are not archived. Also. The ACL for each object is migrated.2). • Allow users to edit properties: Allows users to edit the properties of the archived site.0) and the last minor versions (for example 2. • Allow users to change the default value: Allows users to change the default setting during archiving a site. This is the default setting. Sub Sites Specify if you want to archive the complete site tree or only the top-level site. • Include the last major version: Saves only the last major version. • Allow users to change the default value: Allows users to change the default setting when a site is archived. even if they are newer than the last major version. • Archive the complete site tree: Archives the site with all subsites. default roles such as web designer) or custom roles that extend from default roles. user information that is defined in the DAP or LDAP servers is included. or any custom roles that extend from the default roles. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 122 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . • All: Includes user memberships and role assignments (for example. • Include the most recent version: Saves the last version.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration • WSS Only: Includes user memberships and role assignments such as default roles like web designer. Select which versions to save: • Include all major and minor versions: Saves all major and minor versions.

In Central Administration. especially for big sites. The metadata is still indexed. see “Defining available functionality” on page 78. For information on how to enable the user to archive interactively. To exclude the site export file from indexing: 1.5. Therefore the cmp file is added to the [ExcludedMimeTypes] section to prevent that the performance of the indexing is impacted by site archiving. DCS will try to convert the content which is information time consuming. • Create link • Move • Copy OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 123 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . you should exclude the site export package (.type file in the config directory of the Content Server and add the following line: application/x-ot-sp-export cmp 2. Open the opentext. Open the mime. 5.ini file in the config directory of the Content Server and add the following line in the [ExcludedMimeTypes] section: application/x-ot-sp-export=TRUE Background Unless the MIME type is excluded.5. For more information about the available file actions. Specify the following settings: File Action Defines how documents are archived. 3. In the Archiving Settings and Content Type Mappings area. Interactive archiving settings can be defined independently of library profile settings. click Interactive document and folder archiving settings. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving.cmp) from indexing because the user does not make use of them as they contain binary information. Tip: You can also define specific settings for each site. For more information.3 Defining interactive document and folder archiving settings You can define how users can archive files and folders interactively. 5. see “Actions for interactive document archiving” on page 25. 2. see “Defining interactive document and folder archiving settings ” on page 155. Global archiving settings and content type mappings Note: In Content Server. To define interactive document and folder archiving settings: 1.

Selecting this check box opens a list of file actions. It is not available if you are using SharePoint Foundation 2013. For more information about the available folder actions. Select the check box for each file action that you want to allow users to select when they archive documents interactively. Note: Document set archiving is available only if you are using SharePoint Server 2013. See “Enabling incremental archiving or synced copy archiving” on page 33. • Create link • Move • Copy • Allow users to change the default value: Allows users to change the default setting available in SharePoint when they archive document sets. • Allow users to change the default value: Allows users to change the default file action. By default. Selecting this check box opens a list of folder actions. see “Actions for interactive folder archiving” on page 26. Select the check box for each action that you want to allow users to select when they archive document sets interactively. the Create link file action is selected. Selecting this check box opens a list of document set actions. • Select file actions displayed to users: Select which actions are available to users when they archive files. Document Set Action Defines how document sets are archived. the Child link file action is selected. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 124 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . By default. Select the check box for each action that you want to allow users to perform when they archive folders interactively. • Create link • Child links • Move • Copy • Allow users to change the default value: Allow users to change the default folder action.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration • Synced Copy Note: The Synced Copy file action is available only if you enabled the synced copy archiving feature. Folder Action Defines how folders are archived. • Select folder actions displayed to users: Select which actions are available to users when they archive folders.

5. • Subfolders: You can define how the folder structure will be generated in the archiving process. and click Select a Records Management Classification.5. click Select a Records Management Classification. If you change the server after having defined the root folder and the Records Management classification. • Content Type Mappings: You can map content types to Records Management classifications. If you have not specified a Content Server and a folder. Note: It is only visible if the default value for Enterprise Library Folder cannot be changed by users. • Default Records Management Classification: To define a default Records Management classification. and then click the classification. Records Management Classification Note: This setting appears only if the Records Management functionality has been enabled. and then click the classification you want to map to the content type. Content Server Specify the Content Server. the Create link file action is selected. Enterprise Library Folder • Enterprise Library folder: Select a destination folder in Enterprise Library where the files and folders are archived by default. For more information. Global archiving settings and content type mappings • Select document set actions displayed to users: Select one or more actions that will be available to users when they archive document sets. select a content type. see “Using placeholders for the folder structure” on page 159. • Allow users to change the default value: Allow users to change the default setting during interactive archiving. For more information. The default classification is assigned to all content types without mapping. the user will be able to select both the server and the folder structure. see “Actions for interactive document set archiving” on page 27. By default. /Folder or Document Set Versions Select which versions to archive: OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 125 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . these settings will be discarded. Click Add mapping. • Allow users to change the default value: Allows users to change the default setting. Note: The Records Management classification settings and the root folder selection depend on the server selected.

If you want to allow users to change the default setting. The user cannot see if the document is archived as a new document or if it is added as a new version of an existing document. Archive As New File Version Action Defines how new file versions are archived. the archiving behavior depends on the content of the target Enterprise Library folder. • Allow users to select adding of document versions: Select this check box if you want to allow users to create new Enterprise Library documents or new versions of an existing Enterprise Library document. If this option is cleared. • Last major version: Archives only the last major version. • Last major and the last minor versions: Archives both the last major version (for example. 2. even if they are newer than the last major version. The last minor versions are not archived. For more information. Activating this check box adds a new set of actions to the menu. see Archive As New File Version Action on page 126. If you clear this check box. • Create link • Move OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 126 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . a new document is created. It can be either a minor or a major version. If this option is selected. select Allow users to change the default value. • Require user confirmation: This option is only available if the user who archives a document has no permission to modify any archiving settings. see “Defining content type mappings to archive local content” on page 127.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration • All major and minor versions: Archives all major and minor versions. a new version is added to this document. Otherwise. The minor versions are not archived. If a document with the same name already exists.2). the user may check the properties of the document and cancel the archiving process if necessary before a new version is added to an existing document. • All major versions: Archives only the major versions. Note: For more information about archiving metadata for document versions.0) and the last minor versions (for example 2. • Most recent version: Archives the last version. Archive As New File Version • Enabled: Select this check box if you want to allow users to archive SharePoint documents as new Enterprise Library documents or as new versions of already existing Enterprise Library documents and if you require confirmation for saving versions. the document is archived without further user interaction.

• Conversion options only apply to a document’s latest version.5. Select the check box for each action that you want to allow users to perform when they need to change the default setting. • To map a content type to different categories on several servers. If a conversion fails. Selecting this check box opens a list of file version actions. This is the server specified in the archiving profile or in the interactive archiving settings. • Allow users to edit properties: Allow users to edit properties of the Content Server document to be created. see “Defining content type mappings to archive local content” on page 127. 5. • Allow users to change the default value: Allows users to change the default setting. 5. In this case. To make the column values available in Enterprise Library. See “Enabling incremental archiving or synced copy archiving” on page 33. • You can use SharePoint built-in fields for content mapping. Global archiving settings and content type mappings • Copy • Synced Copy Note: This file action is available only if you have enabled the synced copy archiving feature. Notes • You can map one content type to more than one Enterprise Library category on one or more servers in the following scenarios: • To map both a category with base attributes and a category with more specific attributes to one content type. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 127 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . only the mappings for that server are used where the document is actually archived. • The columns of the content type must be mapped to the attributes of the mapped Enterprise Library category.5. For more information about archiving metadata for document versions. Application Governance & Archiving replaces invalid historic metadata with the latest valid metadata to archive the historic metadata to Enterprise Library. Each content type has a set of columns.4 Defining content type mappings to archive local content SharePoint uses content types to identify and describe documents. the following must be mapped: • The SharePoint content type must be mapped to at least one Enterprise Library category. Additional Information • Allow users to change the name and description: Allow users to change the name and the description of a document.

Text MultiLine Multiple lines of text Text MultiLine OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 128 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . To map the content type to a category. • You can customize the matching property types by manually editing the corresponding configuration file. click Add category mapping. see “PropertyTypesConfig. To define a mapping. 4. and their mapping to an Enterprise Library category if already defined. 2. you can also add SharePoint built-in fields to make them available for mapping and define the conversion options. To define mapping of content types: 1. The Content Type Mapping page opens. only those content types that are available globally. • In general. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. For information on defining specific mappings for sites. The Content Type Mappings page contains a list of all content types globally defined in SharePoint. They are displayed with their parent. you would rather map the more specific content types defined for sites to Enterprise Library categories. In the Category Picker dialog box. select a server from the list of available servers and the category that you want to assign to the content type. The new category is added. 6. 5. click the content type. can be mapped.xml (on-premises SharePoint server)” on page 199. select an Enterprise Library property.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration • In the global content type mappings. their source. Notes • If you use the default configuration as provided by a new installation of Application Governance & Archiving. In this file. Content types defined for sites can only be mapped in the site settings. see “Defining content type mappings” on page 161. Only the Enterprise Library attributes of matching types are displayed. the data types of SharePoint columns and of mapped Enterprise Library properties must match according to the following table. In Central Administration. For more information. In the table of columns. 3. for each column you want to map. The content types are grouped. SharePoint data types Enterprise Library data types Single line of text Text. click Content type mappings. In the Archiving Settings and Content Type Mappings area.

Global archiving settings and content type mappings SharePoint data types Enterprise Library data types Choice Text Popup. Date Popup. all conversion options that you have specified for the current content type mapping are removed. Clear this check box to change the conversion options according to your own needs. you must clear the Inherit conversion options check box. To modify the conversion options. Text MultiLine Number Integer (if it contains an integer value. A list of possible conversion options and default values with detailed descriptions is available in “Appendix – Content type mapping conversion options“ on page 297. Text Currency Integer or Text Date and Time Date or Text Yes/No Flag Person or group User. Text MultiLine Managed metadata Text. Text MultiLine Lookup Text. Text. For more information. When selected. multiple conversion option lists are available for the selectable Enterprise Library properties. see “PropertyTypesConfig. you can edit the PropertyTypesConfig. you can do the following: • Change the conversion options for the selected property. decimal places can be cut off). If you do not select a conversion option. the conversion options are inherited from the default settings in the system.5. Depending on the settings specified by the SharePoint administrator. Text MultiLine After you select the Enterprise Library properties.xml file in Central Administration. click Add Category Mapping again. • Add further category mappings for the same or other servers. Text MultiLine All other types Text. The conversion options define how the values are converted when SharePoint content types and Enterprise Library properties are mapped. To remove a category mapping. Integer Popup. click the cross in the category header. To do this. To change the conversion options. Note: When you select the Inherit conversion options check box again. the default conversion options apply. All conversion options display a tooltip with detailed information. This check box is selected by default.xml (on-premises SharePoint server)” on page 199. Notes • Field types with multiple values OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 129 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Text. 5.

Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration In SharePoint. • Allow Fill-in Choices option When you define a column with a Choice field type. Optionally. the values saved in Enterprise Library are not validated against the available choice values and are restored without errors. and Lookup field types may contain multiple values. In this case. or click Cancel changes and return to content type list to cancel. Click Save changes and return to content type list to save. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 130 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Managed Metadata. During restoration. each of the values appears as one line in the MultiLine text box. for example. Person or group. you need to specify the Allow ‘Fill-in’ choices setting when editing the site column of the respective Choice type. you must specify the available choice values. the values saved in Enterprise Library are validated against the available Choice values when you restore documents. contains five values. you can enable a user to enter additional values to the already available Choice values when editing item properties. • The field type is mapped to a Text MultiLine property: During archiving. In this case. If the field contains more values than the maximum allowed number of attributes. the extra values are ignored. Then. A SharePoint Lookup field. you may see the following results: • The field type is mapped to a Text property: During archiving. each of the converted values is saved into one value box of the property. the converted values are concatenated to one single string with a line break as a delimiter and are saved into the Enterprise Library property. This field type is mapped to an Enterprise Library property that allows a maximum of three saved values. only the valid values are restored. If you allow this option by clicking Yes. columns with Choice. During restoration. Depending on what Enterprise Library properties these field types are mapped to. the string saved in Enterprise Library is split into an array of values based on the semicolon delimiter. Then. 7. the converted values are concatenated to one single string with a semicolon as a delimiter and are saved into the Enterprise Library property. Thus. All values that may be invalid are considered as additional values that have been entered by the user. To allow this option. the string saved in Enterprise Library is split into an array of values based on the line break delimiter. each of the values is resolved based on the field definition and is saved to the field. • The field type is mapped to a Multi Value property: During archiving. in Enterprise Library. If you do not allow this option. the values saved in the attribute are retrieved as an array. each of the values in the array is resolved based on the field definition and is saved to the field. Then each of the values is resolved based on the field definition and is saved to the field. During restoring. only the first three converted values are saved to Enterprise Library.

the metadata of each SharePoint document version is mapped and then applied to the corresponding Enterprise Library document version by using the current Content Type mapping. where the metadata is incomplete or invalid for specific versions. • If a SharePoint field value cannot be converted to an Enterprise Library value. Content Type mapping is also applicable at the document version level. the document archiving fails with an error in the archiving report. 5. If it is not valid. the latest metadata will be used. Important If you do not use secure network communication. • Scheduled (automatic) archiving: If the latest SharePoint version has invalid data. it replaces invalid values in previous versions. the latest metadata is applied. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 131 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . and whether reporting is enabled. a warning message will appear. Each SharePoint document version can have its own set of metadata. such as user names. Metadata is validated by UI. the archiving process fails. Depending on whether previous SharePoint document versions will be archived. the Content Type Mapping of the latest version based on the version options will be applied to all versions. passwords. Application Governance & Archiving validates each field and tries to fix invalid values in any previous version before the metadata is sent to Content Server.6. The following describes how to handle these situations for interactive archiving and for scheduled archiving: 1.6. for example: • If a required property is missing a value. 5.1 Defining scheduled task settings You can specify the SharePoint server used for automatic archiving. Scheduled operations These settings are only valid for this site and sites that are based on it. The metadata of the latest version is validated and archived to the Enterprise Library. • Interactive archiving: The page is populated with metadata from the latest version. Therefore scenarios might occur. When the metadata has passed validation. If a document has versions with different content types. and other information will not be encrypted. Note: The conversion options of the Content Type mapping are ignored for historic metadata. the data that you enter here. 2.6 Scheduled operations 5. If you use an unencrypted connection.

For single-server installations. In the Scheduled Operations area. click Scheduled task settings. passwords. SharePoint Server Name Enter the name of the SharePoint server where the scheduled tasks for automatic archiving are running. the data that you enter here. In Central Administration. If you use an unencrypted connection. the SharePoint server name is the default value of this field. Specify the following settings: Scheduled Task Administrator Enter the name and password of the user that will be used as administrator of scheduled tasks on the SharePoint server. 2. 5. • Synced copy task: Generates reports of synced copy tasks. Important You must configure the account with the required permissions. such as user names. 3.2 Managing scheduled tasks Enterprise Library Integration uses Windows scheduled tasks to start automatic archiving and link cleanup tasks. • Permission synchronization task: Generates reports of permission synchronization tasks. Note: Before creating a scheduled task. Note: This option is available only if you enabled the synced copy archiving feature.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration To define scheduled task settings: 1.6. Reporting Selecting the following tasks generates reports of the respective task in XML format. you must disable the Do not allow storage of passwords and credentials for network authentication local OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 132 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . see “Adding required permissions ” on page 52. • Archiving task: Generates reports of archiving tasks. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. For more information. and other information will not be encrypted. see “Displaying archiving and synced copy updating reports” on page 137. You can access the reports from the OpenText Application Governance & Archiving page in the Central Administration. Important If you do not use secure network communication. a warning message will appear. For more information.

Note: For the Copy archiving action.2.microsoft. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. use only the option Once so that documents are not archived multiple times. refer to the Microsoft documentation (http://technet. • Weekly: Recurrence number. Schedule Task Specify how often the task will be executed: • Daily: Recurrence number.10). or the second Sunday of each month. see “Creating local or remote document library profiles” on page 95. For more information. every third day. In Central Administration. and day of the week. • Details: Recurrence time. for example. Notes • You must create an archiving profile before you can create a scheduled task. Tip: You can also define the schedule for tasks in Windows Task Administrator. 5. for example every second Monday. 5. • Documents archived to Enterprise Library are always created using the identity under which the task is running.aspx). To create an archiving task: 1. • Stop when running longer than: Hours after which a running archiving process is stopped. For more information. which provides additional scheduling options.com/en-us/library/ jj852185(v=ws. 4. Scheduled operations security policy on the SharePoint server. for example the first day of each month. click Manage scheduled tasks.6.6. In the Scheduled Operations area. Click New and select Archiving Task.1 Creating an archiving task Archiving tasks are used to execute library profiles or site profiles at a defined time or at specific intervals. • Monthly: Day of the month. 2. Specify the following settings: Profile Select the Library profile or Site profile that you want to schedule. 3. • Once: The task starts on the defined start date and time. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 133 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .

In the Scheduled Operations area. In Central Administration. Specify the URL of the site collection.2. 3.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration Start Parameters Specify the date. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. Weekly or monthly tasks start the next applicable date after the start date. Important This function deletes all links pointing to archived documents that reside on Content Servers currently not available in the Content Server settings page. • Web Application: Applies to the web application selected in the drop- down list. For more information. Note: The Link Cleanup task will not delete link documents for archived documents that are not yet purged in Enterprise Library. • Site Collection: Applies to a site collection. Click New and select Link Cleanup Task. Make sure that this is not caused by a wrong OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 134 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . 4.2 Creating a link cleanup task Link cleanup tasks are used to delete link documents for which no archived document exists in Enterprise Library. hour and minutes when the scheduled task will be executed. Important You must first configure the account with the required permissions. click Manage scheduled tasks. To create a link cleanup task: 1.6. 5. see “Adding required permissions ” on page 52. Specify the following settings: Source Select where the link cleanup task should be applied: • Farm: Applies to all SharePoint servers of the farm. 2. Unconfigured Content Servers Specifies if links to archived documents residing on Content Servers that are no longer connected to SharePoint should be deleted. User Identity Enter the name and the password of a user with the permissions to run scheduled tasks.

2. In the Scheduled Operations area. Schedule Task Specify how often the job will be executed: • Daily: Recurrence number. For more information. 3. Tip: You can also define the schedule for tasks in Windows Task Administrator.2. For more information. the first day of each month or the second Sunday of each month. • Monthly: Day of the month. see “Adding required permissions ” on page 52. for example. 5. In Central Administration.6. Note: This task is required only if you enabled the synced copy archiving feature.3 Creating a synced copy task Synced copy tasks are used to check documents archived with the Synced Copy action for newly created versions and archive these versions.6. • Stop when running longer than: Hours after which a running link cleanup timer job is stopped. Important You must configure the account with the required permissions. every third day. hour and minutes when the scheduled task will be executed. • Details: Recurrence time. every second Monday. • Once: The task starts on the defined start date and time. User Identity Enter the name and the password of a user with the permissions to run scheduled tasks. Start Parameters Specify the date. for example. click Manage scheduled tasks. 5. • Weekly: Recurrence number and day of the week. Scheduled operations configuration of server unique IDs or alias ID. Weekly or monthly tasks start the next applicable date after the start date. Click New and select Synced Copy Task. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 135 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . To create a synced copy task: 1. for example. see “Defining Content Server settings” on page 65. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. which provides additional scheduling options.

Schedule Task Specify how often the job will be executed: • Daily: Recurrence number (for example. hour and minutes when the scheduled task will be executed. see “Adding required permissions ” on page 52. For more information. Specify the following settings: Task Scope Select where the synced copy task should be applied: • Farm: Applies to all SharePoint servers of the farm. Start Parameters Specify the date. every second Monday). • Stop when running longer than: Hours after which a running synced copy timer job is stopped.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration 4. • Once: The task starts on the defined start date and time. which provides additional scheduling options. Important You must configure the account with the required permissions. the first day of each month or the second Sunday of each month). • Web Application: Applies to the web application selected in the drop- down list. Tip: You can also define the schedule for tasks in Windows Task Administrator. • Weekly: Recurrence number. Weekly or monthly tasks start the next applicable date after the start date. and day of the week (for example. • Details: Recurrence time. User Identity Enter the name and the password of a user with the permissions to run scheduled tasks. • Monthly: Day of the month (for example. every third day). OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 136 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .

Edit the task details as needed and then click OK. click Manage scheduled tasks. You have the following options in the ribbon: • View Report: Opens a dialog box with details about the report. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 137 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . 3. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. Select the task you want to edit and click Manage. For more information.4 Editing and deleting a scheduled task To edit a scheduled task: 1. A report is created for each day the archiving process runs. If the automatic archiving processes any files (successfully or not). When prompted to delete the task. Note: Reporting for synced copy updating is always activated. 4. In Central Administration. click Manage scheduled tasks. the exact start and stop time of the archiving. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving.3 Displaying archiving and synced copy updating reports If you enable reporting for archiving or synced copy tasks. 2. • View Raw Report: Allows you to save the report and view it with an external XML editor. Application Governance & Archiving creates reports on the results of these tasks. • Delete: Deletes the selected report. To delete a scheduled task: 1. 4. click Profile archiving reports. 5.6. To display scheduled archiving reports: 1. see “Defining scheduled task settings” on page 131. Scheduled operations 5.2. In the Scheduled Operations area. click Delete. In the Scheduled Operations area. Click the name of the report. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. 3. In Central Administration.6. If more than one automatic archiving process occurs a day. A report contains information about the results. 3. the number of archived documents and sites. and the number of documents and sites that could not be archived. the report contains a section for each process. the list of these files is displayed.6. In Central Administration. 2. Select the task you want to delete and click Delete. In the Scheduled Operations area. 5. 2.

see “Defining scheduled task settings” on page 131. 3. the report displays which permission changes have been processed at a specific time. For more information. • View Raw Report: Allows you to save the report and view it with an external XML editor. For unsuccessful changes. click Synced copy updating reports. In the Scheduled Operations area. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 138 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . the report displays an error description. 3. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. In Central Administration. click Permission synchronization reports. The name is usually the date the report has been created. Whenever there have been changes. The raw report is a report in XML format that logs each time the Permission Synchronizer job runs.6. If more than one synchronization task is run per day. For successful changes.4 Displaying permission synchronization reports If you enable reporting for permission synchronization tasks. whether they have been successful or not. the report displays a URL to open the properties page of the synchronized item. You have the following options in the ribbon: • View Report: Opens a dialog box with details about the report. 5. The standard report contains information about the exact time when a Permission Synchronizer job has run to synchronize changes. Application Governance & Archiving creates reports on the results of these tasks. You have the following options in the ribbon: • View Report: Opens a dialog box with details about the report. • Delete: Deletes the selected report. 2. In Central Administration. • View Raw Report: Allows you to save the report and view it with an external XML editor. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration To display scheduled synced copy updating reports: 1. the report contains a section for each time changes are synchronized. A report is created for each day the permission synchronization task is run. The report displays all attempts to apply permission changes. In the Scheduled Operations area. 2. Click the name of the report. To display permission synchronization reports: 1. • Delete: Deletes the selected report. Click the name of the report.

Application Governance & Archiving allows you to create item-related views for different Enterprise Library Web Parts. Columns 5. Enterprise You can create. Otherwise. OpenText recommends defining all custom columns in Content Server only. View management 5. Tip: If you use Content Server as of Release 10. To apply different views. see “Specifying Enterprise Library columns” on page 141. For more information about custom columns in Application Governance & Archiving.1 Defining Enterprise Library Web Part views The default Enterprise Library Web Part already displays the main required information of Enterprise Library items. or delete existing views that are based on a specific Content Server object type for the Enterprise Library Web Part in Central Administration. however. If you already defined custom columns in Application Governance & Archiving. you can still use them but you may encounter duplicate columns unless custom columns have been disabled in Available Functionality. emails in an email folder. You can. The Content Server can also provide custom columns which may vary for every container you open. If you delete this custom-defined view later. For this purpose. you can set it as the default. This feature can be turned off on the Available Functionality page. Custom columns you defined on Content Server automatically appear appended to the columns configured in the view. require specific views that display different information based on the type of documents that you want to make available to the users.7. You can create. The same applies to single sites provided that you activate the OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts site collection feature.7 View management The View Management section lets you define different views for the Enterprise Library Web Part and add additional columns that you want to display in the views. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 139 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . a view that is associated with the used object type will be selected as the default view. 5. Enterprise This area shows the columns that are provided for display in an Enterprise Library Library Web Part view. or delete existing views for the Enterprise Library Web Part Library Web in Central Administration. modify. The same applies to single sites provided that you Part activate the OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts site collection feature. the system will check if a predefined system view is associated with the used object type and then reset the system view as default view. Note: A view defines a fixed set of columns which will always be displayed when the particular container is opened in the Enterprise Library Web Part. modify.7. You can define new columns. for example. If you want to use a custom-defined view as the default view. you can either use one of the default views that Application Governance & Archiving provides by default or create a new view that is based on one of the default views.

Click Settings and select Site settings. From the Object Type list. Click Discard to inherit the parent settings. In the View Management area. select the columns and click Remove Columns. You can do the following: • Select the columns that you want to add to the view and click Confirm Selection. click Add Columns. Do one of the following to open the LIST VIEW page: • In Central Administration. select one of the predefined views. click Enterprise Library Web Part View Management. and then click OK. specify the columns that you want to display in the view. Click New: Create View From. • Click New Column to create a custom column. On the LIST VIEW page. use the provided Name or specify a new name and enter a Description. 2. select an object type that you want to use for the view. Views are provided for the following areas: • E-mail Folder • Other Containers To open the LIST VIEW page: 1. • To add more columns. To create a new view: 1. • To remove existing columns. For more information about creating custom columns. 5. In the View Columns area. • In SharePoint. Change the position of the columns as required. The Add Columns dialog box opens. see “Specifying Enterprise Library columns” on page 141.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration Discard You can define the views at every site and override the global settings. 2. In the View Definition area. 6. 4. click Enterprise Library Web Part. 3. In the OpenText Application Governance & Archiving area. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 140 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. Click the LIST VIEW tab. open a site.

In the Manage area. and then click OK. you can either select displayable columns that are provided by default or define custom Enterprise Library columns that you map to Content Server category attributes. Columns of the following areas are provided: • Borrowed Physical Items • Common • Dynamic View OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 141 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . 2. Click Manage: Edit View. On the LIST VIEW page. On the LIST VIEW page. and then click OK. To delete views: Note: You can only delete views that are not locked. The view is marked as default in the list. 5. Each of these columns is part of a group to which the columns relate. • Once selected for a specified view. click Delete View. 5. In the Manage area. select the view that you want to set as default. the Toggle Default button will reset this setting. you can choose from the list of columns that are provided by default. Change the respective entries or selections in the areas as required. 2. 3. based on their purpose. 2. object types cannot be changed.2 Specifying Enterprise Library columns To define specific Enterprise Library Web Part views. Note: If the view has already been set as the default.7. Available columns When you add columns to an Enterprise Library Web Part view. 1. The selected view will no longer be used as the default view. select one or more views that you want to delete. select the view that you want to change. On the LIST VIEW page. View management To edit a view: Notes • You can only change views that are not locked. click Toggle Default. To set a view as the default view: 1.7. 1.

Notes • Columns that are marked with an asterisk (*) can only be used with Content Server version 10. you can define custom columns. Make sure that the columns are assigned to groups that are appropriate for the type of column.0 and later. Default columns also show a lock symbol that indicates that the columns are protected and therefore cannot be edited. The columns receive their unique IDs through the category attribute that is mapped to the column. optional description. The HTML renderers can be selected from a list. • Ensure that you have the latest module versions installed to have all default columns available. display name. Custom columns If you want to add columns that are different from the available columns.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration • Email • Physical Objects • Records Management • Security Clearance • Workflow Every column within these areas has a unique ID. All defined custom columns can be edited and deleted. • If attributes are deleted from Content Server categories. and a specific HTML renderer. but only if you have multiple servers. the following rules apply: • Columns can be mapped to one or multiple attributes. optional description. display name. You can either use the predefined groups or create new groups. Note: Content Server system attributes are unavailable for mapping. Every column that you define must consist of a unique ID. To open the Column page: • Do one of the following: OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 142 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . the columns that are mapped to the attributes display no values in the Enterprise Library Web Part view. but are rendered differently in the user interface. • You can create columns that point to the same Content Server attribute. • Every custom-defined column must be assigned to a group of columns. When you define custom columns. and a specific data type.

3. In the View Management area. View management • In Central Administration. On the Column page. Click Delete Column. Click Add Columns. specify the group to which you want to add the column. click New Column.7. Change the respective entries or selections in the areas as required. To remove the attributes. Select an HTML renderer from the list. and then click OK. select the column that you want to delete. 2. click Enterprise Library Columns. You can either select an already existing group from the Existing group list or define a new group. 5. To delete a column: 1. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 143 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . In the Name and Description area. • In SharePoint. click Remove . Click OK. All locked columns cannot be edited. click Edit Column. In the Content Server Attributes area. click Enterprise Library Web Part View Management. 2. Notes • Deleting columns also removes their reference from the Enterprise Library Web Part views. 2. The display name will be displayed in the Web Part list view as the column header. click Settings and select Site settings. The available renderers depend on the types of attributes that you assign with the selected category. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. Select an entry in the list and select Edit View. On the Column page. In the Group area. Note: You can only edit columns that you have created. On the Column page. 6. You can assign more than one attribute if you use multiple servers. To define a new column: 1. click Add Attributes to select the Content Server and the category whose attributes you want to assign to the column. In the OpenText Application Governance & Archiving area. The column is displayed within the specified group. enter a display name and a description for the column in the respective boxes. To edit a column: 1. 5. 4.

you must activate the relevant features in the SharePoint Site Collection Administration. Locate the following site collection features: • OpenText Integration for Document and Picture Libraries This feature enables enhanced Enterprise Library Integration features for the document and picture libraries. In SharePoint. Click Activate next to the respective feature.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration • You can only delete columns that you have created. click OK. Note: You need to be logged on to SharePoint as site collection administrator. 3. • OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts This feature adds Enterprise Library Integration Web Parts to the Web Part gallery. click Site collection features. Locked columns cannot be deleted. In the Site Collection Administration area.8 Activating Integration for Document and Picture Libraries and Enterprise Library Web Parts To use Enterprise Library Integration in a SharePoint site collection. Click Settings and select Site settings. To activate Integration for Document and Picture Libraries and Enterprise Library Web Parts: 1. 5. • OpenText Enterprise Library Search Web Parts This feature adds Enterprise Library Integration search Web Parts into the Web Part gallery. Note: This feature is available only if SharePoint Services for Extended ECM is installed. 5. 4. 2. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 144 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . open the root site collection site. 3. When prompted. • OpenText Extended ECM Web Parts This feature adds Enterprise Library Integration for Extended ECM Web Parts to the Web Part gallery.

click Manage web applications. you must activate the feature for the SharePoint web application. To enable permission synchronization. In the Web Applications area. 5. • Permission Synchronization reports are available. see “Defining archiving permission settings” on page 152. click Application Management. Notes • Make sure that the OpenText Integration for Document and Picture Libraries feature is enabled. 5. • The permission transfer can only be processed with users or groups that have explicitly been granted permission to the SharePoint items. Synced Copy. the permissions in Enterprise Library are updated whenever the SharePoint permissions on a link are changed. 2. 5. or Incremental file action. or application pool identity accounts that have implicit access to the SharePoint items cannot access the archived items. Click Activate for the OpenText Permission Synchronization feature. Site collection administrators. In the list. For more information. Activating permission synchronization 5.1 Synchronizing permissions for a document library You can force permission synchronization once for a specific document library. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 145 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Also. Click Manage Features.9 Activating permission synchronization You can enable synchronization of the permissions that a user has on archived documents in Enterprise Library with permissions that the user has on links to these documents in a SharePoint web application. 4. see “Activating Integration for Document and Picture Libraries and Enterprise Library Web Parts” on page 144. In Central Administration. and then click OK. farm administrators. For more information. For more information about this setting. the Use SharePoint Permissions setting must be set at the time of archiving. • Note that the synchronizing of permissions can be time consuming.9. Notes • The documents must be archived using the Create Link. To activate permission synchronization: 1. if they have been enabled. see “Displaying permission synchronization reports” on page 138.9. If permission synchronization is enabled. 3. select a web application entry.

3. 2. To display permission synchronization help. All items in the document library that can have permissions synchronized will be processed. Set this parameter to use the timer job instead. -Library Set the URL of a document library to process. Click the LIBRARY tab. You can also run this process as a cmdlet within the SharePoint Management Shell (Management Shell). 4. Use this parameter to exclude child items that do not inherit permissions from this parent item. click Close. If the timer job is not configured or is not available. the configured timer job can be used to perform the actual permission synchronization with Enterprise Library. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 146 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . examples. and further technical information. -Web Set the URL of a website to process. open a document library. Use the IgnoreUniqueItems parameter to skip child items with unique permissions. The following parameters are available: -IgnoreUniqueItems Optional: By default. 5. or -Folder will be processed. After complete synchronization. permission synchronization will be performed within the Management Shell cmdlet. as this process may take some time to complete. -Library. 6. get-help Sync-OTPermissions -examples Displays examples. In the Settings area. Confirm that you want to start permission synchronization. all items that can be synchronized from the item that is identified by -Web. click Library Settings. In SharePoint. All items in the website that can have permissions synchronized will be processed. -UseTimerJob Optional: If the permission synchronization feature is activated for a web application. By default. Click Synchronize permissions with the Enterprise Library. Use the IgnoreUniqueItems parameter to skip child items with unique permissions. the synchronization will be performed within the Management Shell. get-help Sync-OTPermissions -full Displays available parameters.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration To synchronize the permissions once for a document library: 1. you can enter the following: get-help Sync-OTPermissions -detailed Displays available parameters and examples.

For more information about these parameters. To enable site restoring as site collection: 1. Tip: Archiving SharePoint Sites as Records only works when the Content Server object types for archived sites and document libraries are added to the Content Server managed objects in this section. see “Configuring Records Management settings” on page 93. ErrorAction. 5. you need to activate the feature for the SharePoint web application. In Central Administration. 5. Debug. the IIS application pool which hosts the web application where the site is running must be set to an account with write access to the Windows temp directory. This cmdlet also supports the following common parameters: Verbose. 4. 3.10 Activating site archiving To enable SharePoint site administrators to archive sites. and then click OK. In the Web Applications area. enter get-help about_commonparameters. you must enable the Self-Service Site Creation option. All items within the folder that can have permissions synchronized will be processed. For more information. In Central Administration. 3. click Configure self-service site creation. 2. Permissions In addition to standard SharePoint requirements. For the Site Collections option. click Application Management. click Application Management. In the Site Collections area. select On. ErrorVariable.10. Click Activate for the OpenText Site Archiving feature. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 147 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . 5. Click Manage Features. 2. and then click OK. To activate site archiving: 1. WarningAction. To enable site administrators to restore a site with the Create a new site collection option. Select a web application entry. Activating site archiving -Folder Set the URL of a folder to process. WarningVariable. Use the IgnoreUniqueItems parameter to skip child items with unique permissions. OutBuffer. and OutVariable. click Manage web applications.

11. To access site configuration: 1. open a site or a site collection root site.11 Defining site settings For each site in SharePoint. Note: The links are available if you activated at least one of the Application Governance & Archiving features. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 148 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .1 Defining available functionality for a SharePoint site The available functionality settings define which options are available to users. 3. 2. click the respective link. Notes • You must be signed in to SharePoint as a site administrator. • Depending on global configuration settings (Content Server features or web application features). you can configure specific settings in Application Governance & Archiving that override the global settings defined in Central Administration. You can specify the following settings for sites: • Available functionality • Archiving permissions settings • Interactive document and folder archiving settings • Content type mapping • Enterprise Library Web Part View Management Note: You must be signed in to SharePoint as a site administrator. In the OpenText Application Governance & Archiving area. In SharePoint. 5. not all options may be available for site configuration. Click Settings and select Site settings. click Discard to inherit the parent settings. Enterprise Library Advanced Search Web Parts or OpenText Integration for Document and Picture Libraries. • To define available functionality globally. you need write access to the site because site-specific configuration data are stored in a hidden document library of the site. for example.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration 5. Discard If you have defined archiving permission settings for each site and have overridden the global settings. see “Defining available functionality” on page 78. Permissions To configure Enterprise Library Integration. Enterprise Library Web Parts.

This option is available only if you upgraded your OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 149 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .Administrator's Guide (LLESRCS-AGD). By default. For more information. This option is available only if Notifications Configured is selected on the Advanced Content Server Settings page. 4. If this option is cleared. and then click OK: Available features • Records Management: Allows users to add a Records Management classification to an Enterprise Library item or place an Enterprise Library item on hold. In SharePoint. the Incremental file action is not displayed on the Library Profile Configuration page. Defining site settings To define available functionality: 1. This option is available only if Security Clearance is selected on the Advanced Content Server Settings page and the OpenText Security Clearance module is installed. and document sets interactively” on page 24. open the site for which you want to define available functionality. the Synced Copy file action is not displayed on the Library Profile Configuration page in Central Administration or the Save Document page in SharePoint. • Set alerts for Enterprise Library items: Allows users to select items for which they want to receive messages if changes are made to these items. • Synced copy archiving: Select this check box to make the Synced Copy file action available to administrators or users when they archive documents automatically or interactively. 3. see “Archiving local documents.11. If this option is cleared. • Security Clearance: Allows users to apply supplemental markings that are non-hierarchical security codes and used to define access rights on objects in Content Server. folders. In the OpenText Application Governance & Archiving area. this option is cleared. For more information about the Security Clearance module. 5. • Interactive archiving to the Enterprise Library: Allows users to archive SharePoint documents and folders interactively to Enterprise Library. click Available functionality. • Incremental archiving: Select this check box to make the Incremental file action available on the Library Profile Configuration page when an administrator creates a library profile to archive documents automatically. see Open Text Security Clearance . see “Enabling incremental archiving or synced copy archiving” on page 33. Select the check boxes for all the features that will be available to site users. 2. Click Settings and select Site settings. For more information. This option is available only if Records Management is selected on the Advanced Content Server Settings page and the OpenText Records Management module is installed.

users will not be able to edit certain document types (for example. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 150 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . The Edit All Documents Using OpenText Office Editor option is available only if the OpenText Office Editor Web Editing option is selected on the Advanced Content Server Settings page and OpenText Office Editor 10. see “Using OpenText Office Editor with Application Governance & Archiving” on page 55. • Edit All Documents Using OpenText Office Editor: Allows users to edit Enterprise Library documents using OpenText Office Editor 10. Create/edit options • Edit attributes: Allows users to edit properties of items from Enterprise Library.3. Note: If Edit All Documents Using OpenText Office Editor is not selected. This option allows users to edit all document types. the document is opened in its default application for editing. If the document is not associated with an application. This option available only if Extended ECM is selected on the Advanced Content Server Settings page and you installed the SharePoint Services for Extended ECM package in your environment. For more information. • Edit documents: Allows users to edit documents archived in Enterprise Library. documents with non-standard file extensions such as . • Use Content Server page with document template support: Allows users to create documents based on Content Server templates.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration Application Governance & Archiving version and either specified Yes on the Use Synced Copy page or ran the Set-SyncCopy-Use cmdlet during the upgrade process. see “Enabling incremental archiving or synced copy archiving” on page 33. Before using this feature.1 is installed in your Content Server environment. you must enable the Web Editing feature in Content Server. • Create documents: Allows users to create documents in Enterprise Library.1 functionality. For more information. Display options • Show hidden items: Allows users to view documents that are marked as “hidden” in Enterprise Library.h).3. the user is prompted to select the application in which to edit the document. regardless of their file extension. you must enable the Web Editing feature in Content Server. When a user selects the edit option for an Enterprise Library document in the Enterprise Library Web Part menu or the document context menu in SharePoint. Before using this feature.

go to System Administration - Administer Event Auditing . select this check box.com/en-us/sharepoint-help/ configure-audit-settings-for-a-site-collection-HA102866204. and select the check boxes starting with SharePoint for the audit events you are interested in. The SharePoint Properties category contains the following properties: • All Properties: String containing all properties of the original SharePoint document • Content Type ID: Unique identifier of the original SharePoint content type ID • Original location: URL of the document library where the original document was stored in SharePoint OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 151 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . all existing SharePoint audit entries are transferred to the Enterprise Library audit.aspx).microsoft. • Disable custom columns: Select this check box to prevent the custom Content Server columns from being displayed in the Enterprise Library Web Part. Archive/restore options • Delete Enterprise Library document when link is replaced: Deletes a document from Enterprise Library when it is restored to SharePoint. they will be displayed automatically. 5. The columns from the configured view are displayed at the beginning and the custom Content Server columns are added at the end. If you want to see only the columns configured in the view. If custom columns are configured to appear in a particular folder. Defining site settings • Display links to the Enterprise Library: Allows users to access Enterprise Library directly and view document properties in Enterprise Library. see Microsoft Office online help topic “Configure audit settings for a site collection” ( http://office.Set Auditing interests. • Update Enterprise Library audit with SharePoint events: When a SharePoint document is archived. you must complete the following server configuration steps: • Enable SharePoint audit events for the site collection(s) from where you will archive documents. the Open in Enterprise Library menu item appears on the ribbon in SharePoint. • Use technical category: Creates the SharePoint Properties category when a document is archived. When this option is selected.11. • Set up Content Server to accept the SharePoint audit events. an additional input control is displayed by which a folder can also be specified using its nickname. For more information. • Display nicknames in the Enterprise Library folder picker: In the Enterprise Library folder picker. In Content Server Administration. To transfer SharePoint audit events to the archived Content Server document.

In the Archiving Settings and Content Type Mappings area. For more information. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. click Archiving permission settings. you can force a permission synchronization. In the OpenText Application Governance & Archivingarea. If required. • In SharePoint. Specify the following settings: OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 152 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration • Convert links to Content Server shortcuts when performing site archiving without using library profile: Converts links of previously archived documents to Content Server shortcuts if you archive a site with its document libraries using an archiving method that does not involve a library profile (for example. 2. click Discard to inherit the parent settings.2 Defining archiving permission settings You can define how permissions are transferred. Discard If you have defined archiving permission settings for every site and have overridden the global settings. how missing users and groups are treated. if automatic synchronization is enabled and how SharePoint permissions are mapped to Enterprise Library permissions. click Archiving permission settings.11. Records Management options • Use the SharePoint creation date as the Record Date: Select this check box to set the actual creation date of a SharePoint item as the record date when it is archived with a Records Management classification. This option is available only if you enable it in the FeaturesConfig. To define archiving permission settings: 1.xml configuration file. Do one of the following to open the Archiving permission settings page: • In Central Administration. Note: You must be signed in to SharePoint as a site administrator. see “Preventing Application Governance & Archiving from converting links to Content Server shortcuts” on page 173. 5. see “Permission synchronization” on page 36. This option is available only if the Records Management option is selected on the Advanced Content Server Settings page and the OpenText Records Management module is installed. interactive archiving or automatic archiving using a site profile that does not use a library profile). For more information. You can also define that permissions of links in SharePoint and the corresponding documents archived with the Create Link action are synchronized automatically. Click Settings and select Site settings. open a site.

not of individual users will be transferred. or application pool identity accounts that have implicit access to the SharePoint items cannot access the archived items. groups. farm administrators. • Treat as error: Cancels archiving and displays an error message if users. or sites interactively. Defines how SharePoint users missing in the Enterprise Library User Management system are treated when archiving documents or sites. User/Group Resolution Handling Defines how users. • Use SharePoint permissions: Use the permissions defined for the SharePoint item. • Treat as error: Cancels archiving and displays an error message if at least one user is missing. or claims. Notes • If you archive documents.11. • Allow users to change the default value: Allow users to change the default setting during interactive archiving or site archiving. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 153 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . folders. • The permission transfer can only be processed with users or groups that have explicitly been granted permission to the SharePoint items. • Ignore unresolvable users/groups/claims: Archives the document or site in spite of unmapped users. or claims are treated that cannot be resolved by the configured authentication providers or claims issuers. Missing Users Handling Only visible if Transfer permissions for groups only is not enabled. Site collection administrators. or claims cannot be mapped. independent of parent folder setting. groups. the Edit Permissions permission is needed to create major versions. Defining site settings Permissions for Archived Documents • Inherit from the parent folder: Use the permissions defined for the parent folder in Enterprise Library. SharePoint Permission Transfer • Transfer permissions for groups only: If enabled. you need the “add items” permissions on the target Enterprise Library folder and the owner of this folder needs the “edit permissions” permission. only permissions of domain groups. New Enterprise Library items are created automatically with owner permissions from the target folder. groups. 5. For Enterprise Library items supporting advanced versioning.

Parameters required for the creation of missing users can be configured in the PermissionConfig.xml configuration file. Add Items (for folders). Reserve. see “PermissionConfig. Reserve Delete Items Delete See. See Contents Edit Items Write See. regardless of the missing groups. Permission Mapping Specify the mapping of SharePoint permissions to Enterprise Library permissions when documents are archived. Select the permissions from the list boxes. Permissions are mapped in the following way: SharePoint Permission names Enterprise Library permissions in list boxes permissions View Items Read See. • Add users to Enterprise Library User Management System: Adds the missing users to the Enterprise Library User Management System. for example. Modify. Modify. See Contents.xml” on page 198. Delete Versions Manage List Permission Admin All Permissions When the item is copied back to SharePoint and the permissions on the item have been changed. Edit Attributes. the permissions are mapped as follows: Minimum Enterprise Library SharePoint permissions permissions See View Items Modify Edit Items OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 154 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Missing Groups Handling Defines how domain groups missing in the Enterprise Library User Management system are treated when archiving documents or sites. See Contents. Delete. the Delete permission includes the Read and Edit permissions. Add Items (for folders). • Ignore missing groups (skip groups): Archives the document or site. Permissions in Enterprise Library are hierarchical. Edit Attributes.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration • Ignore missing users (skip users): Archives the document or site regardless of the missing users. • Treat as error: Cancels archiving and displays an error message if at least one user is missing.

3 Defining interactive document and folder archiving settings You can define which archiving settings are available to users in SharePoint when they archive files and folders interactively. If a new version of the document is saved in SharePoint. Specify the following settings: File Action Defines how documents are archived. 4. 3. see “Actions for interactive document archiving” on page 25. Sign in to SharePoint as a site administrator. To define interactive document and folder archiving settings: 1. • Move: Archives the document and deletes it in SharePoint. Click Discard to inherit the parent settings.11. • Synced Copy: Archives the document in Enterprise Library and leaves the original in SharePoint. The document is only accessible through the Advanced Search. Click Settings and select Site settings. • Copy: Archives the document and leaves the original in SharePoint. Users still can access the document in SharePoint through the created link and find it using the Advanced Search. and you can define which archiving options will be selected in SharePoint by default. 5. Open the site for which you want to define interactive archiving settings. Defining site settings Minimum Enterprise Library SharePoint permissions permissions Delete Delete Items All Permissions Manage List Permission 5. In the OpenText Application Governance & Archiving area. the corresponding Enterprise Library document is automatically updated.11. Note: If you enabled the incremental archiving feature. Discard You can define the interactive archiving settings for every site and override the global settings. You can define interactive archiving settings for each site and also override the global settings. 5. creates a link in SharePoint and deletes the document in SharePoint. the Synced Copy file action is not available for interactive archiving. 2. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 155 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . click Interactive document and folder archiving settings. • Create link: Archives the document.

Users still can access the folder in SharePoint through the created link and find it using the Advanced Search. The folder and its content are only accessible through the Advanced Search. • Move: Specifies that the Move action will be selected by default. • Copy: Specifies that the Copy action will be selected by default. • Move: Archives the folder and deletes it in SharePoint. Selecting this check box opens a list of folder actions. Folder Action Defines how folders are archived. Users can still browse the folders in SharePoint. Select the check box for each action that you want to allow users to perform when they need to change the default setting. and which options will be available in SharePoint for archiving document sets interactively. Select the check box for each action that you want to allow users to perform when they need to change the default setting. creates a link to the folder in SharePoint and deletes the folder in SharePoint. • Allow users to change the default value: Allows users to change the default setting. Selecting this check box opens a list of file actions. Select the check box for each action that you want to allow users to perform when they need to change the default setting. replaces them with links to their archived counterparts in Enterprise Library. The folder hierarchy in SharePoint stays unchanged. • Create link: Archives the folder and all documents and subfolders. • Allow users to change the default value: Allows users to change the default archiving setting. Document Set Action Specifies which action will be selected by default on the Save Document Set page in SharePoint. see “Actions for interactive folder archiving” on page 26. • Select file actions displayed to users: Select which actions are available to users when they archive files. • Select folder actions displayed to users: Select which actions are available to users when they archive folders.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration • Allow users to change the default value: Allows users to change the default setting. • Copy: Archives the folder with all files and subfolders and leaves the original in SharePoint. access the documents through the created links and find them using the Advanced Search. Selecting this check box opens a list of document set actions. • Child links: Archives all files from the folder and its subfolders. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 156 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . • Create link: Specifies that the Create link action will be selected by default.

• Most recent version: Archives the last version. For more information. The user will be able to set or change both the server and the folder. • Default Records Management Classification: To define a default Records Management classification. Content Server Specify the Content Server installation. you must define the folder structure. Records Management Classification • Content Type Mappings: You can map content types to Records Management classifications. • Allow users to change the default value: Allows users to change the default archiving setting. Note: The Records Management classification settings and the root folder selection depend on the selected server. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 157 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . select a content type. • Subfolders: You can define how the folder structure is generated during the archiving process. Enterprise Library Folder • Enterprise Library Folder: Select a destination folder in Enterprise Library where the files and folders are archived by default. The minor versions are not archived.11. see “Using placeholders for the folder structure” on page 159. 5. If you do not allow users to change the value. If you change the server after defining the root folder and the Records Management classification. Note: This setting is only visible if the default value for Enterprise Library Folder cannot be changed by users. Click Add mapping. and click Select a Records Management Classification and click the classification you want to map to the content type. Folder or Document Set Versions Select which versions to archive: • All major and minor versions: Archives all major and minor versions. • Allow users to change the default value: Allows users to change the default setting. these settings are discarded. Defining site settings • Select document set actions displayed to users: Select the action(s) available to users when they archive document sets. The default classification is assigned to all content types without mapping. It can be either a minor or a major version. click Select a Records Management Classification and click the classification. • All major versions: Archives only the major versions.

a new document is created. If this option is cleared. The document is only accessible through the Advanced Search. creates a link in SharePoint and deletes the document in SharePoint. • Move: Archives the document and deletes it in SharePoint. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 158 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . see “Actions for interactive document archiving” on page 25.2). the document is archived without further user interaction.0) and the last minor versions (for example 2. the archiving behavior depends on the content of the target Enterprise Library folder: If a document with the same name already exists. The user cannot see if the document is archived as a new document or if it is added as a new version of an existing document. If you clear this check box. the corresponding Enterprise Library document is automatically updated. Note: If you enabled the incremental archiving feature. Users still can access the document in SharePoint through the created link and find it using the Advanced Search. 2. • Last major and the last minor versions: Archives both the last major version (for example. the user may check the properties of the document and cancel the archiving process if necessary as soon as a new version is added to an existing document.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration • Last major version: Archives only the last major version. If this option is selected. The last minor versions are not archived. • Copy: Archives the document and leaves the original in SharePoint. even if they are newer than the last major version. • Create link: Archives the document. • Require user confirmation: This option is available only if the user who archives a document does not have permissions to modify archiving settings. If a new version of the document is saved in SharePoint. • Synced Copy: Archives the document in Enterprise Library and leaves the original in SharePoint. Archive As New File Version Action Defines how new file versions are archived. • Allow users to select adding of document versions: Select this check box if you want to allow users to create new Enterprise Library documents or new versions of an existing Enterprise Library document. a new version is added to this document. Archive As New File Version • Enabled: Select this check box if you want to allow users to archive SharePoint documents as new Enterprise Library documents or as new versions of already existing Enterprise Library documents and if you require confirmation for saving versions. Otherwise. the Synced Copy file action is not available for interactive archiving.

• $DocumentLibraryName: Is replaced by the URL name of the SharePoint document library the document is stored in.11. You can use placeholders for the creation of folders. 5.11. • $WebName: Is replaced by the URL name of the SharePoint site the document is stored in. The following placeholders are available and refer to the folder structure where the document is located in SharePoint: Placeholders • $WebApplicationName: Is replaced by the name of the SharePoint web application the document is stored in. Defining site settings • Allow users to change the default value: Allows users to change the default setting. • $WebNames: Is replaced by all site URL names of the SharePoint site hierarchy the document is stored in. • $WebTitle: Is replaced by the title of the SharePoint site the document is stored in. For more information. • $DocumentLibraryTitle: Is replaced by the title of the SharePoint document library the document is stored in. Select the check box for each action that you want to allow users to perform when they need to change the default setting. Additional Information You can allow users to change the name and description of a document or folder. • $PortalName: Is replaced by the name of the SharePoint portal the document is stored in. and to edit properties. • $WebTitles: Is replaced by all site titles of the SharePoint site hierarchy the document is stored in. Tip: You can use “\” or “/” to separate hierarchical levels. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 159 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Selecting this check box opens a list of file version actions.4 Using placeholders for the folder structure You can define how the folder structure will be generated in the archiving process. see also: • “Defining interactive document and folder archiving settings” on page 123. • Allow users to change the name and description • Allow users to edit attributes 5. • “Defining interactive document and folder archiving settings ” on page 155 Note: The placeholders are case-sensitive.

• $Unique: A unique folder is created.doc Example 5-7: Folder structure including a SharePoint column • Folder where the document is stored in SharePoint and value of the column Customer: SharePoint portal Web Value of File SharePoint column Customer MyPortal MyWeb MyCustomer1 document.doc • Definition of the custom folder structure: $PortalName\$WebName\$Folders\MyFolder • Resulting structure in Content Server: MyPortal\MyWeb\folderA\folderB\MyFolder\document. • $Property("<SharePoint Column>"): Is replaced by the value for the SharePoint column defined in brackets. The created folder hierarchy does not include the document library as root folder.doc • Definition of the custom folder structure: $PortalName\$WebName\$Property("Customer") • Resulting structure in Content Server: MyPortal\MyWeb\MyCustomer1\document. Example 5-6: Folder structure • Folder where the document is stored in SharePoint: SharePoint portal Web Folder structure File MyPortal MyWeb folderA\folderB document.doc OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 160 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . • $FolderName: Is replaced by the name of the SharePoint folder the document is stored in. The folder name is a GUID.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration • $Folders: Is replaced by all SharePoint folder names within the hierarchical path.

the document archiving fails with an error in the archiving report. This is the server specified in the archiving profile or in the interactive archiving settings. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 161 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . If it is not valid. Content Type mapping is also applicable at the document version level. Note: The conversion options of the Content Type mapping are ignored for historic metadata. When the metadata has passed validation. Metadata is validated by UI. • Interactive archiving: The page is populated with metadata from the latest version. Each SharePoint document version can have its own set of metadata. 2. the most recent metadata value is applied. for example: • If a required property is missing a value.5 Defining content type mappings SharePoint uses content types to identify and describe documents. Depending on whether previous SharePoint document versions will be archived. where the metadata is incomplete or invalid for specific versions. • If a SharePoint field value cannot be converted to an Enterprise Library value. You define content types within the scope of SharePoint sites or SharePoint site collections. When categories from multiple servers are mapped to a content type. Therefore scenarios might occur. Every content type has a set of columns. it replaces invalid values in previous versions.11. • Scheduled (automatic) archiving: If the latest SharePoint version has invalid data. If a document has versions with different content types. Defining site settings 5. The following describes how to handle these situations for interactive archiving and for scheduled archiving: 1. the Content Type Mapping of the latest version based on the version options will be applied to all versions. the archiving fails. The metadata of the latest version is validated and archived in Enterprise Library. Application Governance & Archiving validates each field and tries to fix invalid values in any previous version before the metadata is sent to Content Server. only the mappings for that server are used where the document is actually archived. • Map the columns of the content type to the attributes of the mapped Enterprise Library category.11. To make the column values available in Enterprise Library: • Map the SharePoint content type to an Enterprise Library category. the most recent metadata value is used. 5. the metadata of each SharePoint document version is mapped and then applied to the corresponding Enterprise Library document version by using the current Content Type mapping.

In SharePoint. They are displayed with their parent. 3. The new category is added.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration 3. Click a content type. Discard You can define the content type mapping for each site and override the global settings. Application Governance & Archiving applies it to the Enterprise Library document version. 7. 5. Application Governance & Archiving uses the latest metadata and tries to apply the full set of latest metadata to the Content Server document version. • You can customize the matching property types by manually editing the corresponding configuration file. Notes • If you use the default configuration as provided by a new installation of Application Governance & Archiving. click Content type mappings. select a server from the list of available servers and the category that you want to assign to the content type. Note: You must be signed in to SharePoint as a site administrator. click Add category mapping. the archiving of the document did not succeed. The content types are grouped. If it fails again. Click Settings and select Site settings. 2. After the metadata of the document version is validated and fixed. In the OpenText Application Governance & Archiving area. In the table of columns. For more information. You receive an error message. see “PropertyTypesConfig. The Content Type Mapping page opens. Click Discard to inherit the parent settings. In the Category Picker dialog box. If Application Governance & Archiving does not archive a document successfully during a scheduled archiving process. the data types of SharePoint columns and of mapped Enterprise Library properties must match according to the following table.xml (on-premises SharePoint server)” OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 162 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . 6. open the site for which you want to define content type mappings. To define content type mappings: 1. select an Enterprise Library property. This page contains a list of all content types defined in SharePoint. their source and their mapping to a Content Server category if already defined. 4. for each column you want to map. The error has to be fixed before the interactive archiving can continue. If this fails. To map the content type to a category. it writes an error message to the archiving report and continues to archive the subsequent documents.

Text MultiLine Number Integer (if it contains an integer value. 5. you can do the following: • Change the conversion options for the selected property. Text MultiLine Lookup Text. All conversion options display a tooltip with detailed information. Date Popup. Text Currency Integer or Text Date and Time Date or Text Yes/No Flag Person or group User. Text. The conversion options define how the values are converted when SharePoint content types and Enterprise Library properties are mapped. For more information. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 163 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Text MultiLine Multiple lines of text Text MultiLine Choice Text Popup. Only the Enterprise Library attributes of matching types are displayed. multiple conversion option lists are available for the selectable Enterprise Library properties. Note: When you select the Inherit conversion options check box again. In this file.11. Text MultiLine All other types Text. you must clear the Inherit conversion options check box. Defining site settings on page 199. you can also add SharePoint built-in fields to make them available for mapping and define the conversion options. When selected. you can edit the PropertyTypesConfig.xml file in Central Administration. Text MultiLine After you select the Enterprise Library properties. decimal places can be cut off). Clear this check box to change the conversion options according to your own needs.xml (on-premises SharePoint server)” on page 199. Depending on the settings specified by the SharePoint administrator. Text. all conversion options that you have specified for the current content type mapping are removed. This check box is selected by default. To change the conversion options. Text MultiLine Managed metadata Text. see “PropertyTypesConfig. Integer Popup. If you do not select a conversion option. A list of possible conversion options and default values with detailed descriptions is available in “Appendix – Content type mapping conversion options“ on page 297. SharePoint data types Enterprise Library data types Single line of text Text. the default conversion options apply. the conversion options are inherited from the default settings in the system. To modify the conversion options.

click Add Category Mapping again. • The field type is mapped to a Text MultiLine property: During archiving. Then. the values saved in Enterprise Library are not validated against the available choice values and are restored without errors. A SharePoint Lookup field. If you allow this option by clicking Yes. Depending on what Enterprise Library properties these field types are mapped to. Notes • Field types with multiple values In SharePoint. click the cross in the category header. Then each of the values is resolved based on the field definition and is saved to the field. Person or group. • Allow Fill-in Choices option When you define a column with a Choice field type. only the first three converted values are saved to Enterprise Library. you need to specify the Allow ‘Fill-in’ choices setting when editing the site column of the respective Choice type. All values that may be invalid are considered as additional values that have been entered by the user. the extra values are ignored. To do this. the converted values are concatenated to one single string with a line break as a delimiter and are saved into the Enterprise Library property. • The field type is mapped to a Multi Value property: During archiving. for example. the values saved in the attribute are retrieved as an array. To allow this option. you must specify the available choice values. In this case. This field type is mapped to an Enterprise Library property that allows a maximum of three saved values. contains five values. in Enterprise Library. each of the converted values is saved into one value box of the property. each of the values is resolved based on the field definition and is saved to the field. Optionally. During restoring. To remove a category mapping. the converted values are concatenated to one single string with a semicolon as a delimiter and are saved into the Enterprise Library property. Thus. During restoration.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration • Add further category mappings for the same or other servers. Managed Metadata. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 164 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . the string saved in Enterprise Library is split into an array of values based on the semicolon delimiter. you may see the following results: • The field type is mapped to a Text property: During archiving. Then. each of the values appears as one line in the MultiLine text box. you can enable a user to enter additional values to the already available Choice values when editing item properties. If the field contains more values than the maximum allowed number of attributes. columns with Choice. the string saved in Enterprise Library is split into an array of values based on the line break delimiter. and Lookup field types may contain multiple values. each of the values in the array is resolved based on the field definition and is saved to the field. During restoration.

6 Defining Enterprise Library Web Part views The default Enterprise Library Web Part already displays the main required information of Enterprise Library items. Click Save changes and return to content type list to save. see “Specifying Enterprise Library columns” on page 141. you can set it as the default. the values saved in Enterprise Library are validated against the available Choice values when you restore documents. for example. If you want to use a custom-defined view as the default view. The Content Server can also provide custom columns which may vary for every container you open. In this case. This feature can be turned off on the Available Functionality page.11.11. however. Click Discard to inherit the parent settings. 5. To apply different views. If you already defined custom columns in Application Governance & Archiving. 5. or delete existing views that are based on a specific Content Server object type for the Enterprise Library Web Part in Central Administration. For more information about custom columns in Application Governance & Archiving. Otherwise. You can. Views are provided for the following areas: OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 165 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . require specific views that display different information based on the type of documents that you want to make available to the users. 8. emails in an email folder. Custom columns you defined on Content Server automatically appear appended to the columns configured in the view. modify. the system will check if a predefined system view is associated with the used object type and then reset the system view as default view. If you delete this custom-defined view later. Tip: If you use Content Server as of Release 10. Defining site settings If you do not allow this option. Note: A view defines a fixed set of columns which will always be displayed when the particular container is opened in the Enterprise Library Web Part. Application Governance & Archiving allows you to create item-related views for different Enterprise Library Web Parts. only the valid values are restored. Discard You can define the views at every site and override the global settings. You can create. OpenText recommends defining all custom columns in Content Server only. a view that is associated with the used object type will be selected as the default view. or click Cancel changes and return to content type list to cancel. you can either use one of the default views that Application Governance & Archiving provides by default or create a new view that is based on one of the default views. These settings are only valid for this site and sites that are based on it. The same applies to single sites provided that you activate the OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts site collection feature. you can still use them but you may encounter duplicate columns unless custom columns have been disabled in Available Functionality. For this purpose.

4. In the View Management area. Change the position of the columns as required. select one of the predefined views. 3. • Once selected for a specified view. click Enterprise Library Web Part. From the Object Type list. 2. • Click New Column to create a custom column. For more information about creating custom columns. In the View Columns area. and then click OK. Do one of the following to open the LIST VIEW page: • In Central Administration. In the View Definition area. You can do the following: • Select the columns that you want to add to the view and click Confirm Selection. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 166 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . use the provided Name or specify a new name and enter a Description. On the LIST VIEW page.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration • E-mail Folder • Other Containers To open the LIST VIEW page: 1. To edit a view: Notes • You can only change views that are not locked. Click Settings and select Site settings. To create a new view: 1. • In SharePoint. select an object type that you want to use for the view. Click New: Create View From. select the columns and click Remove Columns. 6. Click the LIST VIEW tab. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. click Add Columns. click Enterprise Library Web Part View Management. 2. see “Specifying Enterprise Library columns” on page 141. object types cannot be changed. • To add more columns. 5. The Add Columns dialog box opens. open a site. specify the columns that you want to display in the view. In the OpenText Application Governance & Archiving area. • To remove existing columns.

2. View. the Toggle Default button will reset this setting. In the OpenText Application Governance & Archiving area. The selected view will no longer be used as the default view. To delete views: Note: You can only delete views that are not locked. Note: If the view has already been set as the default. Defining site settings 1. On the LIST VIEW page. To manage configuration files: 1. To set a view as the default view: 1. Change the respective entries or selections in the areas as required. select one or more views that you want to delete. open a site. If you want to configure multiple sites in one step.11. On the LIST VIEW page. for example. Available functionality. The view is marked as default in the list. In SharePoint. 5. select the view that you want to change. and upload them again. 4. you can download the configuration files. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 167 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .7 Managing configuration files Note: The link Configuration files is available only if you change the configuration settings for the site collection in the OpenText Application Governance & Archiving area of the site settings. In the Manage area. select the view that you want to set as default. 2. In the Manage area. Click Manage: Edit View. 5.11. click Toggle Default. click Delete View. and then click OK. 2. and then click OK. 3. 3. 1. Click Settings and select Site settings. click Configuration files. edit them manually. 2. On the LIST VIEW page. or copy the configuration files. edit.

To discard the site configuration: 1. and ProviderConfig. click Settings and select Site contents. all configuration changes to this site and all changes inherited from this site to other sites will be deleted. 5. Click Settings and select Site settings. you must manually edit the respective XML file. On the Site Contents page.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration 5. click Opentext. Click Discard.12 Defining advanced settings in XML configuration files Enterprise Library Integration saves all its configuration information in XML files that are stored in SharePoint. 4.xml.11.xml. • The Livelink subfolder contains another Configuration folder that contains all other relevant files.xml files. Important Make sure that you specify the correct information and that you do not alter the structure or syntax of the XML file. This folder contains the following subfolders: • The Configuration subfolder contains the FilterConfig. However. LogConfig. In Central Administration. Note: The Remote folder is available if the SharePoint Online Support feature is installed. If you want to change them. In the OpenText Application Governance & Archiving area. 2.8 Discarding the site configuration Caution When you discard the site configuration. a few advanced settings may have been set during installation. Note: The link to the site configuration is available only if you previously changed the configuration settings. You can find the files in Central Administration. open a site. 2. To edit configuration files: 1. PermissionConfig. click Discard site configuration. 3. For more information about the configuration files in OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 168 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . In SharePoint. You can access almost all settings through the user interface.xml. Open the SharePoint folder. 3.

For this reason. Defining advanced settings in XML configuration files the Remote folder. see the OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint SDK documentation. For more information about transferring configuration files to a different SharePoint environment.2 Updates to configuration files when installing a patch or upgrade In some cases.1 Transferring configuration files to a different SharePoint environment Application Governance & Archiving stores all configuration information centrally in XML files that are located in a SharePoint document library called Opentext in Central Administration. existing elements are also updated. After installing the patch or upgrade. In most cases. you can copy configuration files between different SharePoint systems (for example. 5. edit it locally. If you do not have an editing application (for example SharePoint Designer) installed. and upload a new version of the file. the configuration files are updated when you install a new Application Governance & Archiving patch or upgrade. However. During the upgrade process. 5. However. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 169 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . some configuration files may include information that is specific to a SharePoint server or Enterprise Library system.12. in some cases. In this scenario. you must edit the configuration files to reapply the settings that you previously defined. and click Edit. Therefore.12. Open the context menu for the file that you want to edit. 5. new elements are added to the configuration files when you install a new patch or upgrade. Application Governance & Archiving attempts to preserve the existing configuration settings.12. you can copy configuration files from a SharePoint test system to a production system to simplify the deployment of the product). see “Defining advanced configuration settings for remote site archiving features“ on page 253. 4. any configuration changes that you previously made to the elements will be overwritten. you can download the file. the configuration files must not be copied between different systems unless you have edited the files to include the server-specific information of the new system.

a file called file. see “Creating local or remote document library profiles” on page 95. along with the existing document.txt would be renamed file(1). <MaxFolders> maximum number of folders. <MaxDocuments> maximum number of documents within a folder.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration 5. This file contains the archiving configuration. The default value is 400. <ExcludedFileTypes> Defines a list of file types which are excluded from scheduled archiving. <PerformanceCountersEnabled> Defines if performance counters will be used when running scheduled archiving jobs. The number is increased by 1 for each subsequent instance of the document with the same name. <TechnicalCategory> Defines the name of the SharePoint Properties category that is created when archiving documents. You can specify any positive integer. The new document is archived in the destination Enterprise Library folder with the new name.xml file is located in the SharePoint > Livelink > Configuration folder in the Opentext document library.xml The ArchivingConfig. • Error: An error message is displayed during the archiving process if a document has the same name as an existing document. you can use the following elements: <TechnicalStructure> Maximum number of folders and documents in a Content Server structure created during archiving with the Technical option. <DocumentNameConflictOption> Specifies the action that occurs if you archive documents automatically and attempt to archive a document that has the same name as an existing document in the destination Enterprise Library folder.12. The configuration that is used for a specific list or document library is selected OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 170 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . <SiteArchivingSettings> Contains configuration for the Interactive Site Archiving Settings page. or -1 to specify that an unlimited number of folders or documents can be created. <ListArchivingConfigurations> Contains configuration for specific list or document library archiving scenarios. The new document is not archived and the existing document remains in its original location. Edit these settings only through the GUI. In addition to the settings available in the GUI. and the names of all properties that this category contains. For example. You can specify the following values: • Resolve (default): A number is added to the file name of the archived document if it has the same name as an existing document.3 ArchivingConfig.txt.

OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 171 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . By default. see “Testing a library or site profile” on page 111.12. A specific summary sheet displays a flat view of the discussion threads. the following are excluded: • Hidden lists and document libraries • Catalogs • Lists that contain no items • Document libraries that contain no archivable documents • Slide libraries • Status lists <ArchivingTest> Specifies the maximum number of items that are returned by each library profile rule. By default. Attachments to messages are excluded. • Summary sheets and attachments that are archived from lists. <ListsExcludedFromArchiving> Contains conditions that exclude specific lists or document libraries from archiving. this value is 100. By default.xml file: • <Context Name="InteractiveSiteArchiving" Actions="MoveAction. • <Context Name="InteractiveFolderArchiving" Actions="LinkAction. when you test a library profile. see “Actions for interactive folder archiving” on page 26. For more information. Each <Context> element specifies archiving actions for a different archiving method. The following criteria are provided by default: • Files and folders that are archived from document libraries. • Summary sheets and attachments that are attached to entire topics in discussion boards. the following elements and attributes are defined in the ArchivingConfig. For more information. <ArchivingCheckedOutDocuments> Specifies which archiving actions allows you to archive documents that are checked out in SharePoint.MoveAction"/>: Specifies that the Create Link and Move actions allow checked out documents to be archived when you archive folders interactively in SharePoint. see “Archiving local sites interactively” on page 29. The Name attribute specifies the archiving method and the Actions attribute specifies the archiving actions that allow you to archive checked out documents when you use the specified archiving method.CopyAction"/>: Specifies that the Move and Copy actions allow checked out documents to be archived when you archive sites interactively in SharePoint. 5. For more information. Defining advanced settings in XML configuration files when the criteria that are provided with the specific configuration are checked. for each document library.

xml file is located in the SharePoint > Livelink > Configuration folder in the Opentext document library. see “Actions for profile-based archiving of document sets” on page 20. By default.12.MoveAction"/>: Specifies that the Create Link and Move actions allow checked out documents to be archived when you archive document sets interactively in SharePoint. see “Actions for interactive document set archiving” on page 27.5 FeaturesConfig.xml The FeaturesConfig. No changes are necessary. • You want to enable the synced copy archiving functionality. This file contains the content types mapping information. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 172 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .xml The ContentTypeMappingConfig.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration • <Context Name="InteractiveDocumentSetArchiving" Actions="LinkAction. See “Preventing Application Governance & Archiving from converting links to Content Server shortcuts” on page 173.4 ContentTypeMappingConfig. This file contains the settings for the available functionality. • <Context Name="AutomaticDocumentSetArchiving" Actions="LinkAction. For more information. Manual changes are required only in the following scenarios: • You do not want links of archived documents to be converted to Content Server shortcuts.12. You can optionally edit the attributes of the <Context> element if you want to specify different archiving actions for an archiving method.xml file is located in the SharePoint > Livelink > Configuration folder in the Opentext document library. each <Context> element contains all of the attribute values that are permitted. For more information. 5.MoveAction"/>: Specifies that the Create Link and Move actions allow checked out documents to be archived when you archive documents automatically using a library profile. See “Enabling incremental archiving or synced copy archiving” on page 33. For more information. see “File actions for profile-based archiving of documents” on page 18. • <Context Name="AutomaticSiteArchiving" Actions="MoveAction"/>: Specifies that the Move action allows checked out documents to be archived when you archive sites automatically using a site profile. 5.

5. When a site is archived. By default.12. interactive archiving or automatic archiving using a site profile that does not use a library profile). click Settings and select Site contents.ArchiveRestoreOptions" Global="true" Visible="false" Name="$Resources:llbase. the Livelink subfolder. e. Defining advanced settings in XML configuration files 5. When the site is archived. c.1 Preventing Application Governance & Archiving from converting links to Content Server shortcuts By default. In Central Administration.ArchiveRestoreOptions" Global="true" Visible="true" Name="$Resources:llbase.ConvertLinkToShortcut" ID="ConvertLinkToShortcut"/> f.Features. the links of the previously archived documents are available as Content Server shortcuts that point to the archived documents. clear the Convert links to Content Server shortcuts when performing site archiving OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 173 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . 2. on the Available Functionality page. To prevent Application Governance & Archiving from converting links of archived documents to Content Server shortcuts: 1. Do the following to display the Convert links to Content Server shortcuts when performing site archiving without using library profile option on the Available Functionality page in Central Administration.Features.5. Save your changes and upload a new version of the configuration file to the document library. d. search for the following line: <Feature Enabled="true" Group="$Resources:llbase.ConvertLinkToShortcut" ID="ConvertLinkToShortcut"/> g.12. Open the Opentext document library.Features. b. the links of documents that you previously archived using the Create Link file action are not stored with the archived site in Enterprise Library.xml configuration file in a text editor. In the file. you can optionally configure Application Governance & Archiving to avoid converting document links to Content Server shortcuts. Change the value of the Visible attribute to true: <Feature Enabled="true" Group="$Resources:llbase. a. If you do not want to store Content Server shortcuts with a site. if you archive a site with its document libraries using an archiving method that does not involve a library profile (for example. Download and open the FeaturesConfig.Features. In Central Administration. any links of documents that you previously archived using the Create Link file action are converted to Content Server shortcuts during the archiving process. this option is hidden. Browse to the SharePoint folder. and then the Configuration subfolder.

xml The InteractiveTransferConfig. Its value equals {name} for all object types that are not documents.12. In addition to the settings available in the GUI. This file contains the Content Server configuration. which are replaced with the respective values: {filename} Original file name of the last version of the document. This configuration file is needed when the Enterprise Library Integration ISAPI filter is enabled for a web application. By editing the <FilterUrlFormat> entry of this file you can specify to which URL shortcut archived documents are redirected. The following value is provided by default: <ProtocolHandlerDocumentRedirectionUrl>{livelinkvdir}/ Inspection. see “Defining available functionality” on page 78. 5. {fullname} Name of the document.xml The FilterConfig.7 InteractiveTransferConfig. 5.xml file is located in the SharePoint > Livelink > Configuration folder in the Opentext document library. you can use the following elements: Elements that are defined for each server: <ProtocolHandlerDocumentRedirectionUrl> Defines the URL that will be used when a user clicks an Enterprise Library document in search results that are retrieved by the SharePoint search through Enterprise Library as content source.6 FilterConfig.12.xml file is located in the SharePoint > Livelink > Configuration folder in the Opentext document library.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration without using library profile option. For more information.xml The LivelinkConfig. This is the name of the file that was uploaded from the source file system. which is {name} with the original file name extension.xml file is located in the SharePoint > Configuration folder in the Opentext document library. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 174 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . It is empty for object types that are not documents.aspx/{fullname}? Volume={volumeid}&Node={nodeid}&Server={livelinkserver}</ ProtocolHandlerDocumentRedirectionUrl> The URL can contain the following placeholders. see also {filename}.8 LivelinkConfig. No manual changes necessary. This file contains the interactive archiving configuration. 5.12.

<ProtocolHandlerFolderRedirectionUrl> Defines the URL that will be used when a user clicks an Enterprise Library folder in search results that are retrieved by the SharePoint search through Enterprise Library as content source. {livelinkvdir} URL to the virtual directory on the SharePoint server where the Content Server integration files are located.12. This timeout value should be increased if large files regularly fail to be downloaded because of network errors. <MaximumConcurrentConnections> Defines the maximums number of concurrent connections to be established for LAPI calls to Enterprise Library.docx. clicking the folder will display its properties instead of its content. will be opened in Microsoft Word. {volumeid} Volume ID of the object. Example: If you customize the default value by replacing DocumentLibrary with Inspection. <SendAndReceiveTimeout> Specifies the maximum time period to wait for the acknowledgement about sending or receiving data on an established connection. clicking the link will open the referenced document in the application that is assigned to the document’s file name extension. A document with the file extension . {siteurl} URL of the SharePoint website that was configured as an access point for the indexed documents. {name} Name of the object. The value is specified in seconds. Defining advanced settings in XML configuration files {livelinkserver} Unique name of the Content Server where the object is stored. 5. The default link value will open a page with the properties of the document. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 175 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . The default configuration value is zero which means operation system defaults are used. {nodeid} Node ID of the object.aspx? Volume={volumeid}&Node={nodeid}&Server={livelinkserver}</ ProtocolHandlerFolderRedirectionUrl> The URL can contain the same placeholders as the <ProtocolHandlerDocumentRedirectionUrl> element. The default value is {siteurl}/ _layouts/Livelink. The following value is provided by default: <ProtocolHandlerFolderRedirectionUrl>{livelinkvdir}/ DocumentLibrary. for example. Example: If you customize the default value by replacing Inspection with Retrieve.

EditableType.nextURL={so urceurl}" MimeType="application/msword" /> <EditableType Extension="docx" DisplayName="$Resources:llbase .nextURL={sourceurl}" If you want all editable types to be edited using WebDAV.nodeid={nodeid}&amp.nodeid={nodeid}&amp.NewDocumentPage.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration <MinimumTimeSpanToNextOperationForConnectionRetry> Defines the time in seconds to wait before attempting to connect.webdavedit&amp.MSWord" FunctionUrl="func=webdav . you can replace the <EditableTypes> element with the following content. <EditableTypes> <EditableType Extension="doc" DisplayName="$Resources:llbase. you can use WebDAV to edit documents.MSWord" FunctionUrl="func=webdav.openxmlformats- officedocument.EditableType. Before you replace this element. Content Server is used to edit the documents.LivelinkConfig. LivelinkConfig. Independent of what kind of editing you choose.webdavedit&amp. To use WebDAV.nextURL={s ourceurl}" MimeType="application/vnd.wordprocessingml.LivelinkConfig.macroEnabled. ensure that the elements listed below cover all editable MIME types that are currently configured in your <EditableTypes> element.v iewType=1&amp. webdavedit&amp.Mi crosoftWord" FunctionUrl="func=Edit.viewType=1&amp.document" /> <EditableType Extension="docm" DisplayName="$Resources:llbase .ms- word. For each editable type in the <EditableTypes> element you must change the FunctionUrl attribute to the following: FunctionUrl="func=webdav.document. you must change the URL commands that are used to edit documents. Each entry has the following form: <EditableType Extension="doc" DisplayName="$Resources:lllayouts.12" /> OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 176 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .webdavedit&amp.nodeid={nodeid}&amp.EditableType.nextURL={s ourceurl}" MimeType="application/vnd.viewType=1&amp. You can remove entries from the EditableTypes section.DocumentType.nodeid={nodeid}&amp.Edit&nodeid={nodeid}&viewType=1&nextUrl={s ourceurl}" MimeType="application/msword" /> Using OpenText WebDAV to edit documents If you have configured WebDAV on Content Server.viewType=1&amp. Elements that are defined globally: <EditableTypes> This section defines the MIME types of Content Server documents that you can edit through the Enterprise Library Web Part or by clicking the Edit command of links to archived documents. all types available in Content Server are listed.MSWord" FunctionUrl="func=webdav . Currently.

EditableType.MSExcel" FunctionUrl="func=webda v.LivelinkConfig.nodeid={nodeid}&amp. 5. LivelinkConfig.nodeid={nodeid}&amp.webdavedit&amp.sheet.LivelinkConfig.webdavedit&amp.EditableType.MSPowerPoint" FunctionUrl="func=w ebdav.viewType=1&amp. LivelinkConfig.EditableType.ms-powerpoint" /> <EditableType Extension="pptx" DisplayName="$Resources:llbase .nextU RL={sourceurl}" MimeType="application/powerpoint" /> <EditableType Extension="ppt" DisplayName="$Resources:llbase. webdavedit&amp.ms- powerpoint.ContentServerUI" FunctionUrl="fun c=webdav.ms- excel.MSWord" FunctionUrl="func=webdav.12" /> <EditableType Extension="xls" DisplayName="$Resources:llbase.12" /> <EditableType Extension="xlsb" DisplayName="$Resources:llbase .macroEnabled.ms-excel" /> <EditableType Extension="xlsx" DisplayName="$Resources:llbase .presentationml.LivelinkConfig.openxmlformats- officedocument.webdavedit&amp.viewType=1&amp.LivelinkConfig.EditableType.nextURL={s ourceurl}" MimeType="application/vnd.llbase.openxmlformats- officedocument.nodeid={nodeid}&amp.MSPowerPoint" FunctionUrl="func=w ebdav.nodeid={nodeid}&amp.viewType=1&amp.EditableType.viewType= 1&amp.webdavedit&amp.presentation.MSPowerPoint" FunctionUrl="func= webdav.EditableType.EditableType.MSExcel" FunctionUrl="func=webda v.viewType=1&amp.sheet" /> <EditableType Extension="xlsm" DisplayName="$Resources:llbase .webdavedit&amp.webdavedit&amp.sheet.nextURL={ sourceurl}" MimeType="application/vnd.nodeid={nodeid}&amp.viewType=1&amp.EditableType.binary.nextURL={sourceurl}" MimeType="application/vnd.nextU RL={sourceurl}" MimeType="application/vnd.viewType=1&amp.ne OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 177 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .macroEnabled.MSExcel" FunctionUrl="func=webdav . LivelinkConfig.nextURL={ sourceurl}" MimeType="application/vnd.nextURL={so urceurl}" MimeType="application/rtf" /> <EditableType Extension="ppt" DisplayName="$Resources:llbase.MSExcel" FunctionUrl="func=webda v.webdavedit&amp.viewType=1&amp.nodeid={nodeid}&amp.nodeid={nodeid}&amp.nextURL={ sourceurl}" MimeType="application/vnd.nodeid={nodeid}&amp.viewType=1&amp.MSPowerPoint" Function Url="func=webdav.webdavedit&amp.macroEnabled.ms- excel.spreadsheetml.viewType=1&amp.nodeid={nodeid}&amp.presentation" /> <EditableType Extension="pptm" DisplayName="$Resources:lllayo uts.next URL={sourceurl}" MimeType="application/vnd.nodeid={nodeid}&amp.12.webdavedit&amp.12" /> <EditableType Extension="txt" DisplayName="$Resources:llbase. Defining advanced settings in XML configuration files <EditableType Extension="rtf" DisplayName="$Resources:llbase. LivelinkConfig.EditableType.LivelinkConfig.EditableType. LivelinkConfig.

nodeid={nodeid}&amp.EditableType. Currently all types available in Content Server are listed. <ExcludedNotifications> <NotificationInterest>1</NotificationInterest> <!--A topic is added --> <NotificationInterest>2</NotificationInterest> <!--A reply is added --> <NotificationInterest>15</NotificationInterest> <!--A news item is added --> <NotificationInterest>16</NotificationInterest> <!--A compound document release or revision is added --> </ExcludedNotifications> <DocumentDownloadUrl> This section defines how Enterprise Library documents are opened. <CreatableType Extension="doc" DisplayName="$Resources:lllayouts. LivelinkConfig.ContentServerUI" FunctionUrl="fun c=webdav.viewType=1&amp.ContentServerUI" FunctionUrl="fu nc=webdav.Edit&nodeid={nodeid}&viewType=1&nextUrl={s ourceurl}" /> <ExcludedNotifications> This section defines which notification options will not be displayed when the user configures alerts for a Content Server item. The document is created using Content Server. remove the line for it.ne xtURL={sourceurl}" MimeType="text/xml" /> </EditableTypes> <CreatableTypes> This section defines which MIME type documents can be created. Each entry has the following form: Note: Currently. no additional types can be created in Content Server.EditableType.LivelinkConfig.webdavedit&amp. You can remove entries from the CreatableTypes section.viewType=1&amp.webdavedit&amp.n extURL={sourceurl}" MimeType="text/html" /> <EditableType Extension="xml" DisplayName="$Resources:llbase. It is possible to specify a different URL for downloading the content from Enterprise Library.nodeid={nodeid}&amp.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration xtURL={sourceurl}" MimeType="text/plain" /> <EditableType Extension="html" DisplayName="$Resources:llbase . If you want to display one of the excluded items.DocumentType.Mi crosoftWord" FunctionUrl="func=Edit.NewDocumentPage. Another case could be making Microsoft Office to open documents always in the read-only mode which seems not to be reliable OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 178 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . This can be helpful if you want to perform some additional action when downloading content or reduce traffic between SharePoint and Content Server.

{version} Version number or 0 for the last version. This is the name of the file that was uploaded from the source file system. which are replaced with the values specific for the downloaded content: {actualversion} Actual version number. {livelinkcgiurl} Content Server URL.12.viewType=1&amp.verType={rendition}</ DocumentDownloadUrl> OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 179 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .nodeid={nodeid}&amp. {volumeid} Volume ID of the document. {sourceurl} URL to return to after the page has been processed. or forcing the actual file name for clients which ignore the header field Content-Disposition. {filename} Original file name of the last version of the document. <DocumentDownloadUrl>{livelinkcgiurl}/{nodeid}/{filename}? func=doc. {nodeid} Node ID of the document. {rendition} Rendition type. {fullname} Name of the document with the original file name extension. The URL can contain the following placeholders. 5.vernu m={actualversion}&amp. {siteurl} URL of the website from the current SharePoint context.Fetch&amp. specify the URL in the DocumentDownloadUrl element. {livelinkserver} Unique name of the Content Server where the document is stored. {name} Name of the version. Defining advanced settings in XML configuration files otherwise. In order to do so. see also {filename}. Example 5-8: Content Server Download Functionality Content Server must be accessible from the client browser.

Server={livelinkser ver}&amp. The default setting is false.Server={livelinkser ver}&amp. It is not necessary to modify the other web applications.Volume={volumeid}&amp. Example 5-10: modified: Redirecting SharePoint Download Functionality Another possibility is to create a new web application with a blank root site and to remove the HTTP header either from the mentioned folder or from the entire web application.Fo rceDownload=true </DocumentDownloadUrl> <ProtocolHandlerProtocol> This element defines the protocol name that will be used for SharePoint indexing and is displayed in the crawl log.aspx/{fullname}? Node={nodeid}&amp.Rendition={rendition}&amp. If you set the settings to true. the HTTP header MicrosoftSharePointTeamServices must be removed from the folder _layouts/Livelink (at least) in the configuration of IIS for all web applications which are enabled for archiving.Rendition={rendition}&amp. make sure the content access account is part of the performance monitors users group. For more information. Replace the variables <hostname> and <port> with actual values: <DocumentDownloadUrl> http://<hostname>:<port>/_layouts/Livelink/Retrieve. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 180 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration Example 5-9: Redirecting SharePoint Download Functionality Content Server needs not be accessible from the client browser.Fo rceDownload=true </DocumentDownloadUrl> Additionally. <ProtocolHandlerProtocol>livelink://</ProtocolHandlerProtocol> <ProtocolHandlerPerformanceMonitor Enabled="false" /> This element lets you enable or disable performance monitoring when running a crawl for an Enterprise Library Content Source. you have to restart the SharePoint Server Search 15 service. see “Defining Enterprise Library content sources” on page 89.Volume={volumeid}&amp.Version={version}&amp. Note: If you change the default setting. The redirection URL would be absolute to the new web application. Only SharePoint server is contacted from the client browser.Version={version}&amp. <DocumentDownloadUrl> {livelinkvdir}/Retrieve.aspx/ {name}? Node={nodeid}&amp.

This setting applies to all links that are created afterwards. Defining advanced settings in XML configuration files <PostRequestReferer> This element defines the name for the trusted referrer in the Content Server administration. <FolderLinkUrl> This element lets you define which .aspx page is DocumentLibrary. replace otfolder with the following: folderLink in CrawledProperty[@PropertySet=’0b63e343-9ccc-11d0- bcdb-00805fccce04’ and @Name=’DAV:contentclass’]\ Constant \@Value. Tip: If you want Enterprise Library documents to display an icon with the CD symbol in the search results.aspx? Volume={volumeid}&Node={nodeid}&Server={livelinkserver}</ FolderLinkUrl> The URL can contain the following placeholders. If you want to change the value. The following value is provided by default: <FolderLinkUrl>{livelinkvdir}/DocumentLibrary. The default . <CrawledDocumentProperties> This element defines the document properties that will be indexed during the crawl.aspx. make sure that this value is also entered for all Content Servers in the security parameters in the Content Server administration.url files) for archived folders in a SharePoint document library. 5. which are replaced with the respective values: OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 181 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Tip: If you want Enterprise Library folders to have an icon with the CD symbol in the search results.12. The default value in this element is spsarchiving which is entered automatically during the module installation. add the following elements: <CrawledProperty PropertySet="0b63e343-9ccc-11d0-bcdb-00805fccce04" Name="DAV:contentclass" Type="String"> <Choose> <IsNullOrEmpty> <Property Name="FileExtension" /> </IsNullOrEmpty> <Constant Value="dvd" /> <Concatenate> <Property Name="FileExtension" /> <Constant Value="Link" /> </Concatenate> </Choose> <CrawledFolderProperties> This element defines the folder properties that will be indexed during the crawl.aspx page is used for the URL within Internet shortcut links (.

It equals {siteurl}/ _layouts/Livelink.url files) for archived documents in a SharePoint document library. This setting applies to all links that are created afterwards.aspx. <FileLinkUrl> This element lets you define which . Example: The following URL is generally used: http://<host name>/img. Example: The following configuration enables users to open the document by clicking its link. {livelinksupporturl} URL to the support directory that contains static files which are provided by Content Server through HTTP. Use this placeholder only for documents. The following value is provided by default: <FileLinkUrl>{livelinkvdir}/Inspection.aspx page is used for the URL within Internet shortcut links (. {nodeid} Node ID of the object. and CSS files. Its value equals {name} for all object types that are not documents. see also {filename}. {name} Name of the object. for example image.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration {filename} Original file name of the last version of the object. It refers to C:\OPENTEXT\support in the file system. {fullname} Name of the object with the original file name extension. {livelinkserver} Unique name of the Content Server where the object is stored.aspx page is Inspection. {livelinkvdir} URL to the virtual directory on the SharePoint server where the Content Server integration files are located. {volumeid} Volume ID of the object.aspx? Volume={volumeid}&Node={nodeid}&Server={livelinkserver}</ FileLinkUrl> The URL can contain the same placeholders as the <FolderLinkUrl> element. JavaScript. The default . {sourceurl} URL to return to after the page has been processed. This is the name of the file that was uploaded from the source file system. {livelinkcgiurl} URL that refers to the Content Server starting page. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 182 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .

you can add them here.aspx/{fullname}? Volume={volumeid}&Node={nodeid}&Server={livelinkserver}</ AttachmentLinkUrl> The URL can contain the same placeholders as the <FolderLinkUrl> element.9 LivelinkSearchConfig.. see the OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint SDK in the OpenText Knowledge Center.12. In addition to the settings available in the GUI.xml The LivelinkSearchConfig. Attributes listed here are displayed in the property drop-down list on the “Add property restrictions. The default .aspx page is used when you click an archived attachment link within an archived list summary sheet. This setting applies to all lists that are archived afterwards.aspx page is Retrieve. This file contains configuration settings for search. Tip: To update attributes.xml file is located in the SharePoint > Livelink > Configuration folder in the Opentext document library.aspx?/{fullname}? Volume={volumeid}&Node={nodeid}&Server={livelinkserver}</ FileLinkUrl> <AttachmentLinkUrl> This element lets you define which . <Searchable Regions> A list of Content Server attributes used to add restrictions to the search query. Defining advanced settings in XML configuration files <FileLinkUrl>{livelinkvdir}/Retrieve. If additional non-String object types are available. Note: The scopes searched by default (<DefaultSlices>) are available in Central Administration on the Global Search Settings page. Attributes not listed here are assumed to be of type String.12..aspx. The following value is provided by default: <AttachmentLinkUrl>{livelinkvdir}/Retrieve.” grid of the Enterprise Library Advanced Search Web Part. 5. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 183 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . you can use the following element: <SystemAttribute> Type information for Content Server attributes. <PermissionSynchronizationSettings> This element lets you configure the internal throttling value for Permission Synchronization. The value controls how many items are processed at a time. The default value is set to 100: <PermissionSynchronizationSettings> <Throttle100</Throttle> </PermissionSynchronizationSettings> 5.

RecentChanges" /> </SupportedWidgetTypes> Each supported widget type declaration consists of a Name which is the identity of the widget type. 5. The default setting is: <SupportedWidgetTypes> <WidgetType Name="Attributes" Title="$Resources:llwebparts. It includes following elements: <SupportedWidgetTypes> This element defines the list of widget types that are supported by Application Governance & Archiving.xml configuration file.Link" /> <WidgetType Name="RecentChanges" Title="$Resources:llwebparts. For more information about Search settings. Application Governance & Archiving uses the section as a cache to retrieve Content Server search attributes. see “Defining search settings” on page 87.10 LivelinkWidgetsWebPartConfig.Title.Title.BrowseRelationships " /> <WidgetType Name="Link" Title="$Resources:llwebparts. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 184 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .WidgetType.WidgetType.12. and a Title which is displayed on the UI. proceed as follows: 1. see the following table: Table 5-1: Available widget types Title Name Attributes Attributes Recent Changes RecentChanges Related Items BrowseRelationships Work Items WorkItems Workspace Reference Link To support a widget type. Specify the widget type in the LivelinkWidgetsWebPartConfig. For the name and the default title of the widget types.Title.xml The LivelinkWidgetsWebPartConfig.WidgetType.WidgetType. This file contains configuration settings for Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part.Attributes" /> <WidgetType Name="BrowseRelationships" Title="$Resources:llwebparts.Title. Important Custom system attributes will be overwritten each time the search settings are updated and synchronized with Content Server.xml file is located in the SharePoint > Livelink > Configuration folder in the Opentext document library.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration This section is dynamically updated and synchronized with Content Server whenever the user updates the Application Governance & Archiving search settings.

<Applications> <Application Name="InteractivePages" Title="$Resources:lladmin.11 LogConfig. This file contains the logging configuration.12. for example: • <DefaultTypesToDisplay>BrowseRelationships</ DefaultTypesToDisplay> • <DefaultTypesToDisplay>Attributes. or from top to bottom (vertically).Link</DefaultTypesToDisplay> <DefaultDisplayOrientation> This element defines how multiple widgets are displayed by default on the Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part.xml The LogConfig. see “Extending the Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part” on page 278. The default setting displays all supported widget types: <DefaultTypesToDisplay>All</DefaultTypesToDisplay> You can also specify to display one widget type or certain widget types. either from left to right (horizontally). the settings saved with the Web Part instances take effect. In addition to the settings available in the GUI. For more information on how to define logging settings with the GUI. you can add categories and log targets. Once customized.Logging_Application_InteractivePages"> <ListenerLevels> <ListenerLevel Name="EventLog" Level="Critical" /> <ListenerLevel Name="File" Level="Verbose" /> </ListenerLevels> <DefaultListenerLevels> <ListenerLevel Name="EventLog" Level="Critical" /> <ListenerLevel Name="File" Level="Critical" /> </DefaultListenerLevels> </Application> OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 185 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . <DefaultTypesToDisplay> This element defines the default widget types to be displayed on the Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part. The default setting is Horizontal: <DefaultDisplayOrientation>Horizontal</DefaultDisplayOrientation> Note: The settings defined in <DefaultTypesToDisplay> and <DefaultDisplayOrientation> apply to Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part instances that have not been customized. 5.xml file is located in the SharePoint > Configuration folder in the Opentext document library.12. Prepare the XSLT style sheet and save it in the proper location. see “Defining logging settings” on page 82. Defining advanced settings in XML configuration files 2. 5. For more information about the XSLT style sheet.

. For the Windows Event log. <ListenerLevel Level=> Threshold of the importance of messages written to the log.. that is all machines where Enterprise Library Integration runs. There name of the event source must not be used in any existing (differently named) event log on the machine where the event log is to be used. </Listener> Note: The first eight letters of the event log name must be unique on the machine where the event log is to be used.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration [. Logging to the Windows Event Log and to a text file is preconfigured. 5.] </Applications> <Application> A category or a group of features of the product which share common logging settings..xml file is located in the SharePoint > Livelink > Configuration folder in the Opentext document library. and assign menu items to object types.. You can define new object types.12. <ListenerLevel Name=> A log (logging target) storing messages written in the context of an application..12 ObjectTypeConfig. This file defines which Content Server object types are available for the Enterprise Library Web Part and which menu items and actions are available for the different object types. If the standard definition is not sufficient.. modify the defined menu items.xml file (Enterprise Library Web Part) The ObjectTypeConfig.. you can edit the file. <Properties> <Property Name="log" Value="OpenText" /> <Property Name="source" Value="Enterprise Library Integration" /> </Properties> .> . new menu items.NET Framework are supported. Any additional trace listeners implementing the according interfaces of the Microsoft . with “Critical” being the highest level and “Verbose” being the lowest level. With the level “Verbose” you get the most log messages.. you can define special names: <Listener Name="EventLog" . It is a name for a minimum set of functionality to enable troubleshooting and diagnostics of a user scenario. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 186 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .

Defining advanced settings in XML configuration files 5. you can specify the text to be displayed here.Menu. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 187 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . 5.12.12. If the specified string resource is not present in the resource file.gif" largeIcon="/_layouts/images/checkin.Livelink. the value specified here will be taken instead. text ID of the string resource in specified resource file that is displayed on the menu. So if there is no need for localization. <menuItem id="unreserve" displayWithRootNodes="false" supportsMultiSelect="false" icon="/_layouts/images/checkin.12.Unreserve. icon Site-relative URL for the icon to be displayed for the menu item when used on the context menu.aspx? Node={nodeid}&Volume={volumeid}&Server={livelinkserver}&Source={sourc eurl}" confirmText="" availableFunc="VerifyReservedByUser" requiredRights="45059" onCompletion="RefreshCurrentBlock" executionType="Modal" modalDialogWidth="800" modalDialogHeight="0" actionType="Single" /> The menuItem element has the following attributes: id The ID of the menu item is used when defining which menu items are available for the different Content Server object types.Menu. description The description will be displayed as a tool tip.Unreserve" description="$Resources:llwebparts. displayWithRootNodes Then menu item is displayed when more than one root nodes are displayed.ToolTip" action="{livelinkvdir}/Unreserve.1 Defining menu items A menu item is defined using the menuItem element. supportsMultiSelect The menu item is displayed in the action bar and is can also be applied to more than one item. largeIcon Site-relative URL for the large icon to be displayed for the menu item when used on the Actions menu.Livelink.gif" text="$Resources:llwebparts.

see also {filename}.exe). {containernodeid} Node ID of the container where the Content Server object is located. the Content Server object. for example http:// sharepointserver/_layouts/Livelink. {externalurl} URL of a resource that the Content Server URL object references. {isnew} Specifies whether the Content Server object is new. {filename} File name of the Content Server object. {livelinkcgiurl} The complete URL for the Content Server CGI application (for example. {containersubtype} Subtype of the container where the Content Server object is located {containertypename} Name of the container type where the Content Server object is located. {livelinkserver} Unique name of the Content Server the Web Part is configured to use. The following variables are supported: {containerpermissions} Permissions of the container where the Content Server object is located. {fullname} Name of the object with the original file name extension. {hasstagingfolder} Specifies whether the Content Server object has a staging folder.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration action The URL of the page the menu item should navigate to. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 188 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . If the object type is not a Content Server URL. You can use substitution variables to refer to. this attribute has no value. {livelinkvdir} Complete URL of the virtual directory on the SharePoint server where the Content Server integration files are located. {containervolumeid} Volume ID of the container where the Content Server object is located. {iscontainer} Specifies whether the Content Server object is a container. {livelinkuser} User name of the Content Server the Web Part is configured to use. http://server/livelink/livelink. for example.

If you want to use the information of the object that the shortcut references. This attribute contains the value of the object attribute that the shortcut references. {sitecollectionurl} URL of the SharePoint site collection where the Web Part is being used. If you want to use the information of the object that the shortcut references. {siteurl} The complete URL to the root of the SharePoint site where the Web Part is being used. see {parentid}. {targetversionid} Available if the Content Server object is an shortcut. for example http://sharepointserver/samplesite. see {permissions}. If you want to OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 189 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . For the value meaning. {parentid} Parent ID of the Content Server object for which the menu item is displayed. you must use this attribute. {permissions} Permissions of the Content Server object for which the menu item is displayed. you must use this attribute. you must use this attribute. This attribute contains the value of the object attribute that the shortcut references. you must use this attribute. Defining advanced settings in XML configuration files {nodeid} Node ID of the Content Server object for which the menu item is displayed. {targetparentid} Available if the Content Server object is an shortcut. If you want to use the information of the object that the shortcut references. {reservedby} Specifies the user who reserved the Content Server object. {targetsubtype} Available if the Content Server object is an shortcut. For the value meaning. This attribute contains the value of the object attribute that the shortcut references. {sourceurl} Complete URL (including query string variables) for the current page where the Web Part is displayed. see {nodeid}. For the value meaning.12. {subtype} Type of the Content Server object for which the menu item is displayed. If you want to use the information of the object that the shortcut references. {targetnodeid} Available if the Content Server object is a shortcut. This attribute contains the value of the object attribute that the shortcut references. This attribute contains the value of the object attribute that the shortcut references. see {subtype}. 5. For the value meaning. {targetpermissions} Available if the Content Server object is an shortcut.

For the value meaning. {volumeid} Volume ID of the Content Server object for which the menu item is displayed. This attribute contains the value of the object attribute that the shortcut references. • VerifyUnreservedOrReservedByUser: Make sure that the document is not checked out or that it is checked out by the current user. {versionid} Version ID of the Content Server object for which the menu item is displayed. see {versionid}.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration use the information of the object that the shortcut references. you can specify the text to be displayed here. confirmText The ID of the string resource that is used for the confirm text prompt. • VerifyReservedByUser: Make sure that the current user is the one who checked out the document. {targetvolumeid} Available if the Content Server object is an shortcut. The following values are supported by default: • VerifyUnreserved: Make sure that the document is not checked out. • VerifyEditEnabled: Make sure that the type of the document belongs to one of the editable types. For the value meaning. If you want to use the information of the object that the shortcut references. see {volumeid}. If there is no need for localization. This parameter allows you to enter multiple JavaScript functions that need to be separated by a semicolon (.). OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 190 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . In addition to the built-in functions you can use custom functions that you must define according to the provided information in the OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint SDK documentation. requiredRights The Content Server rights required for the Content Server object for this menu item to be displayed. availableFunc An identifier specifying one or more JavaScript functions that will be called to check if the menu item is to be displayed or not. the value specified here will be taken instead. you must use this attribute. you must use this attribute.xml” on page 174. If the specified string resource is not present in the resource file. For more information. see “LivelinkConfig. Leave as an empty string to not prompt the user to confirm the action.

Reserve 64 The user is allowed to reserve the object. • Modal: Open the page specified by the ActionUrl in a modal dialog. See 128 The user is allowed to see that the object exists. onCompletion The extra action required once the action is completed. Create 1 The user is allowed to create objects. • RefreshCurrentBlock: Clears client-side cached data from current data block and forwards once the action finishes. meaning that in order for the copy menu item to be displayed. The following values are supported: • None: Nothing happens to the main window or page once the action finishes. SeeContent 256 The user is allowed to see the contents of the object. The first data block will be refreshed and the Web Part will render the first page of the first data block. Defining advanced settings in XML configuration files Right Value Description None 0 The user has no rights to the object. modalDialogWidth. • RefreshWebPart: Clears all the client-side cached data when the action finishes. As an example. executionType Defines how the action will be processed. otherwise the values are ignored. add the values together. EditAttributes 8 The user is allowed to edit attributes of the object. 5. The current data block will be refreshed and the Web Part will render the first page of current data block. To define a combination of the defined permissions. The following values are supported: • Redirect: Redirect to the page specified by the ActionUrl with current window. the copy menu item has the value 384. Modify 32 The user is allowed to modify the object. the user must be allowed to both see that the object exists and see the contents of the object. modalDialogHeight Specifies the dialog size in pixels for the case that executionType is set to Modal. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 191 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . • Popup: Open the page specified by the ActionUrl in a new window. Delete 2 The user is allowed to delete the object. • RefreshPage: Refresh the main window or page once the action finishes. • Script: Execute the script specified by the ActionUrl. EditPermissions 16 The user is allowed to edit the permissions for the object.12. Delete Version 4 The user is allowed to delete versions of the object.

crawlable Defines if a sub type can be crawled.] </actions> </objectType> The objectType element has the following attributes: typeID ID of the Content Server object types that the menu items are being defined for. you must decide if you set this attribute.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration actionType The following values are supported: • User: The action does not apply to a particular row entity and is only limited by current user's rights.SubType.gif" isContainer="true"> <actions clickAction="retrieve" shortcutAction="retrieve"> [. Uses the same values as in LAPI. Values are “true” (default) and “false”.Folder" visible=true searchable="true" crawlable="false" iconUrl="/_layouts/images/Livelink/folder. you can define actions and menu items to display.2 Defining menu items for object types For each object type. Values are “true” and “false” (default)..12. there are entries for all relevant Content Server types. typeName Name of the object type. searchable Includes the object type in searches and displays its content in search results. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 192 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Each entry has the following form: <objectType typeID="0" typeName="$Resources:llwebparts. visible Makes the object type visible. • Multiple: The action applies to multiple row entities. Values are “true” (default) and “false”. LiveReports) produce an error if this attribute is set to “true”. • Single: The action applies to a particular row entity and only one entity.Livelink. By default.. 5. iconUrl Path to the icon of the object type. For all other object types. Sub types that cannot be crawled (for example. specified as an integer. An example of this type of action is Delete. An example of this type of action is Create Document.12. An example is View Properties.

It can be used as an internet shortcut. If no standard object type resembles a new object type. Without this setting. Then you can either delete this attribute or replace its value with. This URL will be also visible in the status bar of the browser. for example copied to the address bar in a new browser window. For more information.<sample_type>.NET pages would not be able to process the new objects as they expect special functionality exposed by the object implementation of the standard types. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 193 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . The attribute can either refer to one of the defined menu items by specifying the id of the menu item or specify an ASP. when navigating the Content Server object hierarchy and when reporting the size (as number of items) Possible values are true and false. you can use this attribute to set the identifier of the standard object type’s identifier in the new object type. wrapperBaseTypeID If you add a new object type and it resembles a standard object type. override the OnRowCommand method and check for the argument using the CommandName property.12. <your_customized_ribbon_id>. It has the following attributes: clickAction Action that is taken when the object is clicked. It makes standard product actions accept the new object as if it were of a standard object type. Note: To define a custom post-back argument. only the browse command is supported as post-back command. Defining advanced settings in XML configuration files isContainer Defines if the object is treated as an item containing other objects (for example a folder) or not.NET post-back command in the following form: postback:<post-back argument>.SubType. you can set the interface attribute to an assembly-qualified name of the interface as well as the implementation attribute to the respective class type. Search for the object type with the typeName $Resources:llwebparts. most standard actions such as menu items pointing to ASP.Livelink. for example. Make sure to call the base class implementation of OnRowCommand if you do not handle the event. webPartTabIds Allows you to change the ribbon menu. Actions available for object of a single type are defined by the sub element actions. Currently. you need to derive your own Web Part from the document library Web Part. shortcutAction Defines the action for which the URL will be copied to the clipboard by clicking Copy Shortcut on the context menu. see the LivelinkTasks example in the OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint SDK documentation. 5.

> <menuItemReference menuId="sendto"> <menuItemReference menuId="copytosps"/> </menuItemReference> . These elements refer to the defined menu items. The menu items for the object type are defined by including menuItemReference elements in the actions element. a document..> <menuItemReference menuId="properties"/> <menuItemReference menuId="copy"/> . If set to true... The default value of useOriginalNode is false. If the related object is of a different type than the shortcut or generation.. which can be.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration The attribute can refer to one of the defined menu items by specifying the ID of the menu item. </actions> The hidden attribute defines if the menu item will be visible on the context menu of the item... useOriginalNode Controls the processing of menu item actions if the object that they apply to is a Content Server shortcut or a Content Server generation. this setting affects all its children.. you can specify it in the altText attribute: <actions. Note: You can also use the useOriginalNode attribute in the menuitemReference element.. If the menu item is a submenu item. the action that is declared by the menu item is handled as described in useOriginalNode on page 194.. If it is set to false.> <menuItemReference menuId="sendto"> <menuItemReference menuId="copytosps" hidden="true" altText="Copy to SharePoint"/> </menuItemReference> . the default action that is specified by the clickAction and shortcutAction attributes will not work with the related object (shortcut) itself but with the target object that it points to. </actions> If you want to use a different text for a particular menu item than it has been defined for the action.. for example. If set to true... </actions> If you want to nest menu items (create sub menus) you can nest the menuItemReference elements: <actions. specifying the ID of the menu item in the menuId attribute: <actions. the action will still be accessible through the ribbon... this attribute has no effect on the action handling.. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 194 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .

12. you must change the ObjectInformationCacheExpirationTime element. or Physical Objects.4 Adding object definitions for OpenText Template Workspaces items To display cases from OpenText Template Workspaces in the Enterprise Library Web Part.12. The node information is likely to expire earlier.xml file must match the values that are defined for the case type item in Content Server. The default caching time is 300 seconds. or Physical Objects properties are displayed in the Web Part columns. Replace the [CONFIGURED_SUBTYPE_ID]. for example. you must add an <objectType> element with the following child elements and attributes for each case type defined in Content Server. and icon URL defined for the corresponding case type item in Content Server. Note: The subtype. name.1 “Managing Case Types” in OpenText Template Workspaces . and icon URL values that you specify in the ObjectTypeConfig. if you use Records Management. 5. To change the caching time to improve browsing performance. The entire cache is cleared when the application pool of the web application that runs the Web Parts is recycled. 5. the information can be loaded from the cached information without having to reload it from Content Server. This is usually done on a daily basis. OpenText recommends that you increase this value only if no Records Management.12.12. These values are defined in the Template Workspaces Administration area of the Content Server administration page. The information from the cache is used until the information of the node changes. For more information. Defining advanced settings in XML configuration files 5. [CONFIGURED_CASE_TYPE_NAME]. <objectType typeId="[CONFIGURED_SUBTYPE_ID]" typeName="[CONFIGURED_CASE_TYPE_NAME]" visible="true" searchable="true" crawlable="true" iconUrl="[CASE_TYPE_ICON_URL]" wrapperBaseTypeId="31066" isContainer="true"> <actions clickAction="postback:browse" shortcutAction="browseFolder"> <menuItemReference menuId="viewProperties" /> <menuItemReference menuId="editProperties" /> <menuItemReference menuId="permissions" /> <menuItemReference menuId="delete" /> <menuItemReference menuId="separator" /> <menuItemReference menuId="copy" /> <menuItemReference menuId="move" /> <menuItemReference menuId="sendto"> OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 195 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . This may occur. name. Whenever the information is displayed. see section 5.12. However.Installation and Administration Guide (LLESCSB-IGD). some column information that has been changed in Content Server will not be updated until the cache is invalidated. Security Clearance. Security Clearance. and [CASE_TYPE_ICON_URL] values with the subtype.3 Defining the caching time of displayed node information You can define how long the displayed node information in the Enterprise Library Web Parts is cached.

a case named Unit Test with ID 31350 should be added as follows: <objectType typeId="31350" volumeTypeId="-1" visible="true" searchable="true" crawlable="true" isContainer="true" internal="false" iconUrl="/_layouts/15/images/Livelink/support/casebasic/ casetype_01.SendToSps" useOriginalNode="false" /> OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 196 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .SendToSps" /> <menuItemReference menuId="createlink" /> <menuItemReference menuId="makeShortcut" /> </menuItemReference> <menuItemReference menuId="separator" /> <menuItemReference menuId="audit" /> <menuItemReference menuId="rm" /> <menuItemReference menuId="separator" /> <menuItemReference menuId="setNotification" /> <menuItemReference menuId="applyrmclassification" hidden="true" / > <menuItemReference menuId="removermclassification" hidden="true" /> <menuItemReference menuId="applyholds" hidden="true" /> <menuItemReference menuId="removeholds" hidden="true" /> </actions> </objectType> Example 5-11: For example.Livelink.gif" typeName="Unit Test" wrapperBaseTypeId="31066" disableCustomColumns="false"> <actions clickAction="postback:browse" shortcutAction="browseFolder" useOriginalNode="false"> <menuItemReference menuId="viewProperties" hidden="false" useOriginalNode="false" /> <menuItemReference menuId="editProperties" hidden="false" useOriginalNode="false" /> <menuItemReference menuId="permissions" hidden="false" useOriginalNode="false" /> <menuItemReference menuId="delete" hidden="false" useOriginalNode="false" /> <menuItemReference menuId="separator" hidden="false" useOriginalNode="false" /> <menuItemReference menuId="copy" hidden="false" useOriginalNode="false" /> <menuItemReference menuId="move" hidden="false" useOriginalNode="false" /> <menuItemReference menuId="sendto" hidden="false" useOriginalNode="false"> <menuItemReference menuId="emaillink" hidden="false" useOriginalNode="false" /> <menuItemReference menuId="copytosps" hidden="false" altText="$Resources:llwebparts.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration <menuItemReference menuId="emaillink" /> <menuItemReference menuId="copytosps" altText="$Resources:llwebparts.Menu.Menu.Livelink.

12. you may need to edit the case type properties on each Content Server system to display icons and names for cases in the Enterprise Library Web Part. After you add an <objectType> element for a case in the ObjectTypeConfig. Defining advanced settings in XML configuration files <menuItemReference menuId="createlink" hidden="false" useOriginalNode="false" /> <menuItemReference menuId="makeShortcut" hidden="false" useOriginalNode="false" /> </menuItemReference> <menuItemReference menuId="separator" hidden="false" useOriginalNode="false" /> <menuItemReference menuId="audit" hidden="false" useOriginalNode="false" /> <menuItemReference menuId="rm" hidden="false" useOriginalNode="false" /> <menuItemReference menuId="separator" hidden="false" useOriginalNode="false" /> <menuItemReference menuId="setNotification" hidden="false" useOriginalNode="false" /> <menuItemReference menuId="applyrmclassification" hidden="true" useOriginalNode="false" /> <menuItemReference menuId="removermclassification" hidden="true" useOriginalNode="false" /> <menuItemReference menuId="applyholds" hidden="true" useOriginalNode="false" /> <menuItemReference menuId="removeholds" hidden="true" useOriginalNode="false" /> </actions> </objectType> Importing case types to the ObjectTypeConfig. For example. and your environment contains two or more case type items that have identical subtype IDs on different Content Server systems. you must ensure that all case items that have the same subtype ID are also assigned the same case type names and icons on each Content Server system. 5.xml file. run the following cmdlet in Microsoft PowerShell: Update-OTCaseTypes -Server <Display Name> -verbose Using the OpenText Template Workspaces module on multiple Content Server systems If you are using the OpenText Template Workspaces module on multiple Content Server systems. if you have two case items that each have the subtype ID 31350 on two different Content Server systems. if these values do not match. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 197 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . the icons and names of the case items in the Enterprise Library Web Part may be displayed according to which case type settings were configured first in Content Server.xml file. Otherwise. you should ensure that the Name and Icon values defined for each case type item match on both Content Server systems.xml file To import all case types from Content Server to the ObjectTypeConfig.

Possible values: any positive integer.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration You can view and edit case type names and icons in the Template Workspaces Administration area of the Content Server administration page.12. see “ArchivingConfig. then the global values defined in ArchivingConfig.xml will be used. • <MaxFolders>: Maximum number of folders created in a technical folder structure. For more information. edit the following XML element and fill it with the appropriate values: <NewUserParameters> <GroupName>DefaultGroup</GroupName> <LogInEnabled>true</LogInEnabled> <PublicAccessEnabled>false</PublicAccessEnabled> <CanCreateModifyUsers>false</CanCreateModifyUsers> <CanCreateModifyGroups>false</CanCreateModifyGroups> <UseAdminAccess>false</UserAdminAccess> <SystemAdminRights>false</System AdminRights> </NewUserParameters> 5. In addition to the settings available in the GUI. see section 5.Installation and Administration Guide (LLESCSB-IGD). For more information.xml The PermissionConfig. you can define the maximum numbers of folders that will be created for in a technical folder structure and the maximum number of documents that will be saved in a folder. This file contains the archiving permission settings. If -1 is specified.1 “Managing Case Types” in OpenText Template Workspaces .13 PermissionConfig.xml file is located in the SharePoint > Livelink > Configuration folder in the Opentext document library.xml file is located in the SharePoint > Configuration folder in the Opentext document library. you can define how missing users are created in the Enterprise Library User Management System. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 198 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . 5.12.14 ProfileConfig.xml The ProfileConfig. This file contains the profiles and their configuration. You can do this by creating a <Structure> XML element as a child element of the root element <ProfileConfig>: <Structure Type="technical"> Maximum number of folders and documents archived.xml” on page 170. • <MaxDocuments>: Maximum number of documents within a folder. By editing this file manually. To do this.

Defining advanced settings in XML configuration files 5. You can map multiple attribute types to one field type. For more information. SharePoint fields are referred to as fields and Content Server attributes as attributes. insert a new <TypeMapping> element into the <TypeMappings> element according to the template below.xml (on-premises SharePoint server) The PropertyTypesConfig. see “Defining content type mappings to archive local content” on page 38. Replace SPFIELDTYPE with the full class name of the field type that you want to map and LLATTRIBUTETYPEn with the attribute types to be allowed in combination with the field type. By editing this file. Mapping SharePoint field types to Content Server attribute types This part of the configuration file defines combinations of field types and attribute types that are offered on the Content Type Mapping administration page to define pairs of fields and attributes for value transfers. The mapping of SharePoint field types to Content Server attribute types is defined with the following elements: <TypeMappings> Lists all field-to-attribute type mappings. This file contains the profile assignment information.xml The ProfileMappingsConfig.12. <TypeMapping> <SPFieldType>SPFIELDTYPE</SPFieldType> <LivelinkPropertyTypes> <LivelinkPropertyType Name="LLATTRIBUTETYPE1"/> <LivelinkPropertyType Name="LLATTRIBUTETYPE2"/> OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 199 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .15 ProfileMappingsConfig.xml file is located in the SharePoint > Livelink > Configuration folder in the Opentext document library. For each additional field type that you want to map.xml file is located in the SharePoint > Livelink > Configuration folder in the Opentext document library. you can customize the following: • Mapping between SharePoint field types and Content Server attribute types • Transformation of field and attribute values between the two systems • Recognition of Content Server attribute types In this section.12. <TypeMapping> Defines a single mapping of a field type (element <SPFieldType>) to one or more attribute types (elements <LivelinkPropertyType>). 5.16 PropertyTypesConfig.12. 5. No changes are necessary.

see “Customizing GUI strings” on page 206.LivelinkMultiStringProperty" /> </LivelinkPropertyTypes> </TypeMapping> Tip: For a complete list of possible field types. If DisplayName is omitted.sharepoint. Making SharePoint built-in fields visible There are built-in fields that are fixed to every SharePoint document library. For a list of SharePoint built-in fields.com/en-us/library/ microsoft. <LivelinkPropertyTypes> </TypeMapping> Example 5-12: Mapping of SharePoint field types to Content Server attribute types <TypeMapping> <SPFieldType>Microsoft. • DisplayName: (Optional) Specifies the title of the built-in field that is displayed on the Content Type Mapping administration page. Alternatively.. refer to Microsoft MSDN and the OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint SDK in the OpenText Knowledge Center. you can specify the text of the title directly.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration . see http://msdn.SharePoint.microsoft.Properties .aspx.LivelinkStringProperty" /> <LivelinkPropertyType Name="Opentext. You can make them visible and selectable on the Content Type Mapping administration page by configuring the following elements: <SharePointSystemAttributes> Lists all built-in fields that are available for field-to-attribute mappings <SharePointSystemAttribute> Describes a single built-in field that is offered for the field-to-attribute mappings: • UniqueName: Specifies the unique name of the built-in field. the same text will be displayed in all languages.Livelink.Properties . In this case.ServerConnection.SharePoint.SharePoint. Some of them do not appear on the user interface.SPFieldText</SPFieldType> <LivelinkPropertyTypes> <LivelinkPropertyType Name="Opentext. their full class names. For information on handling resource files. You can specify a reference to a resource string in a resource file that is located in the resource folder of the containing web application..spbuiltinfieldid_fields. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 200 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .Livelink. and attribute types. the built-in field display name is used.ServerConnection.

OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 201 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Example 5-13: Making SharePoint built-in fields visible <SharePointSystemAttributes> <SharePointSystemAttribute UniqueName="_UIVersionString" /> </SharePointSystemAttributes> Configuring custom Content Server attribute types Attribute types that are not provided by Content Server Core must be configured in the PropertyTypesConfig. <SharePointSystemAttribute UniqueName="UNIQUENAME" DisplayName="$Resources:RESOURCEFILENAME. Implementation Assembly-qualified name of the class type that implements the new attribute type’s functionality. For more information. • Optional: To specify the title. add the following section to the <SharePointSystemAttributes> element. Some constants are available in the OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint SDK. Control Optional: Fully qualified class name of a custom configured editing control for the attribute type in the user interface. the Implementation attribute is ignored. you must create it. WrapperBaseTypeId Identifier of another attribute type which resembles the new attribute type and whose implementation you can use to support the new attribute type. If you set both. Defining advanced settings in XML configuration files For each built-in field that you want to use.12.xml file. TypeId Numeric identifier of the attribute type as registered in the Content Server attribute type subsystem. Replace RESOURCESTRINGNAME with the name specified in the resource file. To add a custom attribute type. You can find attribute type numbers in the LAPI SDK or in the documentation for the particular custom attribute type. You must set either WrapperBaseTypeId or Implementation.RESOURCESTRINGNAME" /> • Replace UNIQUENAME with the SharePoint unique name of the built-in field. This usually means that the stored data of the existing attribute type and the new attribute type share the same format. You must set either WrapperBaseTypeId or Implementation. For more information. If you set both. replace RESOURCEFILENAME with the file name and omit its resx extension. see the OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint SDK documentation. 5. If the parent element is unavailable. the Implementation attribute is ignored. you add a LivelinkPropertyDefinition element to the LivelinkPropertyDefinitions element. see the OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint SDK documentation.

<TypedValueConverter> Specifies a single value converter providing the specification of its implementing class in the Implementation attribute.xml file. If you want to apply multiple options to the value converter. only text values are supported.SharePoint. Make sure that you use dedicated value converters because these support value conversions from SharePoint to Content Server and vice versa. UniversalTextValueConverter only supports value conversions from SharePoint to Content Server. You can add your own or customize the existing converters by using the following elements: <TypedValueConverters> Lists all value converters. To change the conversion behavior.SharePoint.ValueConverters. Providers. That is. Application Governance & Archiving provides value converters for standard field and attribute types that are delivered with SharePoint and Content Server.IgnoreInvalidTermLabelWithWarning". A value converter defines how a value of a SharePoint field type is converted to a value of a Content Server attribute type during archiving and vice versa when a document is restored. for example Options="LengthMustFit. Providers.Livelink. Example: <TypedValueConverters> <TypedValueConverter Implementation="Opentext.SharePoint.Livelink.ValueConverters. ensure that these are separated by a comma. For value conversions from Content Server to SharePoint. remove specific converters. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 202 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .TextValueConverter" /> <TypedValueConverter Implementation="Opentext. • Options: Defines how the property values are converted when SharePoint content types and Enterprise Library properties are mapped on the Content Type Mapping administration page. Providers.ValueConverters. The values that you enter here override the default conversion options provided by the PropertyTypesConfig.UniversalTextValueConverter" /> </TypedValueConverters> The value converters are evaluated in the order of their elements. As this converter supports any input value.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration Configuring value converters You can customize how property values are converted between SharePoint and Content Server. the first converter that claims support for the value (its field and attribute types) is actually used for the conversion. or add your own converters.DateOnlyValueConverter" /> <TypedValueConverter Implementation="Opentext. OpenText recommends placing it at the end of the configured converters. you can change the order.Livelink. You may also uncomment UniversalTextValueConverter that performs a simple text conversion for all values that are not covered by other converters.

If you set this attribute to true. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 203 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Note: If you use Content Server for archiving only and plan to never restore any items or if there is no need to restore the full-length property values. Defining advanced settings in XML configuration files A full list of the default and other possible conversion options is available in “Appendix – Content type mapping conversion options“ on page 297. Default value: false. This value converter provides the following attributes: • ServerEditionOnly: Required Boolean value that you must set to true for this value converter. For more information about mapping content types. The first entry defines how text values are converted during archiving. see “Defining content type mappings to archive local content” on page 127 or “Defining content type mappings” on page 161. Managed Metadata Service is only available on SharePoint Server 2010 Standard or Enterprise editions. the default setting CutLongText is sufficient. the system skips loading the converter when SharePoint Foundation Server is used. The following attribute values are available for the first entry: • LengthMustFit: The text length of the SharePoint source text must be less than or equal to the maximum length of the Content Server target type. If the length exceeds the specified value. only the value up to the specified number of characters is returned from the conversion. it is ignored during the conversion and a warning message is logged. The following attribute values are available for the second entry: • TermLabelMustExist: The input term label must be an existing value in the term store.12. The second entry defines how managed metadata values are converted during restoration. • CutLongText: (Default setting) If the length of the SharePoint source text exceeds the specified maximum length of the Content Server target type. the conversion fails. • IgnoreInvalidTermLabelWithWarning: If the input term label does not exist in the term store. Two entries are defined by default. 5. converting managed metadata values does not apply to SharePoint Foundation 2010. Example 5-14: Customizing taxonomy value converter The TaxonomyValueConverter value converter needs specific settings and is therefore described in detail. Otherwise. • Options: Defines how text and managed metadata values are converted. the conversion fails. Therefore.

xml • Borrowed Items Web Part: BorrowedItemsWebPartViewConfig.18 Configuration files for Enterprise Library Web Parts The configuration files for Enterprise Library Web Parts are located in the SharePoint > Livelink > Configuration folder in the Opentext document library. the text is ignored and a warning message is provided. The following configuration files are available: • Enterprise Library Web Part: WebPartViewConfig.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration • IgnoreInvalidTermLabelWithoutWarning: If the input term label does not exist in the term store. see “WebPartColumnsConfig. For information about modifying the columns. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 204 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . To modify these.17 ProviderConfig. This means that a lot of functionality is implemented in so called “providers” which can be extended and replaced. The default setting of the value converter is Options="LengthMustFit. For more information. it is ignored during conversion without a warning message.xml • LiveReports Web Part: LiveReportsWebPartViewConfig.12. When converting a Content Server text to SharePoint managed metadata and the text cannot be resolved against the term store.xml The files contain initial Web Part properties settings and applicable views. see “View management” on page 139. For more information about the view management. 5.IgnoreInvalidTermLabelWithWarning". 5. see the OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint SDK for information on how to implement custom providers and how to register them.xml • LiveReport Result Web Part: LiveReportResultsWebPartViewConfig. This Options setting prevents SharePoint source text from being truncated before it is converted to the Content Server target type. In ProviderConfig.xml” on page 205.12.xml the used providers are registered.xml • Workflow Inbox Web Part: WorkflowInboxWebPartViewConfig.xml Navigation path > Central Administration > Site Actions > View All Site Content > Document Libraries > Opentext > SharePoint > Configuration Note: Enterprise Library Integration uses a so called provider concept. you can either manually change the XML file or change the settings through the view management in the user interface.

see “View management” on page 139. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 205 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .XML available at %CommonProgramFiles%\Microsoft Shared\web server extensions\15\TEMPLATE\<langid>\XML\. This file allows you to define or edit columns that can be selected for different Enterprise Library Web Part views.19 WebPartColumnsConfig.12. you can either manually change the file or change the settings through the view or column management in the user interface. Add the text (for example. see the OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint SDK documentation. For more information about the view management. You can add information about archiving sites using Enterprise Library Integration. see the OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint SDK documentation. For detailed information about customizing Web Parts.xml file is located in the SharePoint > Livelink > Configuration folder in the Opentext document library. 2. the SDK informs you in particular about customizing the following topics and provides sample configurations: • Views • Placeholders for action URLs 5.xml The WebPartColumnsConfig. for example. 5. To change the notification text: 1.20 Changing the notification text for unused sites You can change the text of the notification email that is sent after sites have not been used for a period of time.12. Archive this site). C:\Program Files\Common Files\Microsoft Shared\Web Server Extensions\15\TEMPLATE\1033\XML\. This file is shared by the following Web Parts: • Enterprise Library Web Part • LiveReports Web Part • LiveReport Result Web Part • Workflow Inbox Web Part • Borrowed Items Web Part To modify this file. Defining advanced settings in XML configuration files For detailed information about customizing Web Parts.12. Regarding the Web Part configuration. 3. Open the file DEADWEB. Save the file. 5.

xslt: Layout of item versions page.xslt: Layout of item properties page. TestSiteProfilePage. you must be familiar with XSLT. 2.xslt file that is the style sheet changes only apply to the current instance of the Web Part. To edit style sheets: 1.xslt. You find the resource files in the following locations: • Template files used when creating new web applications/site collections: %CommonProgramFiles%\Microsoft Shared\Web server extensions \15\CONFIG\Resources • Files for a single existing web application: OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 206 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . TestDetailsPage. You can either edit the template that is used when creating new web applications/site collections or change the string tables of each web application or site collection individually.Search . Open the OpenText document library. For example.xslt: Layout of the test results when testing the single query of an archiving profile.WebParts. 5. When modifying the style sheet from within the Web Part. You can edit the style sheet files and display different properties of a document. changes will not be written back to the LivelinkSearchResults. • VersionsPage.14 Customizing GUI strings You can edit the string tables of Enterprise Library Integration to create modified descriptions on the user interface. • TestArchivingPage. The following style sheets are available: • InspectionPage. The LivelinkSearchResults. Open the style sheet you want to edit. For the search results.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration 5.xslt. 3.13 Editing style sheets Several XSLT files contain style sheet information to build the result list after a successful search or to build the pages for viewing a retrieved document. Important To edit the style sheets. • QueryPage. you can define which information will be displayed for documents. click SharePoint and then Livelink . Click SharePoint > Livelink > Pages to view the list of style sheets for document information.xslt file is the template for the Enterprise Library Search Results Web Part layout.xslt: Layout of the pages used to display results of a test archiving run.

resx. only English is supported.resx Search Note: If you use a SharePoint Server Farm.de. Language packages are available for some additional languages.<TwoLetterISOLanguageName>. • English file: ll<name>. content type mapping. scheduled tasks and so on otcore. for example for German ll<name>.14.resx Enterprise Library features and controls llwebparts. document information.resx Enterprise Library specific infrastructure for configuration.resx • Other languages (currently not supported): ll<name>.resx Scheduled archiving and link clean up tasks llsearch.resx Web Parts and Web Part configuration specific to Content Server otbase. you must perform your changes on each web front-end server.resx Services infrastructure for archive and restore llsite. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 207 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .resx Content Server Security Trimmer that ensures that search results are only displayed if a user has reading access llservices.resx Content Server API lllayouts. Customizing GUI strings <drive>:\Inetpub\wwwroot\wss\VirtualDirectories\<generated number of virtual directory>\App_GlobalResources Files are available for English strings and for each additional language supported. profiles and so on llconnection.resx Link cleanup llprotocolhandler.resx Basic infrastructure for configuration.resx Enterprise Library search llsecuritytrimmer.resx Content Server Protocol handler llscheduler.resx Content Server connection and support lllapi.<TwoLetterISOLanguageName>.resx Central Administration llbase.resx Site administration of Enterprise Library Integration llui. By default. 5.resx The following files are available: File name Strings for lladmin.resx or ot<name>.resx or ot<name>. restore.resx Logging and localization support otsearch. Records Management lllinkcleanup.resx User pages for archive.

Notes • Archiving must be in progress to monitor its performance. click Add. click Administrative Tools and select Performance Monitor.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration 5. Click the + icon on the toolbar. documents returned by the CAML query) and passed on to the archive. Select the counters that you want to monitor.15. 3. The following counters are provided: • Archived: Shows the number of successfully archived documents. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 208 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . you must run the PowerShell cmdlet Register-OTArchivingCounters in SharePoint Management Shell to display the OpenText SharePoint Archiving object and performance counters. expand Monitoring Tools and then Performance Monitor.1 Monitoring the archiving performance Each archiving process creates its own instance of performance counters. 5. 6. document cannot be archived. 7. 4. On the Start menu. In the left pane.15 Monitoring the performance 5. • Processed: Shows the number of processed documents (that is. Select the instance. Select the computer that is running the current archiving process. • Before you can monitor the archiving performance. 2. Open the OpenText SharePoint Archiving object. The name of the instance is the name of the profile. To monitor the archiving performance: 1. link cannot be created) during the archiving process. • Failed: Shows the number of documents that failed for any reason (for example. and then click OK.

In the Internet Information Service (IIS) Manager dialog box.xml. 4. links to a SharePoint document that has been moved to Enterprise Library and replaced by a link document are redirected to the document in Enterprise Library automatically. links to the original document get orphaned when a document is moved to Enterprise Library and result in an Document not found error. and then open ISAPI Filters in the IIS section.15. • By default. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 209 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .16 Activating link redirection When a SharePoint document is moved to Enterprise Library. click Administrative Tools > Internet Information Service (IIS) Manager. 3. 2. To monitor the crawling performance: 1. To enable it you must modify the configuration setting for <ProtocolHandlerPerformanceMonitor Enabled>in LivelinkConfig. Activating link redirection 5.dll ISAPI filter is copied to your system.xml” on page 174. see “LivelinkConfig. You need to add this filter in IIS to activate link redirection. For more information. Unlike the original document. Therefore. the original document in SharePoint can be replaced by a link document that points to the document in Enterprise Library. With the installation of Enterprise Library Integration. 3. Click Add to add an ISAPI filter. On the Start menu. and then click OK. the OTLinkRedirector. 2. Select the OpenText SharePoint Indexing object. In the Reliability and Performance Monitor dialog box. 5. open the web site for which you need link redirection.16. On the Start menu. To resolve this issue. To activate link redirection: 1. the link document always has the file extension . 5. Notes • Crawling must be in progress to monitor its performance. the crawling process creates an instance of performance counters named all content sources. click Add.2 Monitoring the crawling performance When crawling a content source for Enterprise Library. select the computer where the crawling process currently runs. Select the counter that you want to monitor. With link redirection. you can use link redirection.URL. click Administrative Tools > Reliability and Performance Monitor. performance monitoring is tuned off and must be enabled.

Click OK. you can select All verbs to configure the handler to respond to all requests (including PROPFIND requests). start IIS Manager. 2.10). 5. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 210 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Enter a Filter name and specify the OTLinkRedirector.ashx file handlers to respond to PROPFIND requests. the . double-click the entry for the SimpleHandlerFactory-Integrated handler.dll.microsoft. see http:// technet. In the middle pane. In the Edit Managed Handler dialog box.16. In the left pane of IIS Manager. To modify handler mapping settings in IIS: 1. click the Verbs tab. double-click Handler Mappings.com/en-us/library/cc730969(v=ws. and add PROPFIND to the list of available verbs. browse to the site configured to use the OTLinkRedirector. 3. 7. By default.ashx file handlers. the OTLinkRedirector. click Request Restrictions. you must modify the handler mapping settings to allow .ashx file handlers are not configured to respond to PROPFIND requests.aspx. In the Handler Mappings list.Chapter 5 Administering Application Governance & Archiving in Central Administration 4.dll ISAPI filter. 4.dll file as the Executable. Click OK.dll ISAPI filter. In the Requests Restrictions dialog box. 5. regardless of the verb sent in the request. 6. select One of the following verbs.1 Enabling users to upload files in Explorer view If you activated link redirection. for example C:\Program Files\Common Files\Microsoft Shared\Web Server Extensions\15\ISAPI \OTLinkRedirector. On the IIS server. you must also modify Internet Information Service (IIS) settings to enable users who are using the Enterprise Library Web Part in Explorer view on a Windows 7 client to upload files to the SharePoint server. If necessary. 8. By default.dll.dll file is located in %CommonProgramFiles%\Microsoft Shared\Web Server Extensions \15\ISAPI\OTLinkRedirector. Note: Alternatively. For more information about handler mapping settings. On the server where you added the OTLinkRedirector. 5. repeat steps 4 to 7 to configure other .

the user clicks the Back to History button.aspx). Displaying SharePoint search results in the Inspection page 5. For more information about how to customize the display template for SharePoint 2013 search results. 5. You can improve the navigation experience for the user by customizing the display template of SharePoint search results.sharepoint-2013-search-service-application. To navigate back to the search results page from the Inspection page. the user can manage the documents.Search Service Application (http://social. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 211 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Note: For general information on the SharePoint 2013 Search Service Application.sharepoint-2013-how-to-configure-search-services-application- en-us. Based on the permissions assigned to the user. If the user clicks on the link of an Enterprise Library document in the search result list. When you add the source. see Microsoft TechNet (http://technet.technet.17. for example SharePoint content.technet. the search results page URL can be appended as the value of the source parameter to all Enterprise Library result links.aspx).17 Displaying SharePoint search results in the Inspection page SharePoint search can use Enterprise Library as a content source and index its documents. see Microsoft TechNet for SharePoint 2013 .microsoft. the Inspection page opens and displays the properties of an Enterprise Library document.com/wiki/contents/ articles/12714. To configure the SharePoint 2013 Search Service Application for using Enterprise Library as a content source.microsoft. the Inspection page displays a Close button to navigate back to the search results page. If you modify the display template.com/wiki/contents/articles/ 12403.microsoft. see Microsoft TechNet for SharePoint 2013: How to configure Search Services Application (http://social. The standard SharePoint search displays results from Enterprise Library along with results from other content sources.com/ en-us/).

.

Part 3 Administering Application Governance & Archiving for SharePoint Online .

Chapter 6
Archiving remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online
sites and documents

In Central Administration, you can archive remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online
sites and documents to Enterprise Library for long-term storage. Archived sites and
documents are stored in Enterprise Library and all users who have Read
permissions for the Enterprise Library folder in which a site or document is archived
can access the archived content. Archived sites and documents automatically inherit
permissions from the parent Enterprise Library folder in which they are archived.
You can optionally archive sites and documents with or without their original
document metadata values.

You can archive remote sites interactively (that is, you can start the archiving
process manually from Central Administration), or you can configure Application
Governance & Archiving to archive remote sites or documents automatically.

Note: You can archive remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online sites and
documents only if you installed the SharePoint Online Support feature in
Application Governance & Archiving. For more information, see OpenText
Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint - Installation Guide
(SPCF-IGD).

Archiving remote sites interactively

When you archive a remote site interactively, you first specify archiving settings on
the Archive Remote Site page in Central Administration. For example, you can
specify archiving settings such as the Enterprise Library folder in which to archive a
site and you can choose to archive a site with or without all of its original document
libraries, lists, or subsites. The archiving process starts immediately after you save
the settings.

You can use this archiving method if, for example, you need to specify different
archiving criteria each time you run the archiving process and you do not need to
archive sites on a regular basis.

Caution
You cannot restore sites or documents back into SharePoint or SharePoint
Online after archiving them interactively. Verify the settings on the Archive
Remote Site page before you start the archiving process.

Archiving remote sites and documents automatically

When you archive remote sites or documents automatically, you first create remote
document library profiles or remote site profiles to define the rules and conditions

OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise
Library Integration – Administration Guide 215
SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1

Chapter 6 Archiving remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online sites and documents

for archiving remote sites or documents. You must then create a scheduled task to
run the archiving process automatically at a specific time or at specific intervals.

You can use this archiving method if, for example, you need to archive remote sites
or documents that meet specific criteria on a regular basis.

6.1 Configuring your environment to archive remote
sites and documents
Before archiving remote content interactively or automatically, you must complete
the following tasks in your on-premises SharePoint environment.

To configure your environment to archive remote content interactively or
automatically:

1. Set up a connection to the Content Server installation that you want to use for
archiving. See “Defining Content Server settings” on page 65.

2. Enable the Records Management functionality in Central Administration if the
OpenText Records Management module is installed in your environment and
you plan to apply Records Management classifications to the archived content.
See “Defining available functionality” on page 78.

3. Specify connection information for one or more remote sites you plan to
archive. See “Specifying connection information for remote sites” on page 217.

4. Optional Define property mappings if you want to archive sites or documents
with their original document metadata values. See “Defining property
mappings for remote sites and documents” on page 219.

Note: If you want to change the default mapping values used to convert
SharePoint field types to Content Server attribute types when you archive
a remote site or document, you can edit a configuration file before defining
property mappings. See “Defining advanced configuration settings for
remote site archiving features“ on page 253.

5. Optional Edit the <ListsExcludedFromArchiving> element in the
ArchivingConfig.xml configuration file if you want to exclude specific
SharePoint or SharePoint Online lists from the archiving process. See
“ArchivingConfig.xml” on page 170.

Configuring your environment to archive remote content automatically

You must complete the following additional tasks if you plan to archive remote
content automatically.

OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise
216 Library Integration – Administration Guide
SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1

6.2. Specifying connection information for remote sites

To configure your environment to archive remote sites and documents
automatically:

1. Create one or more remote library or site profiles. See “Creating local or remote
document library profiles” on page 95 or “Creating a local or remote site
profile” on page 101.

2. Assign the remote document library profiles to document libraries, or remote
site profiles to sites, site collections, or web applications. See “Assigning
document library profiles to document libraries” on page 100 or “Assigning site
profiles to sites, site collections, or web applications” on page 109.

3. Create a scheduled archiving task to run the archiving process automatically.
See “Creating an archiving task” on page 133.

6.2 Specifying connection information for remote
sites
Before archiving a remote site interactively or automatically, you can specify
connection information for remote sites in Central Administration. Specifying
connection information for a remote site enables you to browse and select the site
URL when you define settings to archive a remote site interactively or automatically.

Tip: If you do not specify connection information for a remote site, you can
type the fully qualified URL when defining archiving settings or a remote
profile. However, OpenText recommends that you specify connection
information to reduce possible input errors.

To specify connection information for a remote site:

1. In Central Administration, click OpenText Application Governance &
Archiving.

2. In the SharePoint Online area, click Remote site connections.

3. Click New and specify the following settings:

Site URL
Specify the URL of a remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online site you want
to archive.

Important
You cannot edit the URL after adding a remote site connection entry
to the Remote site connections page. If you want to change a URL
value, you must first delete the entry that contains the URL and then
add a new entry that contains the new URL.

User name
Specify a user account that has read permissions or higher for the site you
want to archive.

OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise
Library Integration – Administration Guide 217
SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1

Chapter 6 Archiving remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online sites and documents

Password
Specify the password for the user account.

4. Click the Click here to verify the remote SharePoint site link to validate the
site URL and credentials.

5. In the Display name text box, specify a name to display for the site on the
Remote Site Connections page in Central Administration.

Notes

• You must specify a unique display name. Duplicate names are not
permitted.
• If the Display name text box is empty when you validate the site URL
and credentials, Application Governance & Archiving will populate the
Display Name text box with the name of the remote site if the validation
process is successful.

6. Click OK.

To edit a remote site connection entry:

1. In Central Administration, click OpenText Application Governance &
Archiving.

2. In the SharePoint Online area, click Remote site connections.

3. In the list, select the remote site connection entry you want to edit.

4. Click Settings.

5. Edit the values as needed.

6. Click OK.

To delete a remote site connection entry:

1. In Central Administration, click OpenText Application Governance &
Archiving.

2. In the SharePoint Online area, click Remote site connections.

3. In the list, select the remote site connection entry you want to delete.

4. Click Delete.

5. When prompted to delete the entry, click Yes.

Note: You cannot delete remote site connection entries that are currently used
by a remote library or site profile.

OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise
218 Library Integration – Administration Guide
SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1

6.3. Defining property mappings for remote sites and documents

6.3 Defining property mappings for remote sites and
documents
If you want to archive a remote site or document with its original document
metadata values, you must run a property mapping tool called
MappingGenerator.exe before running the archiving process.

When you run the tool, content types and columns in SharePoint or SharePoint
Online are mapped to categories and attributes you define in Content Server. The
property mappings are then stored in a configuration file called
PropertyMappingConfig.xml, which is created automatically in your on-premises
SharePoint environment after you run the property mapping tool.

When you subsequently archive a remote site interactively or automatically, the
values of the mapped content types and columns are applied to the archived
Enterprise Library documents as corresponding Content Server categories and
attributes during the archiving process. Application Governance & Archiving uses
the property mapping values in the most recent version of the
PropertyMappingConfig.xml file to migrate the document metadata values to
Content Server categories. If needed, you can map a content type to multiple
Content Server categories.

Notes
• You must use the MappingGenerator.exe tool to define property mappings
for remote sites and documents. Mappings specified on the Content type
mapping page in Central Administration apply only to content archived
from an on-premises SharePoint environment.
• For more information about the PropertyMappingConfig.xml file, see
“Defining advanced configuration settings for remote site archiving
features“ on page 253.

6.3.1 Preparing to run the property mapping tool
Before running the property mapping tool, you must do the following:
• Download the property mapping tool.
• Create a Content Server category for each content type you want to map.
• Install the SharePoint Server 2013 Client Components SDK, if needed.
• Verify administrator account permissions.

OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise
Library Integration – Administration Guide 219
SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1

if a SharePoint or SharePoint Online content type contains two columns called Customer and Date. you must create a Content Server category for each content type you want to map. During the archiving process. • You must create the categories on a Content Server installation that is defined on the Content Servers page in Central Administration. see “Defining Content Server settings” on page 65.com/knowledge/llisapi.opentext. In each category.2 Creating Content Server categories Before running the property mapping tool.1 Downloading the property mapping tool The property mapping tool is available in the OpenText Knowledge Center (https:// knowledge. The attribute names must match the display names of the columns in your SharePoint or SharePoint Online environment.Chapter 6 Archiving remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online sites and documents 6. For example. 6.exe file and save it to your on-premises SharePoint farm. the column values are automatically converted to attribute types based on the mappings specified in the PropertyTypesConfig. refer to the Content Server documentation. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 220 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . the corresponding values will not be migrated during the archiving process. If you do not create categories or attributes for specific content types or columns.3.1. you must create a Content Server category with two attributes called Customer and Date.3.1.dll/Open/14273139).xml configuration file for SharePoint Online. You must download the MappingGenerator. For more information. Notes • You only need to create categories and attributes for the content types and columns containing values you want to migrate to Enterprise Library. you must define attributes that correspond to the columns defined in the content type. For more information about creating categories. see “Defining advanced configuration settings for remote site archiving features“ on page 253. • The attributes that you define in a category can have a different type than the columns defined in SharePoint or SharePoint Online. For more information.

Notes • The -server parameter value is required only if the category you want to map is located on a Content Server installation that is not set as the default server on the Content Server settings page in Central Administration.1. and <categories> is the name of a Content Server category or a comma- separated list of categories to which the content type will be mapped. you must use an administrator account with the following permissions: • Local administrator permissions • Farm administrator permissions in the on-premises SharePoint environment • Permissions to access categories in Content Server 6. Log in to the on-premises SharePoint server farm as an administrator that has the permissions required to run the property mapping tool.3. <password> is the user account password.3. go to the folder in which you saved the MappingGenerator. Run the following command: MappingGenerator -url "<site_URL>" -user "<user_name>" -password "<password>" -contentType "<content_type_name>" -server "<unique_ID>" -categories "<categories>" where <site_URL> is the URL of the remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online site that contains the content types to be mapped.3.1.3 Installing the SharePoint Server 2013 Client Components SDK If you are using SharePoint Foundation 2013 and your SharePoint or SharePoint Online environment contains taxonomy column values that you want to migrate when you archive remote sites or documents. 2.2 Running the property mapping tool To run the property mapping tool: 1.exe file.3.Installation Guide (SPCF-IGD). OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 221 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . 3. 6. 6. you must install the SharePoint Server 2013 Client Components SDK in your on-premises SharePoint Foundation farm before running the property mapping tool.4 Verifying account permissions To run the property mapping tool. For more information. Defining property mappings for remote sites and documents 6. <unique_ID> is the unique ID defined for the Content Server installation that contains the categories to be mapped. <content_type_name> is the name of an existing SharePoint or SharePoint Online content type you want to map. At a command prompt. <user_name> is the name of a user account that has read permissions or higher for the site. see the OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint .

• In SharePoint or SharePoint Online. • For the -contentType parameter value. 3. You can run the tool as many times as needed to map additional content types.xml file.Category2" To update property mappings after running the tool: • Run the property mapping tool again with the new parameter values.xml file to remove the corresponding property mapping values. you must specify the unique ID value that is currently defined for the Content Server installation on the Content Server settings page in Central Administration. define property mappings before running the archiving process. To remove property mappings after running the tool: • Edit the PropertyMappingConfig. For more information on setting a default server and defining unique ID values. see “Editing configuration files for remote site archiving features” on page 253. To archive a remote site interactively: 1. see “Defining Content Server settings” on page 65. For more information.Chapter 6 Archiving remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online sites and documents For the -server parameter. click OpenText Application Governance & Archiving. Specify the following settings: OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 222 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . you must have Read permissions or higher for the site you want to archive. In Central Administration. In the SharePoint Online area. click Archive Remote Site. a content type called Financial Documents is mapped to two Content Server categories called Category1 and Category2: mappinggenerator -url "http://MyServer/site/page" -user "domain\jsmith" -password "password" -ContentType "Financial Documents" -server "3314dd68-479d-45dd- a123-8fcd511de5f0" -categories "Category1. 2. The values will be updated in the PropertyMappingConfig. you can only specify one content type at a time. For more information. Example 6-1: Mapping a content type to two categories In the following example. see “Defining property mappings for remote sites and documents” on page 219.4 Archiving a remote site interactively Notes • If you want to archive a site with its original document metadata values. 6.

you will be prompted to perform additional steps to avoid duplicate names during the archiving process. the URL and its corresponding user name and password are populated in the User name and Password text boxes. Lists and Libraries Select Archive libraries if you want to archive the site with all of its existing document libraries and select Archive lists if you want to archive the site with all of its existing lists. Password Specify the password for the SharePoint Online user account. Note: If you specify the name of a previously archived site or an existing item in Content Server. Each archived site must have a unique name. If you browse and select a URL. For more information. even if single-sign on (SSO) authentication is configured. User name Specify a SharePoint Online user account that has Read permissions or higher for the site you want to archive. 5. Note: You cannot specify a local domain account. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 223 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Archiving a remote site interactively Site URL Specify the URL of the top-level site you want to archive. 6. see “Specifying connection information for remote sites” on page 217. Click the Click here to verify the remote SharePoint site link to validate the URL and user credentials. Specify the following settings: Enterprise Library Folder Select the folder in which to archive the site in Enterprise Library. A remote site is available to be selected if you defined connection information for the site on the Remote Site Connections page in Central Administration. 4. If this check box is cleared. Sub Sites Select Archive the complete site tree to archive the site with all of its subsites.4. but at least one of these check boxes must be selected when you run the archiving process. For more information. You can select either one or both of these check boxes to archive the remote site. only the top-level site will be archived. Name and Description Enter a name and description that will be used to identify the archived site in Enterprise Library. You can type a fully qualified URL in the text box or you can browse and select a URL. see “Resolving errors after archiving a remote site interactively” on page 226. You can clear one of these check boxes if you do not want to archive either document libraries or lists with the site.

the classification has been inherited from a parent folder or a default classification exists. Metadata for any previous document versions will not be archived. Note: The metadata for only the most recent document versions will be archived. • Include the last major and the last minor versions: Archives both the last major version (for example 2. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 224 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . clear the Delete This Site check box before running the archiving process. Note: This option is available only if OpenText Records Management is installed in your Content Server environment. Document Versions Select which document versions to archive. • Include all major versions: Archives only the major versions. The last minor versions are not archived. even if they are newer than the last major version.Chapter 6 Archiving remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online sites and documents Note: When Archive libraries is selected. Delete This Site Select this option to delete the original site in SharePoint or SharePoint Online after it is archived. The minor versions are not archived. The site will then be available in Enterprise Library only.2). Records Management Classification If you want to apply a Records Management classification to the archived site in Enterprise Library. It can be either a minor or a major version. Warning The complete site with all of its subsites will be deleted from SharePoint or SharePoint Online. If you do not want to lose the subsites. documents that are currently checked out in SharePoint or SharePoint Online will be archived. If you want to keep the metadata for previous document versions in SharePoint or SharePoint Online. • Include all major and minor versions: Archives all major and minor versions. • Include the last major version: Archives only the last major version. select Archive the complete site tree to archive them with the site. • Include the most recent version: Archives the last version. click the link below Records Management classification and select the classification you want to apply. If the name of a Records Management classification is already displayed. along with documents that are currently checked in.0) and the last minor version (for example 2.

see “Analyzing remote site archiving results” on page 225. Important Do not close or navigate away from the Archive Remote Site page until the archiving process is complete. • Archived and Deleted: Indicates that the complete site was archived in Enterprise Library and deleted in SharePoint or SharePoint Online. Documents skipped The number of documents that were not archived because your SharePoint or SharePoint Online environment was set up to ignore these documents before you ran the archiving process (for example. When the archiving process is complete.4. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 225 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . For more information. 6. Site archiving status The result of the archiving process: • Archived: Indicates that the complete site was archived in Enterprise Library and the original site also remains in SharePoint or SharePoint Online. Content Server location The path and name of the Enterprise Library folder in which the site was archived. the Site archiving results dialog box displays the results of the archiving process. 6. you will be prompted to resolve archiving errors. Click Save to start the archiving process. the Site Archiving Results dialog box also displays the number of documents that were not archived successfully. see “Resolving errors after archiving a remote site interactively” on page 226. Click Archive Another Site to return to the Archive Remote Site page or click OK to return to the main Application Governance & Archiving page.4. • Archived With Error: Indicates that the site was partially archived in Enterprise Library. document libraries were filtered or specific rules were set up on the SharePoint server). but some documents or items were not archived because of errors. Note: If the archiving process does not complete successfully. and the reasons why the documents were not archived. the Site archiving results dialog box displays the following information: SharePoint site The URL of the top-level SharePoint or SharePoint Online site that was archived. Documents archived The number of documents that were archived in Enterprise Library. 7.1 Analyzing remote site archiving results After you archive a remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online site interactively. In this case. Archiving a remote site interactively 6. For more information. the document names.

Documents not archived successfully The number of documents that were not archived because of errors (for example. When you save your changes. Cancel site archiving Select this option to cancel the site archiving process. SharePoint objects that were not archived successfully A list containing the SharePoint locations of items that were not archived because of errors and the reasons why the items could not be archived. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 226 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . For more information. You can optionally specify new settings on the Archive remote site page in Central Administration and start the archiving process again at a later time. If you attempt to archive a site using the same name as an existing Enterprise Library item. This list appears only when the result of the site archiving process is Archived With Error. you can choose to archive the site using a different name or cancel the site archiving process. 6. files or attachments were missing during the archiving process).4. If applicable. Update the previously archived site with additional content Select this option to merge the new SharePoint or SharePoint Online content with the previously archived content in Enterprise Library.2 Resolving errors after archiving a remote site interactively If you attempt to archive a remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online site using the same name as a previously archived site or an existing item in Enterprise Library. see “Defining logging settings” on page 82.Chapter 6 Archiving remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online sites and documents Note: You can view information about skipped documents in the Application Governance & Archiving log files if you set the logging option for the SharePoint Online category to Verbose. the site is archived using the new name. all previously archived lists will be deleted and replaced with updated lists in Enterprise Library. A new version will be added for each document in Enterprise Library. The following actions are available if you attempt to archive a site using the same name as a previously archived site: Archive the site again using a different name Select this option to specify a different name for the site on the Archive remote site page. the archiving process stops automatically and you are prompted to perform additional steps to resolve the duplicate names.

For more information about defining logging settings and accessing log files.5. Reviewing Application Governance & Archiving for SharePoint Online log files 6. In the log files. see “Defining logging settings” on page 82 OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 227 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . 6. you can review the log files in your on-premises SharePoint environment to monitor events that are specific to Application Governance & Archiving for SharePoint Online.5 Reviewing Application Governance & Archiving for SharePoint Online log files After archiving remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online sites or documents interactively or automatically. these events are listed under a heading called SharePoint Online.

.

Notes • Before you add and configure either of these apps. you can also use this app to work with Content Server business workspace items. documents and folders) in SharePoint Online. • OpenText Enterprise Library for Extended ECM app: Use this app to browse and work with Enterprise Library items (for example.Enterprise Library Integration – User Guide (SHLES-UGD).Chapter 7 Installing and configuring OpenText Enterprise Library apps Apps are stand-alone applications that you can add to SharePoint Online sites for specialized functionality. see OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint . documents and folders) in SharePoint Online. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 229 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . but also provides an option to display a sidebar widget for business workspaces. Overview of the installation and configuration process An administrator must first do the following: 1. OpenText Content Server must be installed in your environment with the Content Server UI Widgets module and Content Server REST API. you must use a web browser that has network access to Content Server. you can add apps to display information or incorporate external applications into a site. For example. you can also use this app to work with Content Server business workspace items. For more information. If the OpenText ECMLink for SAP Solutions module is installed in your Content Server environment. For more information about these apps. This app provides the same functionality as the OpenText Enterprise Library app. see section 11 “Using OpenText Enterprise Library apps and app parts” in OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint .Installation Guide (SPCF-IGD). you can add and configure the following OpenText Enterprise Library apps in SharePoint Online: • OpenText Enterprise Library app: Use this app to browse and work with Enterprise Library items (for example. If the OpenText ECMLink for SAP Solutions module is installed in your Content Server environment. • When installing and configuring apps. If you want to allow users to browse and work with Enterprise Library content or business workspaces in SharePoint Online. Download the OpenText Enterprise Library app file to install.

com/knowledge/llisapi. 4. Optional Customize the appearance of the OpenText Enterprise Library app.Chapter 7 Installing and configuring OpenText Enterprise Library apps 2. 3.app: Download this file if you want to allow users to add the OpenText Enterprise Library app. 7. 7.app) is included as a separate file with the SharePoint Services for Extended ECM installation package. 2. • OpenText Enterprise Library for Extended ECM. The OpenText Enterprise Library for Extended ECM app file (OpenText Enterprise Library for Extended ECM. 6. 5. Both installation packages are available in the OpenText Knowledge Center (https://knowledge. Configure the OpenText Enterprise Library app.app: Download this file if you want to allow users to add the OpenText Enterprise Library for Extended ECM app. Add the OpenText Enterprise Library app to an app catalog site. The OpenText Enterprise Library app file (OpenText Enterprise Library. Optional Configure the OpenText Enterprise Library app part. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 230 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . In SharePoint Online.dll/Open/14273139). Optional Configure how context menus are displayed and which object types appear in the OpenText Enterprise Library app or app part. Optional Add an OpenText Enterprise Library app part to a SharePoint Online page.app) is included as a separate file with the Enterprise Library Web Parts for Microsoft SharePoint installation package. Optional Configure the Content Server and SharePoint Online environments for single sign-on authentication.1 Downloading OpenText Enterprise Library app files You must first download the OpenText Enterprise Library app file that you want to allow users to add. an administrator or user can then do the following: 1.opentext. The following app files are available: • OpenText Enterprise Library. Add the OpenText Enterprise Library app to a SharePoint Online site.

7.2. Adding OpenText Enterprise Library apps to an app catalog site

7.2 Adding OpenText Enterprise Library apps to an
app catalog site
Before users can add the OpenText Enterprise Library or OpenText Enterprise
Library for Extended ECM app to a SharePoint Online site, you must create an app
catalog site and add the OpenText Enterprise Library.app or OpenText
Enterprise Library for Extended ECM.app file to the app catalog site. When an
app is added to an app catalog site, users can add the app to all site collections and
subsites in SharePoint Online.

For more information about app catalog sites, see the following Microsoft web site:
http://office.microsoft.com/en-ca/sharepoint-help/use-the-app-catalog-to-make-
custom-business-apps-available-for-your-sharepoint-online-environment-
HA102772362.aspx

To add an app to an app catalog site:

1. Sign into the Office 365 Administration Center as an administrator.

2. If needed, create an app catalog site in SharePoint Online.

a. Click Admin at the top of the page and select SharePoint.

b. In the left pane, click Apps, and then click App Catalog.

c. Select Create a new app catalog site, and then click OK.

d. Enter the required information for the new app catalog site, and click OK.

3. Add the app file to the app catalog site.

a. On the home page of the app catalog site, click Distribute apps for
SharePoint.

b. In the apps library, click new app.

c. Browse to the location of the app file, select the file, and click Open.

d. If needed, specify comments about the app and click OK.

e. In the properties dialog box, specify the required information for the app.
Ensure that the Enabled check box is selected so that users can access the
app.

f. Click Save.

OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise
Library Integration – Administration Guide 231
SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1

Chapter 7 Installing and configuring OpenText Enterprise Library apps

7.3 Adding OpenText Enterprise Library apps to a
SharePoint Online site
You must add the OpenText Enterprise Library or OpenText Enterprise Library for
Extended ECM app to the SharePoint Online site in which you want to browse and
work with Enterprise Library items or business workspaces.

Note: Before you can add the app to a site, you must make the app available in
a SharePoint Online app catalog site. For more information, see “Adding
OpenText Enterprise Library apps to an app catalog site” on page 231.

To add an app to a SharePoint Online site:

1. Sign into SharePoint Online using an account with Site Administrator
permissions or higher.

2. In SharePoint Online, create a new site or browse to an existing site in which
you want to add the app.

3. Click Settings and select Add an app.

4. On the Your Apps page, in the left pane, click From Your Organization.

5. Click the entry for the OpenText Enterprise Library app.

6. When prompted to trust the app, click Trust It.

7.4 Configuring OpenText Enterprise Library apps
You must configure the OpenText Enterprise Library or OpenText Enterprise
Library for Extended ECM app to allow it to communicate with Content Server.
Also, you can optionally configure the app to display the contents of a specific
Content Server folder and a specific number of Content Server items by default.

You can specify configuration settings on the Enterprise Library settings page in
SharePoint Online or you can edit a configuration file called
EnterpriseLibraryAppConfig.xml. The settings available on the Enterprise
Library settings page are identical to those available in the configuration file. All of
the settings that you save on the Enterprise Library settings page are also saved in
the EnterpriseLibraryAppConfig.xml file and vice versa.

Tip: You can use either method to configure an app. However, for a simpler
configuration process, consider specifying the configuration settings on the
Enterprise Library settings page.

The configuration file is located in a document library that was automatically added
to your SharePoint Online environment when the app was added to the site. If you
choose to edit the configuration file, the changes take effect after you upload a new
version of the file to the document library.

OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise
232 Library Integration – Administration Guide
SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1

7.4. Configuring OpenText Enterprise Library apps

7.4.1 Specifying configuration settings for an OpenText
Enterprise Library app
To specify configuration settings on the Enterprise Library settings page:

1. Sign into your SharePoint Online site using an account with Site Administrator
permissions or higher.

2. In the left pane, browse to the site in which you added the OpenText Enterprise
Library or OpenText Enterprise Library for Extended ECM app.

3. Click Settings .

4. Click Enterprise Library Settings.

5. On the Enterprise Library settings page, specify the following settings:

Content Server URL
Specify the fully qualified URL of the Content Server installation you want
to use (for example, https://MyWebHost/otcs/cs.exe).
The URL must point to the Content Server login page and have the form
https://<host>:<port>/<cgi_folder_mapping>/<interface>, where
<host> is the fully qualified DNS name or IP address of the web server,
<cgi_folder_mapping> (virtual directory alias) is the text string that is mapped
to the <Content_Server_Home>/cgi/ folder on the web or application
server used by Content Server, and <interface> is the name of the .exe
or .dll file that handles web client transactions in the Content Server
environment (for example, cs.exe if you are using a CGI script or
llisapi.dll if you are using an ISAPI extension).

Notes
• You must specify a URL that starts with https. When using the app
to connect to Content Server, you must use a secured SSL (HTTPS)
connection.
• For more information about setting up Content Server, see the
OpenText Content Server - Installation Guide (LLESCOR-IGD).

URL Prefix
Specify the URL prefix (virtual directory alias) that is configured for the
Content Server installation you want to use. The URL prefix is a text string
that is mapped to the Content Server support directory on the web server
used by Content Server. For more information, see the OpenText Content
Server - Installation Guide (LLESCOR-IGD).

Enterprise Library folder
Click the link under Enterprise Library folder. In the Select a Container
dialog box, select the Content Server folder you want the OpenText
Enterprise Library app to display by default.

OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise
Library Integration – Administration Guide 233
SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1

Chapter 7 Installing and configuring OpenText Enterprise Library apps

Tips
• You can type a partial or full name in the Filter by field to reduce
the number of items displayed in the dialog box.
• You can click the Type or Name column headings to sort the list
according to object types or names.

Show Sidebar
Set this option to enable or disable faceted browsing in the OpenText
Enterprise Library or OpenText Enterprise Library for Extended ECM app.
By default, this option is set to Yes and faceted browsing is enabled.
For more information about faceted browsing, see section 11.8 “Using
faceted browsing in OpenText Enterprise Library apps or app parts” in
OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint -
Enterprise Library Integration – User Guide (SHLES-UGD).

Important
Before using faceted browsing, refer to the Release Notes for more
information.

Page Size
Specify the number of items to display in the OpenText Enterprise Library
or OpenText Enterprise Library for Extended ECM app at a time. By
default, 10 items are displayed.
Enable SSO
Set this option to specify whether the OpenText Enterprise Library or
OpenText Enterprise Library for Extended ECM app uses single sign-on
(SSO) authentication to access Content Server. By default, this option is set
to No and SSO authentication is not used. If you select Yes, SSO
authentication must be configured in both SharePoint Online and Content
Server. For more information, see “Configuring your environment for single
sign-on authentication ” on page 247.
Show Extended ECM Side Bar

Note: This setting is available only for the OpenText Enterprise
Library for Extended ECM app.

Set this option to specify whether the OpenText Enterprise Library for
Extended ECM app displays a sidebar widget for the business workspace
shown in the app. If you select Yes, the OpenText ECMLink for SAP
Solutions module must be installed in Content Server.
6. Click Save.

To specify configuration settings using the EnterpriseLibraryAppConfig.xml
file:

1. Sign into your SharePoint Online site using an account with Site Administrator
permissions or higher.

OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise
234 Library Integration – Administration Guide
SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1

7.4. Configuring OpenText Enterprise Library apps

2. In the left pane, browse to the site in which you added the OpenText Enterprise
Library or OpenText Enterprise Library for Extended ECM app.

3. Click Settings .

4. Click Configuration Files.

5. Download and open the EnterpriseLibraryAppConfig.xml file in a text
editor.

6. Specify the following values as needed:

<ContentServerURL>
Specify the fully qualified URL of the Content Server installation you want
to use (for example, https://MyWebHost/otcs/cs.exe).

<URLPrefix>
Specify the URL prefix (virtual directory alias) that is configured for the
Content Server installation you want to use. The URL prefix is a text string
that is mapped to the Content Server support directory on your web server.
By default, this value is /img.

<RootNode>
Specify the path of the Content Server folder to display in the OpenText
Enterprise Library app by default. The path must have the form
<Parent_Node_ID>:<Root_Node_ID>:<Root_Node_Path>, where
<Parent_Node_ID> is the node ID of the parent folder or workspace that
contains the folder you want to display in the app, <Root_Node_ID> is the
node ID of the folder you want to display in the app, and <Root_Node_Path>
is a text string containing the path and name of the folder (for example,
2000:8925:Enterprise &gt; &gt; MyFolder).
The <Root_Node_Path> value specifies the display name and path for the
folder in the SharePoint Online interface. This value must be XML-encoded,
so if you want to include special characters such as the greater than symbol
(<) or ampersand (&), you must specify entity references such as &gt; and &
amp;.

<PageSize>
Specify the number of items to display in the OpenText Enterprise Library
or OpenText Enterprise Library for Extended ECM app at a time. By
default, 10 items are displayed.

<ShowSidebar>
Set this option to enable or disable faceted browsing in the OpenText
Enterprise Library or OpenText Enterprise Library for Extended ECM app.
By default, this option is set to yes and faceted browsing is enabled.

Important
Before using faceted browsing, refer to the Release Notes for more
information.

OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise
Library Integration – Administration Guide 235
SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1

Chapter 7 Installing and configuring OpenText Enterprise Library apps

<SSOEnabled>
Set this option to specify whether the OpenText Enterprise Library or
OpenText Enterprise Library for Extended ECM app uses single sign-on
(SSO) authentication to access Content Server. By default, this option is set
to no and SSO authentication is not used. If you specify yes, SSO
authentication must be configured in both SharePoint Online and Content
Server. For more information, see “Configuring your environment for single
sign-on authentication ” on page 247.

<ShowxECMSidebar>

Note: This element is available only for the OpenText Enterprise
Library for Extended ECM app.

Set this option to specify whether the OpenText Enterprise Library for
Extended ECM app displays a sidebar widget for the business workspace
shown in the app. If you specify yes, the OpenText ECMLink for SAP
Solutions module must be installed in your Content Server environment.

7. Save your changes and upload a new version of the
EnterpriseLibraryAppConfig.xml file to the document library.

7.5 Customizing the appearance of OpenText
Enterprise Library apps
By default, OpenText Enterprise Library apps use a jQuery theme, which is
configured to display the apps in styles and colors that match those used in the
standard SharePoint Office interface.

If you want to customize the appearance of OpenText Enterprise Library apps, you
can provide a custom cascading style sheet (CSS) to replace the default style sheet
used by the apps in SharePoint Online. For example, in the style sheet, you can add
new styles, change the font and background colors, and customize the appearance of
user interface controls.

For more information, see the OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for
SharePoint SDK documentation in the OpenText Knowledge Center (https://
knowledge.opentext.com/knowledge/llisapi.dll?func=ll&objId=3045752&
objAction=browse&sort=name&viewType=1).

OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise
236 Library Integration – Administration Guide
SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1

7.6. Viewing the app version number and installation details

7.6 Viewing the app version number and installation
details
After adding an OpenText Enterprise Library app in SharePoint Online, you can
view app details such as the version number and the date the app was installed.

To view the app version number and installation details:

1. In SharePoint Online, browse to a site that contains the OpenText Enterprise
Library or OpenText Enterprise Library for Extended ECM app.

2. In the left pane, click Site Contents.

3. On the Site Contents page, hover your mouse pointer anywhere in the app, and
click the ellipsis icon in the top-right corner of the app. The version number is
displayed in the message box.

4. If you want to view additional details about the app, click About or Details.

7.7 Adding an OpenText Enterprise Library app part
to a SharePoint Online page
You can optionally add the OpenText Enterprise Library or OpenText Enterprise
Library for Extended ECM app part to a SharePoint Online page if you want to
display and work with Enterprise Library content or business workspaces on a page
other than the Site Contents page.

For more information about adding an app part, see the Microsoft documentation:
http://office.microsoft.com/en-ca/office365-sharepoint-online-enterprise-help/add-
an-app-part-to-a-page-HA103995460.aspx

To add an OpenText Enterprise Library app part to a SharePoint Online page:

1. Sign into your SharePoint Online site using an account that has permissions to
edit SharePoint Online pages.

2. Browse to and open the SharePoint Online page in which to add the app part.

3. Click Settings and select Edit page.

4. Click the location on the page where you want to add the app part.

5. In the Insert area of the ribbon, click App Part.

6. Under Parts, browse to and select the OpenText Enterprise Library or
OpenText Enterprise Library for Extended ECM app part, and click Add.

7. Save your changes.

OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise
Library Integration – Administration Guide 237
SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1

8 Configuring OpenText Enterprise Library app parts When an OpenText Enterprise Library app part is added to a page. You can edit the app part properties (for example. refer to the Content Server Administration Online Help. 3. by default. Edit the settings in the right panel. the node ID is 2000. For more information. Note: For more information about the Enterprise Library Settings page. 6. By default. 4. • Node ID: Specify the node ID of the Content Server folder or workspace you want to display in the app part. you can edit the app part settings directly within the page in which the app part was added. appearance and layout properties) and change the Content Server settings used by the app part. refer to the SharePoint Online documentation. • Content Server URL Prefix: Specify the URL prefix (virtual directory alias) for the Content Server installation you want to use. see “Configuring OpenText Enterprise Library apps” on page 232.Chapter 7 Installing and configuring OpenText Enterprise Library apps 7. The URL prefix is a text string that is mapped to the support directory during the installation of Content Server. appearance. Click the arrow icon that appears in the top-right corner of the app part and select Edit Web Part. Browse to and open the SharePoint Online page that contains the OpenText Enterprise Library or OpenText Enterprise Library for Extended ECM app part you want to modify. To configure an OpenText Enterprise Library app part: 1. The following settings are specific to OpenText Enterprise Library app parts: Enterprise Library • Content Server URL: Specify the URL of the Content Server installation you want to use. and advanced settings). Click Settings and select Edit page. By default. Note: For more information on the general app part settings (that is. layout. If you want to override these settings. this value is /img. Hover your mouse pointer anywhere in the app part. 5. Sign into your SharePoint Online site using an account that has permissions to edit SharePoint Online pages. 2. the app part inherits the app settings defined by an administrator on the Enterprise Library Settings page. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 238 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . which corresponds to the Enterprise Workspace.

Displaying cases from OpenText Template Workspaces If the OpenText Template Workspaces module is configured in your Content Server environment. You can also specify the order in which items appear in context menus. only folders or documents) and specific context menu items for different object types. For more information about faceted browsing. you must add an <Object Type> element for each case you want to display. Important If you enable faceted browsing. you can display and work with cases in OpenText Enterprise Library apps and app parts.9.xml file elements and attributes” on page 240. The configuration changes take effect after you upload a new version of the configuration file to the document library.xml. 7. Click OK. you can edit a configuration file called ObjectTypeconfig. 7. • Show Sidebar: Allows you to enable or disable faceted browsing in the app part. refer to the Release Notes for more information before using this option.xml file. For more information about the <Object Type> element. 8. see “ObjectTypeConfig.Enterprise Library Integration – User Guide (SHLES-UGD). Displaying specific object types and context menu items in OpenText Enterprise Library apps and app parts • Page Size: Specify the number of Enterprise Library items you want to display in the app part at a time. 7. This file is located in a pre- configured document library that was added to your SharePoint Online environment when the OpenText Enterprise Library app was added to your site. you must specify the subtype ID that corresponds to the case defined in Content Server. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 239 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .8 “Using faceted browsing in OpenText Enterprise Library apps or app parts” in OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint . To customize context menus and display specific object types. see section 11.9 Displaying specific object types and context menu items in OpenText Enterprise Library apps and app parts You can optionally configure OpenText Enterprise Library apps and app parts to display specific Content Server object types (for example. Click Save. Within this element. In the ObjectTypeconfig.

if you delete an element that corresponds to an object type. see “ObjectTypeConfig. Save your changes and upload a new version of the ObjectTypeConfig. Sign into a SharePoint Online site using an account with Site Administrator permissions or higher.xml file for an OpenText Enterprise Library app and app part Tip: Before editing the ObjectTypeConfig. To edit the ObjectTypeConfig.xml file. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 240 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Do not edit this value. For example.1 Editing the ObjectTypeConfig.Chapter 7 Installing and configuring OpenText Enterprise Library apps 7.2 ObjectTypeConfig.xml file elements and attributes The ObjectTypeConfig.xml file was created. Notes • All attribute values are case-sensitive and must be enclosed in quotation marks. <objectTypeConfig> The root element of the ObjectTypeConfig. browse to and open the OpenText Enterprise Library app that you want to configure.xml file.xml file.9. In the left pane.xml file for an OpenText Enterprise Library app and app part contains the following elements and attributes.xml file in a text editor. Click Settings and select Configuration Files. Download and open the ObjectTypeConfig. 5. all instances of the object type will be hidden in the app and app part. 7.xml file to suit the needs of your environment. 2. save a backup copy of the original file. 4. 6.xml file to the document library. For more information. This element has the following attributes: configVersion Specifies the Application Governance & Archiving version for which the ObjectTypeConfig.9. Edit the ObjectTypeConfig. the corresponding user interface item will be hidden in the OpenText Enterprise Library app and app part. 3.xml file for an OpenText Enterprise Library app and app part: 1.xml file elements and attributes” on page 240. • If you delete an element from the ObjectTypeConfig.

Also. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 241 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .xml file are applied to the OpenText Enterprise Library app and app part when you upload the file to the document library. <objectTypes> The container element for one or more <objectType> elements. Displaying specific object types and context menu items in OpenText Enterprise Library apps and app parts disabled Specifies whether the settings defined in the ObjectTypeConfig. For documents.9. the following menu items are displayed by default: • Properties • Delete • Open • Copy • Move • Links • Audit For object types other than documents and container items. default context menu items are displayed for each object type. the Properties menu item is displayed by default. the following menu items are displayed by default: • Properties • Add Version • Delete • Open • Download • Copy • Move • Links • Reserve • Audit • Versions For container items such as folders. Instead. the app and app part display all of the object types that are available and defined in Content Server. You can specify one of the following values: • false (default): The settings defined in the file are applied to the app and app part when the file is uploaded. 7. • true: The settings defined in the file do not take effect when the file is uploaded.

set the Show Sidebar option on the Enterprise Library settings page to No.Chapter 7 Installing and configuring OpenText Enterprise Library apps <objectType> Defines the display settings for a Content Server object type (for example. • For more information about node types.Content Server Administration (LLESWBA- H-AGD). see the Release Notes. 0 corresponds to Content Server folders and 144 corresponds to Content Server documents. Note: If you hide one or more object types. and you want to display a case in the app or app part.xml file. You can specify the following values: • true (default): Displays the default context menu for the object type (that is. <actions> The container element for one or more <menuItemReference> elements. You can specify one of the following values: • true (default): All instances of the object type are displayed in the app and app part. For more information. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 242 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . see OpenText Content Server Admin Online Help . Each <objectType> element represents a different object type. The <actions> element has the following attribute: useOriginalMenu Specifies whether a default or custom context menu is displayed for the object type specified by the typeID attribute of the parent <objectType> element. visible Specifies whether the object type is displayed or hidden in the OpenText Enterprise Library app and app part. For example. This element has the following attributes: typeID Specifies the node type number that corresponds to the Content Server object type for which you want to configure display settings. the comment elements that appear before most <objectType> elements indicate the corresponding object types. • false: All instances of the object type are hidden from the app and app part. any attribute values that you specify for the child <menuItemReference> elements do not take effect). specify the subtype ID that corresponds to the case defined in Content Server. If you are using the OpenText Template Workspaces module in Content Server. Tips • In the ObjectTypeConfig. a document or folder).

<menuItemReference> Defines the settings for a context menu item. To configure the menu items for the object type. Within the <actions> element. you can specify the following values: • delete • default (displays the menu item that corresponds to the default action defined for object type in Content Server) • copy • move • links • reserve • unreserve • properties_general (displays the General properties menu item) • properties_audit (displays the Audit properties menu item) • properties_versions (displays the Versions properties menu item) For container items such as folders. If you want to display a horizontal line to separate menu items. This element has the following attributes: menuID Specifies the ID that corresponds to the context menu item you want to display in the app and app part. you can specify a hyphen character (-) for this attribute. you can specify the following values: • delete • default (displays the menu item that corresponds to the default action defined for object type in Content Server) • copy • move • links • properties_general (displays the General properties menu item) • properties_audit (displays the Audit properties menu item) OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 243 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Displaying specific object types and context menu items in OpenText Enterprise Library apps and app parts • false: Displays a custom context menu for the object type. specify the appropriate attribute values for one or more child <menuItemReference> elements. place the <menuItemReference> elements in the order in which you want the menu items to appear in the context menu. Each <menuItemReference> element represents a different context menu item for the object type specified by the typeID element of the parent <objectType> element. For documents.9. 7.

assume that the default action is Open). and the menu item that corresponds to the default action for Content Server documents (in this example. the value will not be displayed in the context menu. useOriginalNode Specifies whether a menu item will be displayed as a submenu item.Chapter 7 Installing and configuring OpenText Enterprise Library apps For object types other than documents and container items.7. You can specify the following values: • true: Displays the menu item as a submenu item. The document context menus are configured to display the General and Versions properties menu items. the Download menu item. Example 7-1: Displaying different context menu items for documents and folders In the following example. <objectTypeConfig configVersion="10. • false (default): Displays the menu item as an entry in the primary level of the context menu. You can specify one of the following values: • true: Hides the menu item from the context menu. The folder context menus are configured to display the menu item that corresponds to the default action for Content Server folders (in this example. Examples The following examples illustrate different ways to configure context menus and display or hide object types using the ObjectTypeConfig. assume that the default action is Browse). hidden Indicates whether the menu item is displayed or hidden in the context menu. • false (default): Displays the menu item in the context menu. This attribute applies only to Shortcut items. you can specify the following values: • properties_general (displays the General properties menu item) • properties_audit (displays the Audit properties menu item) • delete • default (displays the menu item that corresponds to the default action defined for object type in Content Server) Note: If you specify an invalid menuID value. the first <objectType> element defines context menu settings for Content Server documents and the second <objectType> element defines context menu settings for Content Server folders.0" disabled="false"> <objectTypes> <objectType typeId="144" visible="true"> OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 244 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .xml file. followed by a horizontal line to group the menu items.0.

7. the visible attribute for the first <objectType> element configures the app and app part to display all Content Server documents.0" disabled="false"> <objectTypes> <objectType typeId="144" visible="true"> <actions useOriginalMenu="false"> <menuItemReference menuId="properties_general" textId=" Properties" hidden="false" /> <menuItemReference menuId="properties_versions" hidden="true" /> <menuItemReference menuId="-" hidden="false" /> <menuItemReference menuId="download" hidden="true" /> <menuItemReference menuId="default" hidden="true" /> </actions> </objectType> <objectType typeId="0" visible="false"> <actions useOriginalMenu="false"> <menuItemReference menuId="properties_general" textId=" Properties" hidden="false" /> <menuItemReference menuId="-" hidden="false" /> <menuItemReference menuId="default" hidden="false" /> </actions> </objectType> </objectTypes> </objectTypeConfig> OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 245 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .9.7. Displaying specific object types and context menu items in OpenText Enterprise Library apps and app parts <actions useOriginalMenu="false"> <menuItemReference menuId="properties_general" textId=" Properties" hidden="false" /> <menuItemReference menuId="properties_versions" hidden="false" /> <menuItemReference menuId="-" hidden="false" /> <menuItemReference menuId="download" hidden="false" /> <menuItemReference menuId="default" hidden="false" /> </actions> </objectType> <objectType typeId="0" visible="true"> <actions useOriginalMenu="false"> <menuItemReference menuId="default" hidden="false" /> </actions> </objectType> </objectTypes> </objectTypeConfig> Example 7-2: Hiding folders in the app and app part In the following example. and the visible attribute for the second <objectType> element configures the app and app part to hide all Content Server folders. <objectTypeConfig configVersion="10.0.

and the Download menu item. <objectTypeConfig configVersion="10. followed by the General and Versions properties menu items. see “Adding object definitions for OpenText Template Workspaces items” on page 195. In this example.7.0. For more information. the app and app part are configured to display a case item that has the object type ID 31358.Chapter 7 Installing and configuring OpenText Enterprise Library apps Example 7-3: Changing the order of the context menu items for an object type In the following example. assume that the default action is Open.xml file in your on-premises SharePoint server environment. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 246 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .0" disabled="false"> <objectTypes> <objectType typeId="31358" visible="true"> <actions useOriginalMenu="true"> </objectType> </objectTypes> </objectTypeConfig> Tip: If your Content Server environment contains several case types.0.7. the document context menus are configured to display the menu item that corresponds to the default action for Content Server documents at the top of the context menu. Run the Update-OTCaseTypes cmdlet in Microsoft PowerShell to import all case type IDs from Content Server to the ObjectTypeConfig. <objectTypeConfig configVersion="10. a horizontal line. you can optionally do the following to simplify the configuration process: 1.0" disabled="false"> <objectTypes> <objectType typeId="144" visible="true"> <actions useOriginalMenu="false"> <menuItemReference menuId="default" hidden="false" /> <menuItemReference menuId="properties_general" textId=" Properties" hidden="false" /> <menuItemReference menuId="properties_versions " hidden="false" /> <menuItemReference menuId="-" hidden="false" /> <menuItemReference menuId="download" hidden="false" /> </actions> </objectType> </objectTypes> </objectTypeConfig> Example 7-4: Displaying cases from OpenText Template Workspaces In the following example.

7. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 247 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . the user must log in using a Content Server account name and password. refer to the Microsoft documentation at http://technet.xml file in your SharePoint Online environment. Configuring your environment for single sign-on authentication 2. When SSO authentication is configured. To set up SSO authentication.com/en-us/library/ hh852486. SSO authentication must be configured between SharePoint Online and the local Active Directory domain.10. Users only need to sign into SharePoint Online once using a local domain account and can subsequently access the app or app part without having to enter credentials when they browse to the app or app part. when a user browses to a SharePoint Online page that contains an OpenText Enterprise Library app or app part. You can optionally configure single sign-on (SSO) authentication in your environment so that users do not need to specify credentials each time they browse to an app or app part.xml file in your on- premises SharePoint server environment to the ObjectTypeConfig.aspx. Also. 7. the authentication process is transparent to users. the following components must be installed and configured in your environment: • OpenText Content Server • OpenText Directory Services (OTDS) • Microsoft Active Directory Federation Services (ADFS) Content Server must be configured to use ADFS authentication through OpenText Directory Services.10 Configuring your environment for single sign-on authentication By default. For more information on how to configure SSO authentication for Office 365. see the OpenText Knowledge Center. Copy the case type IDs from the ObjectTypeConfig. For more information on how to configure Content Server to use ADFS authentication.microsoft.

.

you must also browse to each page that contains an app part and reapply the app part settings. For more information about the configuration files. an administrator must install the latest version of the Content Server UI Widgets module in Content Server and make the new version of the app file available in the SharePoint Online app catalog site. see “Specifying configuration settings for an OpenText Enterprise Library app” on page 233 and “Editing the ObjectTypeConfig. back up the EnterpriseLibraryAppConfig.xml and ObjectTypeConfig.xml and ObjectTypeConfig. When a user updates the app settings.xml configuration files are added to the SharePoint Online environment and the display settings defined in the existing version of the ObjectTypeConfig. If you previously specified custom settings in these files.Chapter 8 Upgrading the OpenText Enterprise Library app 8.xml file for an OpenText Enterprise Library app and app part” on page 240.1 Upgrading the OpenText Enterprise Library app Users with Site Administrator permissions can upgrade the OpenText Enterprise Library app to the latest version in SharePoint Online. • If you added OpenText Enterprise Library app parts. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 249 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . new versions of the EnterpriseLibraryAppConfig. Before users can perform the upgrade. Users can then upgrade the app and app settings in SharePoint Online.xml files.xml file are overwritten. you must reapply the settings after updating the configuration files. Important • Before updating the app settings.

Installation Guide (SPCF-IGD).1 Preparing to upgrade the OpenText Enterprise Library app Note: To complete these steps. To prepare your environment for the upgrade: 1. Libraries. Click Apps for SharePoint.2 Upgrading the app and app part in SharePoint Online To upgrade the OpenText Enterprise Library app. In the left pane. click About. In the Office 365 Administrator Center. 3. In your Content Server environment. Browse to the folder in which you saved the new version of the app.1. click the OpenText Enterprise Library app. 4. upgrade the Content Server UI Widgets module to the latest version. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 250 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Download the new version of the OpenText Enterprise Library app file. For more information.1. 5. and click Open. 8. an administrator must install the latest version of the Content Server UI Widgets module in Content Server and make the new version of the OpenText Enterprise Library app file available in the SharePoint Online app catalog site. In the left pane. you must have administrator permissions in both Content Server and Office 365. click Site Contents. Browse to a site or site collection to which you added the OpenText Enterprise Library app. and then click App Catalog. b. In the message box displayed for the app. d. from the OpenText Knowledge Center. select the file. 3. click Apps. Click Admin at the top of the page and select SharePoint. Sign into SharePoint Online using an account with Site Administrator permissions or higher. To upgrade the app on the Site Contents page: 1. Click upload. In the Lists.app. you must first upgrade the app itself on the Site Contents page in SharePoint Online and then update the app and app part settings. c. sign in as an administrator and do the following: a. 2. and other Apps area.Chapter 8 Upgrading the OpenText Enterprise Library app 8. see OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint . Note: Before you can upgrade the app in SharePoint Online. 2. e. OpenText Enterprise Library.

When prompted to trust the app. Upgrading the OpenText Enterprise Library app 6. 9. Click Get It. click Update. In the Lists. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 251 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Libraries. Click Settings and select Enterprise Library Settings. Save backup copies of the EnterpriseLibraryAppConfig.xml and ObjectTypeConfig. 8.xml file for an OpenText Enterprise Library app and app part” on page 240. see “Specifying configuration settings for an OpenText Enterprise Library app” on page 233 and “Editing the ObjectTypeConfig. Note: You must reapply the settings to each app part you previously added. 6. edit the EnterpriseLibraryAppConfig. click Trust It.xml files. 4. click Site Contents. For more information about these files. see “Configuring OpenText Enterprise Library app parts” on page 238. The EnterpriseLibraryAppConfig. If your site contains one or more OpenText Enterprise Library app parts. 2.xml files. If you need to reapply the settings that you previously defined for the OpenText Enterprise Library app. On the Enterprise Library page. 7. Sign into SharePoint Online using an account with Site Administrator permissions or higher.xml and ObjectTypeConfig. click the OpenText Enterprise Library app. 5.xml and ObjectTypeConfig. To update the app and app part settings: 1.1. Browse to a site to which you added the OpenText Enterprise Library app. browse to a page that contains an app part and reapply the settings that you previously defined for it. 8.xml files are updated to the latest versions. 3. For more information. 7. and other Apps area. In the left pane.

.

7. In Central Administration. 5. The Remote subfolder contains the following subfolders: • Archiving: Contains a subfolder called Configuration. 6. Edit the file to meet the needs of your environment. Browse to the subfolder containing the file you want to edit. You can optionally edit these files if you want to configure or customize remote site archiving features.Chapter 9 Defining advanced configuration settings for remote site archiving features Application Governance & Archiving stores configuration information for remote site archiving features in XML files. The configuration changes take effect after you upload a new version of the configuration file to the document library. Save your changes and upload a new version of the configuration file to the document library. 4.xml configuration file. Open the Opentext document library. • Configuration: Contains the RemoteSiteConfig. For more information about remote site archiving. which contains the PropertyMappingConfig. 3. 9.xml and PropertyTypesConfig. save a backup copy of the original file.xml configuration files. 2. see “Archiving remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online sites and documents“ on page 215. Browse to the SharePoint folder and then to the Remote subfolder. These files are located in a pre-configured document library in your on-premises SharePoint environment. click Settings and select Site contents. To edit a configuration file for remote site archiving features: 1. Download and open the configuration file you want to edit in a text editor. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 253 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .1 Editing configuration files for remote site archiving features Tip: Before editing a configuration file.

1. you want to update or remove mappings that you previously specified using the MappingGenerator. This element has the following attribute: configVersion Specifies the Application Governance & Archiving version for which the PropertyMappingConfig. You may choose to edit the PropertyMappingConfig. Application Governance & Archiving uses the mappings in this file to migrate document metadata values to equivalent Content Server categories and attributes when you archive a remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online site.exe tool. Note: This file is created only after you run the MappingGenerator. 9. for example. See “Defining property mappings for remote sites and documents” on page 219.exe tool. This element has the following attributes: SiteUrl Specifies the URL of the remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online site that contains the content type or the document library that contains the metadata values you want to archive. For more information. ContentTypeName Specifies the name assigned to the content type or document library in SharePoint or SharePoint Online. <PropertiesMapping> Specifies the mapping of a SharePoint or SharePoint Online content type to a Content Server category.xml file. <PropertiesMappings> The container element for one or more <PropertiesMapping> elements.xml file if.1.1 PropertyMappingConfig. see “Archiving remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online sites and documents“ on page 215.xml file elements and attributes The PropertyMappingConfig.xml file The PropertyMappingConfig.xml file contains the following elements and attributes: <PropertyMappingConfig> The root element of the PropertyMappingConfig.xml file was created.Chapter 9 Defining advanced configuration settings for remote site archiving features 9.1 Understanding the PropertyMappingConfig.1.exe tool. You can delete a <PropertiesMapping> element and its child elements if you want to remove a mapping that you previously specified using the property mapping tool. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 254 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .xml file specifies the Content Server categories to which SharePoint content types are mapped after you run the MappingGenerator. Do not edit this value.

1. <CSAttributes> The container element for one or more <CSAttribute> elements. you can choose to specify a value for one or both attributes. <CSAttribute> Specifies a Content Server attribute that is mapped to a SharePoint or SharePoint Online field. For more information. This element has the following attributes: DisplayName Specifies the name of the Content Server attribute that is mapped to a SharePoint or SharePoint Online field. Server Specifies the unique ID of the Content Server host on which the category is located. Editing configuration files for remote site archiving features ContentTypeID Specifies the ID assigned to the content type or document library containing the metadata values to be migrated. ListTitle Specifies the title of the SharePoint document library to which the mapping applies. Name Specifies the name assigned to the category in Content Server. However. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 255 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . 9. <Categories> The container element for one or more <Category> elements. UniqueName Specifies the numeric value that is assigned to the attribute in Content Server. ListId Specifies the ID of the SharePoint document library to which the mapping applies. This element has the following attributes: VolumeID Specifies the ID of the volume on which the category is located in Content Server. see “Defining Content Server settings” on page 65. <Category> Specifies the Content Server category to which the content type specified by the <PropertiesMapping> element is mapped. Note: For the ListId and ListTitle attributes. This value is defined on the Content Server settings page in Central Administration. you must specify a value for at least one of these attributes. NodeID Specifies the node ID of the category in Content Server.

see “Archiving remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online sites and documents“ on page 215.exe tool and then archive a remote site. Note: For more information about the MappingGenerator. the PropertyTypesConfig. Type Specifies the column type. Application Governance & Archiving automatically converts the SharePoint field types to Content Server attribute types according to the mappings defined in the PropertyTypesConfig. If you want to configure conversion settings for Application Governance & Archiving for SharePoint features.xml file specifies that the DateTime fields will be converted to equivalent DateTime attributes in Content Server during the archiving process. Important You can edit this file to configure conversion settings for Application Governance & Archiving for SharePoint Online features only. For example.1.xml (on-premises SharePoint server)” on page 199.exe tool and archiving remote sites.2 Understanding the PropertyTypesConfig.xml file. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 256 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . but you can optionally edit this file to customize how SharePoint field values are converted.Chapter 9 Defining advanced configuration settings for remote site archiving features <SPField> Specifies information about the SharePoint or SharePoint Online column (field) that is mapped to the Content Server attribute specified by the <CSAttribute> element. When you run the MappingGenerator. InternalName Specifies the internal name of the column. 9.xml file in the Configuration folder instead.xml file contains mappings that define how SharePoint field types are converted to Content Server attribute types when you archive a remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online site. DisplayName Specifies the display name of the column in SharePoint or SharePoint Online.xml file contains a set of default mappings. see “PropertyTypesConfig. For more information.xml file The PropertyTypesConfig. edit the PropertyTypesConfig. by default. if your SharePoint environment contains DateTime fields. The PropertyTypesConfig.

Livel inkStringProperty). FieldType Specifies the target SharePoint or SharePoint Online field type. You can specify multiple <AttributeType> elements to map a field type to multiple attribute types. For more information about the available field types.dll?func=ll&objId=3045752&objAction=browse& sort=name&viewType=1).xml file contains the following elements and attributes.Livelink. You can specify one or more <TypeMapping> elements. This element has the following attribute: Name Specifies the class name of an existing Content Server attribute type (for example.SharePoint.1. see the OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for SharePoint SDK documentation in the OpenText Knowledge Center (https://knowledge. <AttributeTypes> The container element for one or more <AttributeType> elements. <TypeMappings> The container element for one or more <TypeMapping> elements. You must specify the class of an existing Content Server attribute type (for example.1 PropertyTypesConfig.1. This element has the following attribute: configVersion Specifies the Application Governance & Archiving version for which the PropertyTypesConfig. <TypeMapping> Specifies the mapping of a SharePoint or SharePoint Online field type to one or more Content Server category attribute types. This element has the following attributes: DefaultAttributeType Specifies the default Content Server attribute type to which the SharePoint or SharePoint Online field type will be converted when you run the archiving process. refer to the SharePoint or SharePoint Online documentation. For a complete list of Content Server attribute type classes.xml file.xml file was created. Editing configuration files for remote site archiving features 9. Opentext.opentext. <AttributeType> Specifies a Content Server attribute type to which the SharePoint or SharePoint Online field type will be converted.ServerConnection. Do not edit this value. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 257 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .com/ knowledge/llisapi. <PropertyTypesConfig> The root element of the PropertyTypesConfig.2.Properties.xml elements and attributes The PropertyTypesConfig. 9.

To change how the values are converted. <ValueConverters> The container element for one or more <ValueConverter> elements. see the OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for SharePoint SDK documentation in the OpenText Knowledge Center (https://knowledge.Remote.SharePoint.opentext. <MappingBehavior> Specifies how content types or document libraries are mapped.opentext. A value converter defines how the values of a specific SharePoint or SharePoint Online field type are converted to Content Server attribute values during the archiving process. This element has the following attribute: Implementation Specifies the class name of a value converter (for example.dll?func=ll&objId=3045752&objAction=browse& sort=name&viewType=1). For a complete list of Content Server attribute type classes.Providers.Archiving. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 258 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . remove <ValueConverter> elements.xml file also apply to folders. This element has the following attributes: UseAssignedCategoriesAsDefault Specifies how category values are merged when a conflict occurs between the assigned category and mapped categories.xml file.com/knowledge/ llisapi.Chapter 9 Defining advanced configuration settings for remote site archiving features Opentext. you can change the order of the <ValueConverter> elements. or add custom value converters. Value converters are run in the order in which they are specified in the PropertyTypesConfig.Livelink.ServerConnection.SharePoint.Properties.ValueConverters . AllowFolderPropertyMapping Specifies whether the mappings defined in the PropertyTypesConfig. • true: The assigned category values are the defined values and the mapped category values take effect only if no values are defined in the assigned category.TextValueConverter). Opentext. <ValueConverter> Specifies information for a value converter you want to use.com/ knowledge/llisapi.dll?func=ll&objId=3045752&objAction=browse&sort=name& viewType=1). see the OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for SharePoint SDK documentation in the OpenText Knowledge Center (https://knowledge. For a complete list of value converter classes.Livel inkStringProperty). You can specify one of the following values: • false (default): The assigned category values are treated as the default values and can be overwritten by the mapped category values.

1 RemoteSiteConfig. For more information about defining remote site connections. <RemoteSites> The container element for one or more <RemoteSite> elements. This element has the following attributes: Authentication Specifies the authentication method used by the remote site connection. this file is updated with the values you specify. This element has the following attribute: configVersion Specifies the Application Governance & Archiving version for which the RemoteSiteConfig.xml file contains the following elements and attributes: <RemoteSiteConfig> The root element of the RemoteSiteConfig. <RemoteSite> Specifies connection information for a remote site. the corresponding entries are updated on the Remote Site Connections page.xml file was created. 9. Similarly. you can edit this file to change the connection details specified for a remote site.xml file apply to both folders and documents. You can specify one of the following values: • MicrosoftOnlineAuthenticator (default) • LocalFarmAuthenticator • NTLMAuthenticator • FormAuthenticator • AnonymousAuthenticator OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 259 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .xml file contains connection information for remote sites. 9.1.xml file apply only to documents and not to folders. see “Specifying connection information for remote sites” on page 217.1. 9. When you add entries to the Remote Site Connections page in Central Administration. if you edit certain values in this file. Each <RemoteSite> element corresponds to an entry on the Remote Site Connections page in Central Administration. • true: The mappings in the PropertyTypesConfig.3.xml file. Do not edit this value. Editing configuration files for remote site archiving features • false (default): The mappings in the PropertyTypesConfig.xml file The RemoteSiteConfig.3 Understanding the RemoteSiteConfig. As an alternative to changing the values in the Central Administration interface.1.xml file elements and attributes The RemoteSiteconfig.

Password Specifies the encrypted password for the user account that you specify for the user account you specify. Application Governance & Archiving attempts to use each authentication method until a connection is established. Url Specifies the URL of the remote SharePoint or SharePoint Online site you want to archive. If required. This value is a global unique identifier that is generated automatically by Application Governance & Archiving. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 260 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . change the password on the Remote Site Connections page.Chapter 9 Defining advanced configuration settings for remote site archiving features This value is optional. Id Specifies the unique ID of the remote site connection. Name Specifies the name displayed for the remote site connection entry on the Remote Site Connections page. Do not edit this value. Do not edit this value. If no value is provided. User Specifies a user account that has read permissions or higher for the site you want to archive.

Part 4 Configuring OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts in SharePoint .

.

1 Understanding OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts Application Governance & Archiving provides several Web Parts. Web Parts are pre-configured elements such as tables and forms with predefined content. You can integrate the OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts when editing or creating a page in SharePoint. remove. This chapter provides information about the following: • “Understanding OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts” on page 263 • “Adding OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts” on page 271 • “Configuring OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts” on page 272 • “Activating and modifying Enterprise Library search Web Parts” on page 287 10.Chapter 10 Integrating and configuring OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts In SharePoint. you can add. The following sections provide more information about these Web Parts. you can create and configure pages using Web Parts.1 Enterprise Library Web Part You can use the Enterprise Library Web Part to browse the Enterprise Library file and folder structure in SharePoint. 10. For more information. or rename items).1. You can perform operations on items (for example. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 263 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . see “Configuring Enterprise Library Web Part settings” on page 272.

see “Modifying Enterprise Library Sidebar Web Part settings” on page 281.2 Enterprise Library Sidebar Web Part You can use the Enterprise Library Sidebar Web Part to insert the Content Filter sidebar as a Web Part and filter the displayed items in the Enterprise Library Web Part. see “Configuring Enterprise Library Web Part settings” on page 272. you can improve the page layout. For more information and settings. when you define the Enterprise Library Sidebar Web Part. By default.Chapter 10 Integrating and configuring OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts 10.1 “Using faceted browsing” in OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint . For detailed information on how to browse using the Content Filter sidebar panel.Enterprise Library Integration – User Guide (SHLES- UGD). see section 4. For more information.3. When you insert the Content Filter sidebar as a Web Part. the sidebar is integrated into the Enterprise Library Web Part and removed from the Enterprise Library Web Part. especially when the sidebar displays many items.1. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 264 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . You can use the sidebar to search and filter Enterprise Library items in the Enterprise Library Web Part.

1. see “Configuring the Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part ” on page 276. These workspaces are binders and cases that are connected to SAP business objects. see OpenText Template Workspaces and Contract Management . and related documents as well as relationships to other SAP business objects.3 Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part You can use the Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part to display information about business workspaces and binder and case workspaces in a sidebar. 10.dll/Open/10194282). • Recent Changes: Displays a list of documents that are related to the selected SAP business object and have been changed recently. To integrate the Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part or add support for more widget types. The attributes have been generated through metadata of the SAP business objects. the widgets that have been configured for the object are displayed in the sidebar. Binders and cases are objects provided by OpenText Template Workspaces.opentext. For objects that do not support widgets. provide SAP data. While cases represent dynamic objects that have phases and processes. You can add the Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part to a page and you must connect it with an Enterprise Library Web Part. binders relate to specific cases and can store the cases according to their relation. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 265 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .OpenText Content Server User Online Help (LLESCSB-H- UGD). For detailed information about cases and binders.com/knowledge/ cs. Understanding OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts 10. visit the OpenText Knowledge Center (http://knowledge. Binder and case workspaces are provided by OpenText Extended ECM for SAP Solutions. For more information about OpenText Extended ECM for SAP Solutions. When you open an object that supports widgets in the Enterprise Library Web Part. no information is displayed. • Attributes: Displays attribute values of the selected Content Server object.1. The following widget types are supported: • Workspace Reference: Displays a link to an SAP object in the SAP web portal (SAP web application server). • Related Items: Displays a collection of objects that are related to the selected SAP business object as a list or tree of parent and child relationships. Business workspaces represent SAP business objects. The information is displayed in single widgets of the sidebar and depends on the type of workspace.

For more information.Chapter 10 Integrating and configuring OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts 10. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 266 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . see “Modifying LiveReport Result Web Part settings” on page 283.1.4 LiveReport Result Web Part You can use the LiveReport Result Web Part to view the results of a LiveReport.

10.1. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 267 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .1.1. 10. see “Modifying LiveReports Web Part settings” on page 284. according to due date. the tasks are listed in ascending order. By default. see “Modifying Workflow Inbox Web Part settings” on page 286.5 LiveReports Web Part You can use the LiveReports Web Part to view and run available LiveReports. Understanding OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts 10. For more information. For more information.6 Workflow Inbox Web Part You can use the Workflow Inbox Web Part to display Content Server workflow tasks.

Enterprise Library Advanced Search. you enter the port. For more information about specifying a default Content Server system. and Enterprise Library Search Results Web Parts By default.Administrator's Guide (LLESRES-AGD). see OpenText Content Server Remote Search . see “Defining Content Server settings” on page 65. For more information. You can use these Web Parts to search for documents archived in Enterprise Library.” In this case. Typically. see the Content Server Administration documentation. 10. native Content Server pages are displayed and the following error may occur: “Your request originated from a website that Content Server identified as potentially unsafe. Enterprise Library search Web Parts are integrated in the Enterprise Search Center on the Enterprise Library search pages if the OpenText Enterprise Library Search Pages feature is enabled. The search results are then returned by the default Content Server system and displayed in the Enterprise Library Search Results Web Part. the host name. The Enterprise Library Search Results Web Part then performs the search by sending the query to the default Content Server system. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 268 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .7 Enterprise Library Search Box. and allowed sites. For more information. the query is sent to the Enterprise Library Search Results Web Part. When you specify a query in the Enterprise Library Search Box Web Part or Enterprise Library Advanced Search Web Part.1. add the SharePoint server URL as a trusted referring website in the security parameter configuration in the Content Server Administration (Server Configuration > Configure Security Parameters > Trusted Referring Websites). You can use Enterprise Library search Web Parts to search on multiple Content Server systems if the Content Server Remote Search module is installed and configured in your Content Server environment.Chapter 10 Integrating and configuring OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts Note: If users work with items in the Workflow Inbox Web Part.

For information on integrating and modifying the Enterprise Library search Web Parts.1. to restrict the search results using categories and Records Management Advanced Search classifications. see “Activating and modifying Enterprise Library search Web Parts” on page 287. Box Enterprise The Enterprise Library Advanced Search Web Part enables you. Understanding OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts You can also integrate these Enterprise Library search Web Parts into other pages. besides other search Library criteria. 10. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 269 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Enterprise You can use the Enterprise Library Search Box Web Part to integrate an Enterprise Library Search Library search box into other pages.

Chapter 10 Integrating and configuring OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts Enterprise You can use the Enterprise Library Search Results Web Part to perform actions on Library Search multiple items in the results list. You can also sort the results and define how many Results results are displayed on each page. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 270 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .

see “Modifying My Borrowed Items Web Part settings” on page 285. In the Parts ribbon group. see “Activating Integration for Document and Picture Libraries and Enterprise Library Web Parts” on page 144. 10. Click Add. Select a Web Part zone. 6. Note: You can integrate the OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts only if the administrator has enabled the OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts feature.8 My Borrowed Items Web Part You can use the My Borrowed Items Web Part to access all physical objects that you have currently borrowed. 7. 5. If the content access account does not OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 271 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . 3.2 Adding OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts You can add OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts when editing or creating a page in SharePoint.2. 4. In SharePoint. select OpenText Enterprise Library and then the Web Parts you want to add. 10. Under Categories. open the page to which you want to add an OpenText Enterprise Library Web Part. Adding OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts 10. Click Settings and select Edit Page. To enable the feature. 2. click Web Part. Click the INSERT tab.1. For more information. To add OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts: 1. Note: The content access account of the SharePoint Search Service Application requires See Contents permissions in Content Server to crawl the pages containing Enterprise Library Web Parts.

3. and advanced settings). • Layout and number of selectable items. which is the default setting. the Web Part opens this folder and displays its contents. users may receive an error message for these pages in the search results. To configure Enterprise Library Web Part settings: 1. Click the Enterprise Library Web Part. Edit the settings in the right panel. open a page that contains the Enterprise Library Web Part.Chapter 10 Integrating and configuring OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts have this permission.3 Configuring OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts You can configure the OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts to suit the needs of your environment. see the SharePoint documentation. Tip: To define which columns are displayed. any previously configured root folders are reset to the Enterprise Workspace. even if the users have See Contents permissions. layout. • Root Folders: Folders that are displayed when a user uses the Web Part to browse Enterprise Library content for the first time. • Views on the Enterprise Library that you want to make available to users. you can define the following: • Connection to a Content Server installation and the folders that you want to browse. For information on the general Web Part settings (appearance. Click the WEBPART tab. 10.1 Configuring Enterprise Library Web Part settings For the Enterprise Library Web Part. 2. If you select a different Content Server installation. Connection • Content Server: Specifies the connection to the Content Server installation for which you want to display content. Click Settings and select Edit page. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 272 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . In SharePoint. see “Configuration files for Enterprise Library Web Parts” on page 204. If you select only one root folder. 6. 5. 3. • Search and filter options. Click Web Part Properties. 4. 10.

You can select a folder from the Enterprise Workspace. If there are more list items than displayable rows.3. • To select a different view. Public E-Mail Volume. Personal E-mail Volume. For more information about creating views. This activates a Custom View list. Note: The Personal and Public E-mail Volume are only available if the E-mail Management Services solution is installed on Content Server. • To return to the default view settings in the Web Part instance. • Highlight new items: Adds a New symbol to list items that have recently been created. You have the following options: • To keep the view for an object type in this particular Web Part instance. Personal Workspace. FSA volume (File System Archiving) or any other volume if navigated in the folder picker using the nickname. click . select the check box next to the object type. the amount and types of displayed columns for the respective object types change according to what the site administrator defined as their default views. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 273 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . You only have more views if the site administrator created other views than the default view. • Show navigation bar: Displays the path to the displayed folder under the title bar of Enterprise Library. When you add the Enterprise Library Web Part to your Web Part page and browse the object types. Configuring OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts You can change the selected folder by clicking its title and selecting a different folder. 10. • Add another folder: Allows you to add another folder to the root folder list. This list is active only if you select the check box next to the object type. The FSA Volume is only available if the OpenText File System Archiving module is installed on Content Server. To remove a folder from the list. clear the check box next to the object type. Views Lets you keep a view or select a different view for a specific object type in the Web Part. select a view from the Custom View list. Views are created in Central Administration or in the site settings. You can specify more than one root folder. see “View management” on page 139. Behavior • Number of rows per page: Number of rows to be displayed on one page. Other Web Part instances are not affected by this selection. users can navigate to additional pages within the Web Part.

• Sidebar position: Defines the position of the sidebar within the Web Part. The following selections are available: • None: You cannot select any list item. In that case. Note: The Content Filter sidebar panel is only available if Content Server 10. see the respective sections. You can also integrate the sidebar into a Web Part page as an Enterprise Library Sidebar Web Part and connect it to the Enterprise Library Web Part. For information about full page view. Sidebar • Show sidebar: Displays the Content Filter sidebar in the Web Part or above the Quick Launch menu in full page view. see “Modifying Enterprise Library Sidebar Web Part settings” on page 281. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 274 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . For more information about the Enterprise Library Sidebar Web Part. an already existing sidebar in the Enterprise Library Web Part will automatically be removed.Chapter 10 Integrating and configuring OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts • Number of days: Indicates how many days a list item is highlighted as New. This setting does not apply to full page mode views.0 is connected to the Enterprise Library Web Part. Note: The sidebar is only displayed if you have selected at least one of the following check boxes: • Show filtering tools in the Filtering section • Show search box in the Search in Current Folder section For more information about these check boxes. Filtering • Show filtering tools: Displays the Content Filter sidebar panel and filtering options in the sidebar. • Single: You can select only one list item. • Multiple: You can select several list items.25 “Changing the view mode for the Enterprise Library Web Part” in OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint . see section 5. • Selection style: Defines how many list items in the Web Part can be selected to have them processed by a ribbon command. or facets.Enterprise Library Integration – User Guide (SHLES-UGD). You can use the Content Filter sidebar panel to browse through items in the Enterprise Library Web Part using groupings of metadata. the sidebar is placed above the Quick Launch menu. to progressively narrow the search. In full page mode.

you can specify the URL of a page in which you want to display the Enterprise Library search results. Apply your entries. the Filter by name box is displayed above the displayed Enterprise Library items. see section 4. • Search results URL: If Show search box is enabled.3 “Filtering and searching in the Enterprise Library Web Part” in OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint - Enterprise Library Integration – User Guide (SHLES-UGD). If the sidebar is disabled. If the sidebar is disabled. You can change the default value to point to a customized page with Content Server search results in the Search Center if you have it available in your site collection. the Enterprise Library search needs to be configured like the dedicated search Web Parts. see section 4. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 275 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . click OK.1 “Using faceted browsing” in OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint . You can activate the sidebar in the Sidebar settings. 10. 7.3. Configuring OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts The Filter by name box allows you to enter search text and click Filter by a part of the item name to start the search. choose Stop Editing and publish the modified page.3. For more information on how to browse using the Content Filter sidebar panel. To use the search box. the search box is integrated as a Search in Current Folder panel into the sidebar. If the sidebar is displayed. Content Refresh • Show manual refresh button: Displays a Refresh button that refreshes the displayed items within the Web Part without refreshing the entire page. For more information about searching in the Enterprise Library Web Part. Searching • Show search box: Displays a search box to allow a full-text search within the currently displayed folder and its subfolders.Enterprise Library Integration – User Guide (SHLES-UGD). the Search in Current Folder panel is displayed as Search this folder box above the displayed Enterprise Library items.

open a page that contains the Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part. 3. open a page that contains the Enterprise Library Web Part. Select Edit Web Part. hover your mouse pointer over the Web Part and click the arrow icon that appears in the top-right corner of the Web Part. To connect an Enterprise Library Web Part with an Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part: 1. 5. see “Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part” on page 265. To modify the Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part settings. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 276 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . The Enterprise Library Widgets panel appears on the right side of the page. The Connections option now appears in the menu. Select the Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part. 7. and then Get Container with Widgets From and Enterprise Library. To connect an Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part with an Enterprise Library Web Part: 1. you must connect it to an Enterprise Library Web Part. 3.Chapter 10 Integrating and configuring OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts 10.3. In SharePoint. 6. When you add the Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part to a page. 2. For more information. 4. In SharePoint. Select Connections > Send Opened Container To and then select Enterprise Library Widgets. Click Settings and select Edit page. Click Settings and select Edit page. Select the Enterprise Library Web Part. To open the Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part menu. you can use the standard SharePoint Web Part settings. Select Connections. Open the Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part menu again. 5. hover your mouse pointer over the Web Part and click the arrow icon that appears in the top-right corner of the Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part. 2. 4.2 Configuring the Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part You can use the Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part to display additional information for business workspaces and binder and case workspaces from Enterprise Library in a sidebar. To open the Enterprise Library Web Part menu.

3. Previous. and advanced settings). Next.2.1 Configuring the Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part After you connect an Enterprise Library Web Part with an Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part. Last) appears on the upper right corner. Example: The following examples show you some settings that you can change according to your needs: • The Title of the sidebar is hidden by default. • The default Width of the sidebar usually fits the Web Part zone. Select the Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part. • Select the orientation of how multiple widgets are displayed in the Web Part either horizontal or vertical. 7. select Yes and enter a fixed number of pixels. open the page that contains the Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part. you can configure the Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part to control how the widgets are displayed. To change the width. Edit the settings in the panel that appears on the right side of the page. Click Web Part Properties. a panel with four buttons (First. The default entry is None. 6. 10. Tip: When you choose Horizontal for displaying the widgets and the window is running out of space. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 277 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . 5. Click the WEB PART tab. Click Settings and select Edit page. To display the title. Save your entries and publish the modified page. 4. Configuring OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts To modify Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part settings: 1. 10. you can change the Chrome Type. You have the following options: • Select the widget type(s) to be displayed.3. see the SharePoint documentation. 2. For information on the general Web Part settings (appearance. The buttons allow scrolling to widgets that are not visible.3. In SharePoint. layout. Note: Depending on the settings you made in the Content Server Administration page in the SAP ECM Link Administration section. for one SAP business workspace multiple widgets might belong to the same widget type.

xslt files in Opentext > SharePoint > Livelink > Widgets.xml” on page 184. 3. To open the Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part menu. and every supported type must have a corresponding XSLT style sheet to render it to HTML. Save your changes and publish the modified page. see “LivelinkWidgetsWebPartConfig. Central Administration OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 278 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Website 2. 6. open the page that contains the Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part. The Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part only displays widgets of supported types. Application Governance & Archiving checks if style sheets for the respective widgets are available for the document libraries. Parent website 3.3. Horizontal or Vertical. For the widget display. do the following: 1.xml configuration file. 10. select the display orientation. click the arrow icon in the top-right corner of the Web Part and select Edit Web Part. Select the Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part. 2. In the Widgets section select the Widget type(s) to be displayed.2. 4. Application Governance & Archiving searches the widget style sheets locations in the following order: 1. Widget style sheets are stored as <WidgetType>. 7.Chapter 10 Integrating and configuring OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts To configure the Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part: 1. Prepare the XSLT style sheet and save it in the proper location. 5.xml file. In the Widgets section. Site collection 4.xml” on page 184. Click Settings and select Edit page. Specify the widget type in the LivelinkWidgetsWebPartConfig. For more information about the LivelinkWidgetsWebPartConfig. The default widgets settings for the Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part are controlled by the LivelinkWidgetsWebPartConfig.xml file. which is saved in the SharePoint Central Administration site. 2. Widget data is supplied in XML format. see “LivelinkWidgetsWebPartConfig.xml file. In SharePoint. Which style sheet is used depends on the level where it has been defined. For more information about the LivelinkWidgetsWebPartConfig.2 Extending the Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part A business object can have configured widget types that are not supported by Application Governance & Archiving. To support an additional widget type.

• Related Items: Displays a collection of objects that are related to the selected SAP business object as a list or tree of parent and child relationships.org/1999/XSL/Transform" xmlns="http://www.w3. The following provides an example of how the style sheet file must be structured: <?xml version="1. You can add or remove support for a widget type and add widget support for a specific object type. --> </xsl:otherwise> </xsl:choose> </xsl:template> OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 279 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . • Recent Changes: Displays a list of documents that are related to the selected SAP business object and have been changed recently. The following sections provide information about the necessary steps. The following widget types are supported: • Workspace Reference: Displays a link to an SAP object in the SAP web portal (SAP web application server).0" xmlns:xsl="http://www...w3.0" encoding="utf-8"?> <xsl:stylesheet version="1. The XML data of the widget will be available in the log file after you turn on verbose logging..3.. provide your own rendering code . Configuring OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts If there is no file for a widget type. • Attributes: Displays attribute values of the selected Content Server object. You can use the default widget style sheets as examples of how to render information.. The attributes have been generated through metadata of the SAP business objects. To add or remove support for a widget type: • Upload a new style sheet file to the Widgets folder. the widget is considered as not supported and is not displayed in the Enterprise Library Widgets Web Part. 10.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:lwe="urn:LivelinkWidgetXslExtension"> <xsl:output method="html" encoding="utf-8" indent="yes" /> <xsl:param name="origin-serverid" /> <xsl:param name="origin-nodeid" /> <xsl:param name="origin-volumeid" /> <xsl:param name="origin-name" /> <xsl:param name="origin-subtype" /> <xsl:param name="origin-iconurl" /> <xsl:param name="lcid" /> <xsl:template match="Widget"> <xsl:choose> <xsl:when test="Error"> <xsl:apply-templates select="Error" /> </xsl:when> <xsl:otherwise> <!-.

However. You can delete an existing XSLT file to hide widgets of a corresponding type. '&#10. and cases support widgets by default.')"/> <xsl:variable name="after" select="substring-after($text. widgets are based on XML information which is rendered by XSLT style sheets to HTML and therefore can be seen as a general framework for displaying additional object information.Utility. You can use the Application Governance & Archiving Content Server Object Model and Provider Framework to implement widget handling for Content Server subtypes other than business workspaces. '&#10.')"> <xsl:variable name="before" select="substring-before($text.Chapter 10 Integrating and configuring OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts <xsl:template match="Error"> <table width="100%" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0" class="ms-error"> <tr> <td valign="top"> <img src="/_layouts/images/Opentext/error16. see the Opentext.gif" /> </td> <td valign="top" style="padding-left: 4px"> <xsl:call-template name="translate-linebreaks"> <xsl:with-param name="text" select=". binders.SharePoint. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 280 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . For more information.')"/> <xsl:value-of select="$before"/> <br/> <xsl:call-template name="translate-linebreaks"> <xsl:with-param name="text" select="$after"/> </xsl:call-template> </xsl:when> <xsl:otherwise> <xsl:value-of select="$text"/> </xsl:otherwise> </xsl:choose> </xsl:template </xsl:stylesheet You can find the documentation of XPath functions that are available through the LivelinkWidgetXslExtension XSLT extension in the OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft SharePoint SDK documentation." /> </xsl:call-template> </td> </tr> </table> </xsl:template> <xsl:template name="translate-linebreaks"> <xsl:param name="text"/> <xsl:choose> <xsl:when test="contains($text.Livelink.WebParts. '&#10.LivelinkWidgetXsltE xtension class. Only business workspaces.

you must override the LivelinkWidgetStylesheetProvider provider if your XSLT style sheet location and XSLT arguments cannot be served by the functionality that is provided by default.Livelink. 10.SharePoint. Optionally. For more information. the Web Part filters the items in the selected Enterprise Library Web Part. When you add the Enterprise Library Sidebar Web Part to your Web Part page. This step is required to add widget support. 3. see the Opentext. Similar to the sidebar that is integrated into the Enterprise Library Web Part. see the LivelinkTasks example in the SDK documentation. If you connect the Web Part to several Enterprise Library Web Parts. Note: You can add Enterprise Library Sidebar Web Parts only to Web Part pages.3. Implement the Opentext.WebParts. To learn how to support a custom Content Server subtype. see “Enterprise Library Sidebar Web Part” on page 264. • If the sidebar is disabled in the Enterprise Library Web Part settings. Optionally. you can use the standard SharePoint Web Part settings. you must override the LivelinkWidgetDataProvider provider if your widget data has a different structure than the functionality that is provided by default.Providers.ServerService. For more information.Livelink.Livel inkWidgetEnabledNode interface in a custom LivelinkNode implementation which is registered for the Content Server subtype for which you want to enable widgets.3 Modifying Enterprise Library Sidebar Web Part settings You can use the Enterprise Library Sidebar Web Part to insert the Content Filter sidebar as a Web Part and filter the displayed items in the Enterprise Library Web Part.ServerConnection.3.Livelink. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 281 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .SharePoint. 10. see the Opentext. Configuring OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts To add widget support for a specific object type: 1. 2.LivelinkWidgetSty lesheetProvider class in the SDK documentation. For more information. you must connect it to at least one Enterprise Library Web Part. all filter and search boxes are displayed in the Enterprise Library Web Part.LivelinkWidgetDat aProvider class in the SDK documentation.Providers.WebParts.SharePoint. the following rules apply: • The sidebar and sidebar content is only displayed if Show filtering tools in the Filtering section or Show search box in the Search in Current Folder section is selected in the Enterprise Library Web Part settings. To modify the Enterprise Library Sidebar Web Part settings.

To display the title. To open the Enterprise Library Web Part menu. The default entry is None. Click Settings and select Edit Page. Select the Enterprise Library Web Part. Click Settings and select Edit Page. open the page that contains the Enterprise Library Sidebar Web Part. Open the Enterprise Library Web Part menu again. Click Settings and select Edit Page. Select the Enterprise Library Sidebar Web Part. 6. In SharePoint. 3. 2. open a page that contains the Enterprise Library Sidebar Web Part. click the arrow icon that appears in the top-right corner of the Web Part. select Connections > Get Sidebar Location From. Click Web Part Properties. To open the Enterprise Library Sidebar Web Part menu. 4. Edit the settings in the panel on the right side of the page. 4. and then select an appropriate Enterprise Library Sidebar. In SharePoint. In SharePoint. 3. 2. 5. Select the Enterprise Library Sidebar Web Part. 5. Example: The following examples show you some settings that you can change in the general Web Part settings in the section Appearance according to your needs: • The Title of the sidebar is hidden by default. click the arrow icon that appears in the top-right corner of the Web Part. To modify Enterprise Library Sidebar Web Part settings: 1. To connect an Enterprise Library Web Part with an Enterprise Library Sidebar Web Part: 1. 4. Click Connections > Send Location To and then select one or multiple Enterprise Library Web Parts. 5. 3. 2. you can change the Chrome Type. 6. Select Edit Web Part. open a page that contains the Enterprise Library Web Part.Chapter 10 Integrating and configuring OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts To connect an Enterprise Library Sidebar Web Part with Enterprise Library Web Parts: 1. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 282 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Click the WEB PART tab.

In SharePoint. Click Settings and select Edit Page. including report parameters if necessary. To change the width. For information on the general Web Part settings (appearance. 5. 6. 10. users can navigate to additional pages within the Web Part. If there are more list items than displayable rows. you can specify a Content Server installation and a report for which you want to display results in the Web Part. Select the LiveReport Result Web Part. choose Stop Editing and publish the modified page.3. • Report Parameters: If applicable. Views • View Name: Lets you select a different view for the Web Part. For more information about creating views. layout and advanced settings).3. select Yes and enter a fixed number of pixels. Configuring OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts • The default Width of the sidebar usually fits the Web Part zone. Click Web Part Properties. Click the WEB PART tab. 10. click OK. 3. Edit the settings in the panel on the right side of the page. Behavior • Number of rows per page: Number of rows to be displayed on one page. 2. • LiveReport: Select a LiveReport for which you want to display results. To modify LiveReport Result Web Part settings: 1. layout and advanced settings). see the SharePoint documentation. Views are created in Central Administration or in the site settings. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 283 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . for example the user for whom the report results should be displayed. see “View management” on page 139. For information on the general Web Part settings (appearance. open a page that contains the LiveReport Result Web Part.4 Modifying LiveReport Result Web Part settings For the LiveReport Result Web Part. you can set parameters for the report. see the SharePoint documentation. Apply your entries. 7. Connection • Content Server: Determine the connection to the Content Server for which you want to display data. 4.

4. see the SharePoint documentation. 6. choose Stop Editing and publish the modified page. layout and advanced settings). click OK. For information on the general Web Part settings (appearance. The following selections are available: • None: You cannot select any list item. 10. Apply your entries. Click the WEB PART tab. Filtering • Show filtering tools: Displays filtering input controls to filter the displayed items by their type or title.3. 3. 2. Select the LiveReport Web Part. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 284 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Content Refresh • Show manual refresh button: Displays a Refresh button that refreshes the displayed items within the Web Part. To modify LiveReports Web Part settings: 1. open a page that contains the LiveReport Web Part. 5. Click Settings and select Edit Page. Click Web Part Properties. Connection • Content Server: Determine the connection to the Content Server for which you want to display data. • Display the report title: Displays the title of the report that has been configured in Content Server under the title bar of the Web Part. In SharePoint.5 Modifying LiveReports Web Part settings For the LiveReports Web Part you can define a Content Server whose reports you want to display. • Single: You can select only one list item. Edit the settings in the panel on the right side of the page. • Multiple: You can select several list items. 7.Chapter 10 Integrating and configuring OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts • Selection style: Defines how many list items in the Web Part can be selected to have them processed by a ribbon command.

Apply your entries. 4. Views are created in Central Administration or in the site settings. For more information about creating views. see “View management” on page 139. 3. The following selections are available: • None: You cannot select any list item. Click Settings and select Edit Page. • Multiple: You can select several list items. If there are more list items than displayable rows. users can navigate to additional pages within the Web Part. you can configure Content Server connection settings and specify how the borrowed items are displayed. Click Web Part Properties. Click the WEB PART tab. Select the My Borrowed Items Web Part. Filtering • Show filtering tools: Displays filtering input controls to filter the displayed items by their type or title. open a page that contains the My Borrowed Items Web Part. • Selection style: Defines how many list items in the Web Part can be selected to have them processed by a ribbon command. click OK. 2. In SharePoint. To modify My Borrowed Items Web Part settings: 1. 10. Content Refresh • Show manual refresh button: Displays a Refresh button that refreshes the displayed items within the Web Part. Edit the settings in the panel on the right side of the page. 5.3.3. Configuring OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts Views • View Name: Lets you select a different view for the Web Part. • Single: You can select only one list item. 6.6 Modifying My Borrowed Items Web Part settings For the My Borrowed Items Web Part. choose Stop Editing and publish the modified page. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 285 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . 10. 7. Behavior • Number of rows per page: Number of rows to be displayed on one page.

Content Refresh • Show manual refresh button: Displays a Refresh button that refreshes the displayed items within the Web Part. 4.3. Edit the settings in the panel on the right side of the page. In SharePoint. you can define if late tasks are highlighted and if tasks are opened in a new window.7 Modifying Workflow Inbox Web Part settings For the Workflow Inbox Web Part. see “View management” on page 139. Apply your entries. Views are created in Central Administration or in the site settings. 5. choose Stop Editing and publish the modified page. Behavior • Number of rows per page: Number of rows to be displayed on one page. 7. • Selection style: Defines how many list items in the Web Part can be selected to have them processed by a ribbon command. To modify Workflow Inbox Web Part settings: 1. On the WEB PART tab. Click Settings and select Edit page. For more information about creating views. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 286 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . see the SharePoint documentation. • Single: You can select only one list item. users can navigate to additional pages within the Web Part. open a page that contains the Workflow Inbox Web Part. click OK. Views • View Name: Lets you select a different view for the Web Part. If there are more list items than displayable rows. Connection • Content Server: Determine the connection to the Content Server for which you want to display data. The following options are available: • None: You cannot select any list item. 2. 10. Select the Workflow Inbox Web Part.Chapter 10 Integrating and configuring OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts For information on the general Web Part settings (appearance. 3. click Web Part Properties. layout and advanced settings). • Multiple: You can select several list items.

Views • View Name: Lets you select a different view for the Web Part. Apply your entries. In both cases.Administrator's Guide (LLESRES-AGD). Tip: You can use Enterprise Library search Web Parts to search multiple Content Server installations if the Content Server Remote Search module is installed and configured in your Content Server environment. 6. 10. you can add the Web Parts to other pages. 10. click OK. choose Stop Editing and publish the modified page. Content Refresh • Show manual refresh button: Displays a Refresh button that refreshes the displayed items in the Web Part. users can navigate to additional pages within the Web Part. Enterprise Library Advanced Search. layout and advanced settings).4. Behavior • Number of rows per page: Number of rows to be displayed on one page. If there are more list items than displayable rows. Activating and modifying Enterprise Library search Web Parts For information on the general Web Part settings (appearance. For more information about creating views. see the SharePoint documentation.4 Activating and modifying Enterprise Library search Web Parts The Enterprise Library search Web Parts are integrated on the Enterprise Library search pages which can be added to an Enterprise Search Center site. Alternatively. see OpenText Content Server Remote Search . For more information. see “Defining search settings” on page 87. Views are created in Central Administration or in the site settings. Connection • Content Server: Determine the connection to the Content Server for which you want to display data. you can modify the Web Parts. see “Enterprise Library Search Box. and Enterprise Library Search Results Web Parts” on page 268. For more information about Enterprise Library search Web Parts. see “View management” on page 139. To define general search settings. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 287 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .

Chapter 10 Integrating and configuring OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts

10.4.1 Activating the Enterprise Library search pages in
Enterprise Search Center
Before you can use a pre-configured Enterprise Library search page to search for
Enterprise Library in the Enterprise Search Center, you must activate the Enterprise
Library Search Pages feature.

Note: The Enterprise Library Search Pages feature is available for sites created
in SharePoint 2013 experience version. For more information on the Enterprise
Library search tab for sites created in SharePoint 2010 experience version, see
“Activating the Enterprise Library search tab in Enterprise Search Center”
on page 288.

To activate the feature:

1. In SharePoint, open an Enterprise Search Center site.

2. Click Settings and select Site settings.
3. In the Site Actions area, select Manage site features.
4. Click the Activate button displayed beside the OpenText Enterprise Library
Search Pages entry.
5. Check if three new pages (Livelink.aspx, Livelinkresult.aspx,
Livelinkadvanced.aspx) are available in the Site Page library.

6. Create a navigation link to the Livelink.aspx page in your Search Center. For
more information about how to customize site navigation links, see Microsoft
SharePoint documentation.

10.4.2 Activating the Enterprise Library search tab in
Enterprise Search Center
Before you can search for Enterprise Library documents in the Enterprise Search
Center, you must activate the Enterprise Library search tab.

Note: The OpenText Integration for Search Center is available for sites created
using the Microsoft SharePoint 2010 experience version. For more information
on Enterprise Library search pages for sites in the Microsoft SharePoint 2013
experience version, see “Activating the Enterprise Library search pages in
Enterprise Search Center” on page 288.

To activate the search tab:

1. In SharePoint, open an Enterprise Search Center site.

2. Click Settings and select Site settings.
3. In the Site Actions area, select Manage site features.

OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise
288 Library Integration – Administration Guide
SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1

10.4. Activating and modifying Enterprise Library search Web Parts

4. Click the Activate button displayed beside the OpenText Integration for the
Search Center entry.

5. Check if the Enterprise Library tab is now available.

10.4.3 Adding Enterprise Library search Web Parts to pages
Note: You can add the OpenText search Web Parts only if an administrator has
enabled the OpenText Enterprise Library Search Web Parts feature.

To add Enterprise Library search Web Parts:

1. In SharePoint, open the page to which you want to add one or more search Web
Parts.

2. Click Settings and select Edit Page.

3. On the page, select the zone in which you want to add the Web Parts.

4. On the INSERT tab, click Web Part.

5. In Categories, select OpenText Enterprise Library Search and the Web Parts that
you want to add:

• Enterprise Library Advanced Search to use the advanced search options.
• Enterprise Library Search Box to display the search box for simple search.
• Enterprise Library Search Results to display the search results.

6. Click Add.

10.4.4 Connecting two Enterprise Library search Web Parts
If you want to display the Enterprise Library Advanced Search Web Part and the
Enterprise Library Search Results Web Part on the same page, you must define a
Web Part connection between them.

To define the connection between two search Web Parts on the same page:

1. In SharePoint, open a page that contains the Enterprise Library Advanced
Search Web Part.

2. Click Settings and select Edit page.

3. Select the Enterprise Library Advanced Search Web Part.

4. Click the arrow icon in the title bar of the Enterprise Library Advanced Search
Web Part.

5. Click Connections - Send Enterprise Library Search URL To and then select
Enterprise Library Search Results.

OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise
Library Integration – Administration Guide 289
SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1

Chapter 10 Integrating and configuring OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts

To modify the settings of the integrated Web Parts, see “Modifying Enterprise
Library Advanced Search Web Part settings” on page 290 and “Modifying
Enterprise Library Search Results Web Part settings” on page 292.

10.4.5 Modifying Enterprise Library Search Box Web Part
settings
You can change the settings for the Enterprise Library Search Box Web Part.

To modify Enterprise Library Search Box Web Part settings:

Tip: Remember to set Target search results page URL in the Search Options to
the page on which you want to display the search results. For more
information, see below and “Modifying Enterprise Library Advanced Search
Web Part settings” on page 290.

1. In SharePoint, open a page that contains the Enterprise Library Search Box Web
Part.

2. Click Settings and select Edit page.
3. Select the Enterprise Library Search Box Web Part.
4. On the WEB PARTtab, click Web Part Properties.
5. Edit the settings in the panel on the right side of the page.
6. Apply your entries, click OK, choose Stop Editing and publish the modified
page.

10.4.6 Modifying Enterprise Library Advanced Search Web
Part settings
You can change the settings of the Enterprise Library Advanced Search Web Part.

To modify Enterprise Library Advanced Search Web Part settings:

Note: You can define the text for the search options and how the search
options are displayed, the page on which the results are displayed, and if
category and classification options should be displayed.

1. In SharePoint, open a page that contains the Enterprise Library Advanced
Search Web Part.

2. Click Settings and select Edit page.
3. Select the Enterprise Library Advanced Search Web Part.
4. On the WEB PART tab, click Web Part Properties.
5. Edit the settings in the right panel:

OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise
290 Library Integration – Administration Guide
SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1

10.4. Activating and modifying Enterprise Library search Web Parts

Field Configuration
Lets you save the currently defined search entries and selections for
property, category, and classification restrictions as default search criteria.
When a user opens the advanced search, these search criteria are
automatically predefined.
To save the current search criteria:
a. Make sure that the page is not in edit mode.

b. In the Advanced Search Web Part, add the fields and values that you
want to save.

c. Click Settings and select Edit page.

d. To open the Web Part menu, hover your mouse pointer over the
Advanced Search Web Part and click the arrow icon that appears in the
top-right corner of the Web Part.

e. Click Edit Web Part.

f. Click Save to keep the current search criteria or click Reset to return to
the original default criteria defined by the Web Part.

g. Click OK to confirm the message.

h. Save the Web Part settings.

i. Save the page.

Search Options

• Display fulltext options: Enables the user to perform a fulltext search.
• Fulltext title: Text to be displayed as title for the fulltext search.
• Display scope selector: Enables the user to narrow the scope for the
search.
• Scope title: Text to be displayed as title for the Scope panel.
• Display property options: Enables the user to search for Content Server
properties.
• Properties title: Text to be displayed as title for the properties panel.
• Display category options: Enables the user to search for Content Server
categories.
• Categories title: Text to be displayed as title for the Categories panel.
• Display classification options: Enables the user to search for Records
Management classifications.
• Classifications title: Text to be displayed as the title for the
Classifications panel.

OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise
Library Integration – Administration Guide 291
SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1

Chapter 10 Integrating and configuring OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts

Miscellaneous

• Name of results page: Name and path of the page on which the results
are displayed. Default is the search center page /[SearchCenter]/
Pages/livelinkresults.aspx. If you want to display the search
results on a different page, specify it here. The specified page must
contain the Enterprise Library Search Results Web Part.
6. Apply your entries, click OK, choose Stop Editing and publish the modified
page.

10.4.7 Modifying Enterprise Library Search Results Web Part
settings
You can change the settings of the Enterprise Library Search Results Web Part.

To modify Enterprise Library Search Results Web Part settings:

1. In SharePoint, open a page that contains the Enterprise Library Search Results
Web Part.

2. Click Settings and select Edit page.
3. Select the Enterprise Library Search Results Web Part.
4. On the WEB PART tab, click Web Part Properties.
5. Edit the settings in the right panel:

XSL Editor

• XSL Editor: Modifies the style sheet to define how to display the search
results. By default, the LivelinkSearchResults.xslt style sheet is
used.

Warning
Do not edit the style sheet unless you have thorough knowledge of
XSLT syntax. Wrong expressions in the style sheet may lead to the
search results not displayed at all.

Notes
• You can modify LivelinkSearchResults.xslt in Central
Administration to change the behavior of all result Web Parts in
the SharePoint farm. You can find the XSLT file in Central
Administration > Settings > Site contents > Opentext >
SharePoint > Livelink > Search > WebParts.
• To use the default style sheet LivelinkSearchResults.xslt in
Central Administration, select Use XSLT from Central
Administration.

OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise
292 Library Integration – Administration Guide
SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1

10.4. Activating and modifying Enterprise Library search Web Parts

• If you have uploaded a new version of the
LivelinkSearchResults.xslt file to the Opentext document
library of Central Administration, this change has no effect on a
Web Part instance where the XSLT style sheet has been modified
before. In this case, open the XSL editor, delete the whole
content, and store an empty style sheet in order to force using
the default style sheet from Central Administration again.

Result display

• Display the action picker: Displays a list of actions like “copy” or
“delete” which can be applied to multiple selected search results. The
action picker is displayed on top of the search results.
• Results per page: Defines the default number of results displayed on
one page.
• Maximum results per page: Defines the maximum number of results
displayed on one page that can be set by the user.
• Document summary length: Defines how many characters of the
document are displayed as summary.
• Display total number of results: Defines if the total number of results is
displayed.
• Display search response time: Defines if the search response time is
displayed.

Search Paging

• Maximum page links before current: Number of links to other result
pages before the current page to be displayed.
• Maximum page links after current: Number of links to other result
pages after the current page to be displayed.
• Previous link text label: Text to be displayed for link to the previous
result page.
• Next link text label: Text to be displayed for link to the next result page.
• Display at top of page: Displays links to other result pages at the
beginning of the page.
• Display at bottom of page: Displays links to other result pages at the
end of the page.

Query Settings

• Additional query terms: Defines settings that are sent to the server with
the query.

Note: You need thorough knowledge of the Content Server Search
API to define further settings. For more information about the

OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise
Library Integration – Administration Guide 293
SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1

This setting highlights the search terms in the search results. click OK. and enter the settings. To define further settings. you can enter a query as follows: where1="OTLocation":([internal folder ID])&lookfor1=complexquery&boolean1=and 6.Chapter 10 Integrating and configuring OpenText Enterprise Library Web Parts Search API. Example: If you want to restrict the search results to a specific folder...Search API Programming Guide (LLESSRC-PGD). OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 294 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . choose Stop Editing and publish the modified page. click . for example. specify search restrictions if you want to restrict the search results to a specific folder or to specific Content Server types. Currently. separated with &. see OpenText Content Server . only the hhterms=true setting is defined by default. Apply your entries. You can.

Part 5 Appendices .

.

The following table lists all conversion options including their titles. and applicable mappings. description. Notes • The User and User to text groups do not apply to SharePoint Online mappings. Application Governance & Archiving replaces any invalid metadata values from previous document versions with the latest valid metadata values to archive the metadata in Enterprise Library. Table 11-1: Content Type mapping conversion options Group Option Default Details Applied mappings Title Allow zero time only Description When converted to a Content Server Date attribute. see “Defining content type mappings to archive local content” on page 127. If it does not <-> Date/Time have a zero time field. • Conversion options only apply to a document’s latest version. Content Server the conversion fails Date attribute because part of the without time field source value will be lost.Chapter 11 Appendix – Content type mapping conversion options When you map SharePoint or SharePoint Online field types with Content Server attribute types. different conversion options are applied. the source date SharePoint Date AllowZeroTimePar or time must have a zero Time field tOnly time field. DiscardTimePart Yes Title Discard time field OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 297 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . If you defined content mappings for an on-premises SharePoint environment and a conversion fails. For more information about archiving metadata for document versions in an on- premises SharePoint environment.

it is discarded by the conversion. it r will be transformed to the smallest integer greater than or equal to the real number. the source real AllowZeroFraction number must have a alPartOnly zero fractional part for the conversion to succeed. the conversion fails because part of the data SharePoint will be lost.Chapter 11 Appendix – Content type mapping conversion options Group Option Default Details Applied mappings Description When converted to a Content Server Date attribute and the source date or time contains a non-zero time field. Title Allow zero fractional part only Description When converted to a Content Server Integer attribute. it is returned with the same value. Currency. If it already has a zero time part. Number. and Decimal fields Integer Title Ceiling real number <-> Content Server Description When converted to a Integer attribute Content Server Integer attribute and the source real number has a non- CeilingRealNumbe zero fractional part. FloorRealNumber Title Floor real number OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 298 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . it is discarded by the conversion. If it does not have a zero fractional part. Title Discard time field with warning Description If the source date or time DiscardTimePartW contains a non-zero time ithWarning field. If it has a zero fractional part. and a warning message is logged. it is used as an integer.

Group Option Default Details Applied mappings Description When converted to a Content Server Integer attribute and the source real number has a non- zero fractional part. it is used as an integer. If it has a zero fractional part. it will be rounded to the largest integer less than or equal to the real number. Title Round real number Description When converted to a Content Server Integer attribute and the source RoundRealNumber Yes real number has a non- zero fractional part. it will be transformed to the integral part of the real number. CutLongText Yes Title Truncate long text OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 299 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Any CutLongTextWith SharePointfield Warning only the left part of the Text source text of this <-> maximum length is Content Server returned from the String attribute conversion operation. Title Truncate long text with warning Description If the length of the source text exceeds the specified maximum length of the target type. If it has a zero fractional part. Title Truncate real number Description When converted to a Content Server Integer attribute and the source TruncateRealNum real number has a non- ber zero fractional part. it is used as an integer. and a warning message is logged. it is used as an integer. it will be rounded to the nearest integer. If it has a zero fractional part.

Title Length must fit Description The text length of the source text must be less than or equal to the LengthMustFit maximum length of the target type. Title Ignore invalid lookup value Description When converted to a SharePoint Lookup field and the input value is not a valid (existing) IgnoreInvalidLook field value of an item in Yes the lookup target list. In the meantime. only the value up to the specified number of characters is returned from the conversion. the conversion fails. because part of the source value will be lost. it is returned with the same value. Lookup values are stored as item SharePoint Lookup identifiers. Therefore.Chapter 11 Appendix – Content type mapping conversion options Group Option Default Details Applied mappings Description If the length of the source text exceeds the specified maximum length of the target type. no value will be returned from the conversion. OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 300 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . If the length exceeds the specified value. field Lookup they cannot be assigned <-> without an existing item. a warning message is logged. Any Content Server Title Ignore invalid lookup attribute value with warning Description When converted to a SharePoint Lookup field IgnoreInvalidLook and the input value is upValuesWithWar not a valid (existing) ning field value of an item in the lookup target list. no upValues value will be returned from the conversion. If it fits the target length.

Title Term label must exist Description When converted to a SharePoint Managed TermLabelMustExi Metadata field. Therefore. it Content Server is ignored during the string conversion. and a warning message is logged. Title Ignore invalid term label Description When converted to a SharePoint Managed IgnoreInvalidTerm Metadata field and the Yes input term label does not Label exist in the term store. Otherwise the conversion fails. they cannot be assigned without an existing item. the input st term label must be an existing value in the term store. the conversion fails because a part of the source value would be lost. Lookup values are stored as item identifiers. the input value must be a valid (existing) field value of an item in the LookupValueMust lookup target list. Group Option Default Details Applied mappings Title Lookup value must exist Description When converted to a SharePoint Lookup field. it is ignored during conversion without a warning message. Title Ignore invalid term label with warning Description When converted to a SharePoint SharePoint Managed Managed Metadata Managed Metadata field and the field IgnoreInvalidTerm metadata input term label does not <-> LabelWithWarning exist in the term store. If it is Exist not. SharePoint User IgnoreUnresolved Title Ignore unresolved user User field UserId <-> OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 301 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .

otherwise the conversion fails. Title Use display name Description Applicable when converting SharePoint user field to Content Server text field.Chapter 11 Appendix – Content type mapping conversion options Group Option Default Details Applied mappings Description If the input value cannot be resolved as a valid user in the target repository. it is ignored during conversion. field User to text Title Use login name -> Content Server string Description Applicable when converting a SharePoint user field to a Content Server text field. it is ignored <-> during conversion and a Content Server warning message is string logged. This UseDisplayName Yes option is mainly for situations that converting from Content Server back to SharePoint is not required or failure can SharePoint User be tolerant. This UseLoginName option is primarily used when conversion from Content Server back to SharePoint is not required or failure to do so is not important and can be ignored. Title User must exist Description The input value must be UserMustExist Yes able to be resolved as a valid user in the target repository. Title Ignore unresolved user with warning Content Server Description If the input value cannot User IgnoreUnresolved be resolved as a valid UserIdWithWarnin SharePoint user in the target User field g repository. Title Must be a valid date SharePoint Date Text to Date MustBeValidDate Time field <-> OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 302 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 .

SharePoint Url field Title Ignore invalid URL <-> Url IgnoreInvalidUrl Yes Content Server string OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 303 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . ignore it and log a warning message. Title Ignore invalid choice value Description When converted to a SharePoint Choice IgnoreInvalidChoic SharePoint Choice field. it is <-> ignored during Any Content Server conversion. ChoiceMustValid the input value(s) must be valid choice value(s). it is ignored during conversion and a warning message is logged. Title Ignore invalid date IgnoreInvalidDate Description If the text cannot be Content Server converted to a date time string successfully. attribute Title Ignore invalid choice value with warning Description When converted to a SharePoint Choice field. Group Option Default Details Applied mappings Description Applicable when converting a text to a date time value. Yes Title Ignore invalid date with warning IgnoreInvalidDate Description If the text cannot be WithWarning converted to a date time successfully. Title Choice value must exist Description When converted to a SharePoint Choice field. Yes and e if the input value is not a MultiChoice field Choice valid choice value. The text must be valid date time format. Otherwise the conversion fails. otherwise the conversion fails. IgnoreInvalidChoic if the input value is not a eWithWarning valid choice value. ignore it.

the input value must be a valid URL. it is ignored during conversion. Any SharePoint Title Ignore extra values with field warning <-> Multi Value Content Server Description When a Content Server Attribute with attribute that supports Multi Row option IgnoreExtraValues multiple values is enabled WithWarning involved in the conversion. MustProcessAlllVa Title Must process all values lues OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise 304 Library Integration – Administration Guide SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . Title Ignore extra values Description When a Content Server attribute that supports IgnoreExtraValues Yes multiple values is involved in the conversion.Chapter 11 Appendix – Content type mapping conversion options Group Option Default Details Applied mappings Description When converted to a SharePoint URL field and the input value is not a valid URL. the extra values that cannot be processed are ignored and a warning message is logged. otherwise the conversion fails. it is ignored during conversion and a warning message is logged. Title URL must be valid Description When converted to a UrlMustValid SharePoint URL field. the extra values that cannot be processed are ignored. Title Ignore invalid URL with warning Description When converted to a SharePoint URL field IgnoreInvalUrlWit and the input value is hWarning not a valid URL.

By default. the mapping of lookup tables is not enabled.htm?nodeid=26316182). you can configure which property or attribute types can be mapped in OpenText Application Governance & Archiving.opentext. Group Option Default Details Applied mappings Description When a Content Server attribute that supports multiple values is involved in the conversion.dll/fetch/-15106263/15106294/ 27189445/18493266/25750279/25749175/26316370/26317837/773e48a6-dbc7-4435- ad9d-77e271f04e9a. Additionally. Note: If you map SharePoint properties to Content Server Lookup attributes. otherwise the conversion fails. all the values must be processed. Title Ignore invalid popup value with warning Any SharePoint field IgnoreInvalidPopu Description Ignores the invalid pop- Popup Value <-> pWithWaning up value during the Content Server value conversion. make sure that the properties contain only values that are covered in the Lookup values. For more information. Title Ignore invalid popup value IgnoreInvalidPopu Yes Description Ignores the invalid pop- p up value during the value conversion. and Popup Attribute logs a warning message. To open this section in SDK. Title Popup value must valid Description The value must be a PopupMustValid valid pop-up value. you also can use the following path: Product Features > Archiving > General Archiving Concepts > Content Type and Category Mapping > Configuration OpenText Application Governance & Archiving for Microsoft® SharePoint® – Enterprise Library Integration – Administration Guide 305 SHLES100700-AGD-EN-1 . It must be configured in the PropertyTypesConfig.com/knowledge/cs. otherwise the conversion fails.xml file as described in the SDK. see section Matching SharePoint property and Content Server attribute types of the SDK in the OpenText Knowledge Center (https:// knowledge.